Nx2000 Technical Manual

User Manual
Variable Frequency Drive
0.4kW HD – 11kW ND (230V, 415V)
Safety Instruction
Read this manual carefully before
Installation, wiring, operating,
servicing or inspecting this
Equipment. Keep this manual within
easy reach for quick reference
This operation manual is intended for users with basic knowledge of electricity and
electric devices.
* LTVF-Nx2000+ is the official name for Nx2000+.
Safety Information
Safety Information
Read and follow all safety instructions in this manual precisely to avoid unsafe
operating conditions, property damage, personal injury, or even death.
Safety Symbols in This Manual
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in severe
injury or even death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in injury or
even death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in minor
injury or property damage.
Safety Information
• Never remove the product cover or touch the internal printed circuit board (PCB) or any
contact points when the power is on. Also, do not start the product when the cover is
open. This may cause an electrical shock due to the exposure of high voltage terminals
or live parts.
• Even if the power is off, do not open the cover unless it is absolutely necessary like for
the wiring operation or for regular inspection. Opening the cover may still cause an
electrical shock even after the power is blocked because the product has been charged
for a long period of time.
• Wait at least 10 minutes before opening the covers and exposing the terminal
connections. Before starting work on the inverter, test the connections to ensure all DC
voltage has been fully discharged. Otherwise it may cause an electrical shock and
result in personal injury or even death.
ii
Safety Information
• Make sure to install ground connection between the equipment and the motor for safe
use. Otherwise it may cause an electrical shock and result in personal injury or even
death.
• Do not turn on the power if the product is damaged or faulty. If you find that the product
is faulty, disconnect the power supply and have the product professionally repaired.
• The inverter becomes hot during operation. Avoid touching the inverter until it has
cooled to avoid burns. Avoid touching the inverter until it has cooled to avoid burns.
• Do not allow foreign objects, such as screws, metal chips, debris, water, or oil to get
inside the inverter. Allowing foreign objects inside the inverter may cause the inverter
to malfunction or result in a fire.
• Do not operate the switch with wet hands. Otherwise it may cause an electrical shock
and result in personal injury or even death.
• Check the information about the protection level for the circuits and devices.
The connection terminals and parts below have electrical protection class 0. This
means that the protection class of the circuit depends on basic insulation and there is a
danger of electric shock if the basic insulation is not working properly. Therefore, take
the same protective measures as handling the power line when connecting wires to the
terminals or the device below, or when installing or using the devices.
- Multi-function Input: P1–P5, CM
- Analog Input/Output: VR, V1, I2, AO
- Digital Output: 24, A1/B1/C1, A2/C2
- Communication: S+/ S-
- Fan
• The protection level of this equipment is electrical protective class 1.
• Do not change the inside of the product at your own discretion. This may result in injury
or damage to the product due to failure or malfunction. Also, products changed at your
own discretion will be excluded from the product warranty.
• Do not use the inverter for single phase motor operation as it has been designed for
three phase motor operation. Using a single phase motor may damage the motor.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Heavy objects may damage the
cable and result in electric shock.
iii
Safety Information
Note
Following IEC 60439-1, the maximum allowed short-circuit current at the power inlet is
100kA. Depending on the selected MCCB, the Nx2000+ inverter is suitable for use in
circuits capable of delivering a maximum of 100 kA symmetrical current at the drive's
maximum rated voltage. The following table shows the recommended MCCB for RMS
symmetrical amperes.
Working Voltage DN□-□□□C DN□-□□□S

240V (50/60Hz) 50 kA 100 kA
480V (50/60Hz) 25 kA 65 kA
iv
Safety Information
Quick Reference Table

The table below is a summary of situations that users encounter frequently while
using the product. For faster and easier information searching, see the table below.
Situation Ref.
I want to run a slightly higher rated motor than the inverter’s rated capacity. p.169
I want to configure the inverter to start operating as soon as the power
p.72
source is applied.
I want to configure the motor’s parameters. p.124
I want to set up sensorless vector control. p.127

p.187,
Something seems to be wrong with the inverter or the motor.
p.264
What is auto tuning? p.124
What are the recommended wiring lengths? p.26
The motor is too noisy. p.143
I want to apply PID control on my system. p.117
What are the factory default settings for P1–P5 multi-function terminals? p.23
I want to check recent trips and fault histories. p 256
I want to change the inverter’s operation frequency using volume resistance. p.47
I want to install a frequency meter on the analog terminal. p.24
I want to check the motor's current using an ammeter. p.51
I want to operate the inverter using a multi-step speed configuration. p.67
The motor is too hot. p.167
The inverter is too hot. p.177
The cooling fan does not work. p.147
I want to know how to store the inverter when it is not used. p.275
v
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Preparing the Installation .................................................................................... 1
1.1 Product Identification .................................................................................. 1
1.2 Part Names................................................................................................. 2
1.3 Installation Considerations .......................................................................... 4
1.4 Selecting the Installation Site ...................................................................... 5
1.5 Cable Selection .......................................................................................... 9
2 Installing the Inverter ......................................................................................... 10

2.1 Mount on the Wall or within the Panel ....................................................... 12
2.2 Wiring ....................................................................................................... 15
2.3 Post-Installation Checklist ......................................................................... 31
2.4 Test Run ................................................................................................... 33
3 Learning to Perform Basic Operations ............................................................. 35

3.1 About the Keypad ..................................................................................... 35
3.1.1 About the Display ......................................................................... 36
3.1.2 Operation Keys ............................................................................ 37
3.1.3 Control Menu................................................................................ 38
3.2 Learning to Use the Keypad ..................................................................... 38
3.2.1 Group and Code Selection ........................................................... 39
3.2.2 Navigating Directly to Different Codes (Jump Codes) ................... 40
3.2.3 Setting Parameter Values............................................................. 41
3.3 Actual Application Examples ..................................................................... 42
3.3.1 Acceleration Time Configuration................................................... 42
3.3.2 Frequency Reference Configuration ............................................. 43
3.3.3 Jog Frequency Configuration........................................................ 44
3.3.4 Parameter Initialization ................................................................. 45
3.3.5 Frequency Setting (Keypad) and Operation (via Terminal Input) .. 46
3.3.6 Frequency Setting (Potentiometer) and Operation (Terminal Input)
.................................................................................................... 47
3.3.7 Frequency setting with (internal) potentiometer and operation
command with the keypad [RUN] key .......................................... 49
vi
Table of Contents
3.4 Monitoring the Operation .......................................................................... 51

3.4.1 Output Current Monitoring ............................................................ 51
3.4.2 Trip Condition Monitor .................................................................. 52
4 Learning Basic Features.................................................................................... 54

4.1 Frequency Reference Configuration ......................................................... 57
4.1.1 Set the Operation Frequency from the Keypad - Direct Input ....... 57
4.1.2 Set the Operation Frequency from the Keypad - Using [▲] and [▼]
keys ............................................................................................ 58
4.1.3 V1 Terminal as the Source ........................................................... 58
4.1.4 Built-in Volume Input (V0) as the Source ...................................... 64
4.1.5 Setting a Reference Frequency using Input Current (I2) ............... 64
4.1.6 Frequency Reference Source Configuration for RS-485
Communication ........................................................................... 66
4.2 Frequency Hold by Analog Input ............................................................... 66
4.3 Multi-step Frequency Configuration .......................................................... 67
4.4 Command Source Configuration ............................................................... 69
4.4.1 The Keypad as a Command Input Device .................................... 69
4.4.2 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Fwd/Rev Run
Commands)................................................................................. 69
4.4.3 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Run and Rotation
Direction Commands) .................................................................. 70
4.4.4 RS-485 Communication as a Command Input Device .................. 71
4.5 Forward or Reverse Run Prevention ......................................................... 71
4.6 Power-on Run........................................................................................... 72
4.7 Reset and Restart ..................................................................................... 73
4.8 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times............................................ 74
4.8.1 Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency ............................. 74
4.8.2 Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency ............................. 75
4.8.3 Multi-step Acc/Dec Time Configuration......................................... 76
4.8.4 Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency .................................................. 78
4.9 Acc/Dec Pattern Configuration .................................................................. 79
4.10 Stopping the Acc/Dec Operation ............................................................... 81
4.11 V/F Control ............................................................................................... 81
4.11.1 Linear V/F Pattern Operation ........................................................ 81
4.11.2 Square Reduction V/F Pattern Operation ..................................... 82
vii
Table of Contents
4.11.3 User V/F Pattern Operation .......................................................... 83

4.12 Torque Boost ............................................................................................ 85
4.12.1 Manual Torque Boost ................................................................... 85
4.12.2 Auto Torque Boost ....................................................................... 86
4.13 Motor Output Voltage Adjustment ............................................................. 87
4.14 Start Mode Setting .................................................................................... 87
4.14.1 Accelerating Start ......................................................................... 87
4.14.2 DC Braking After Start .................................................................. 88
4.14.3 Initial Excitation of Stop Status (Pre-excite) .................................. 89
4.15 Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................... 89
4.15.1 Deceleration Stop ......................................................................... 89
4.15.2 DC Braking After Stop .................................................................. 90
4.15.3 Free Run Stop .............................................................................. 91
4.15.4 Power Braking .............................................................................. 92
4.16 Frequency Limit ........................................................................................ 93
4.16.1 Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start Frequency 93
4.16.2 Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequency Values 94
4.16.3 Frequency Jump........................................................................... 95
4.17 2nd Operation Mode .................................................................................. 96
4.18 Multi-Function Input Terminal Control ....................................................... 97
4.19 Fire Mode Operation ................................................................................. 98
5 Learning Advanced Features .......................................................................... 100

5.1 Operating with Auxiliary References ....................................................... 102
5.2 Jog Operation ......................................................................................... 107
5.2.1 Jog Operation 1-Forward............................................................ 107
5.2.2 Jog Operation 2-Fwd/Rev Jog by Multi-Function Terminal ......... 108
5.3 Up-down Operation................................................................................. 109
5.4 3-Wire Operation .................................................................................... 110
5.5 Safe Operation mode .............................................................................. 112
5.6 Dwell Operation ...................................................................................... 113
5.7 Slip Compensation Operation ................................................................. 115
5.8 PID Control ............................................................................................. 117
5.8.1 Basic PID Operation ................................................................... 117
viii
Table of Contents
5.8.2 Pre-PID Operation ...................................................................... 122

5.8.3 PID Operation Sleep mode ......................................................... 122
5.8.4 PID Switching (PID Openloop) ................................................... 123
5.9 Auto-tuning ............................................................................................. 124
5.10 Sensorless Vector Control for Induction Motors ...................................... 127
5.10.1 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Setting for Induction Motors
.................................................................................................. 128
5.10.2 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide for Induction Motors 132
5.11 Energy Buffering Operation (Kinetic Energy Buffering) ........................... 133
5.12 Energy Saving Operation ........................................................................ 136
5.12.1 Manual Energy Saving Operation ............................................... 136
5.12.2 Automatic Energy Saving Operation ........................................... 137
5.13 Speed Search Operation ........................................................................ 137
5.14 Auto Restart Settings .............................................................................. 142
5.15 Operational Noise Settings (Change of Carrier Frequency Settings)....... 143
5.16 2nd Motor Operation ................................................................................ 145
5.17 Commercial Power Source Transition ..................................................... 146
5.18 Cooling Fan Control ................................................................................ 147
5.19 Input Power Frequency and Voltage Settings ......................................... 148
5.20 Parameter save ...................................................................................... 148
5.21 Parameter Initialization ........................................................................... 149
5.22 Parameter Lock ...................................................................................... 151
5.23 Changed Parameter Display ................................................................... 152
5.24 Timer Settings ........................................................................................ 152
5.25 Brake Control.......................................................................................... 153
5.26 Multi-Function Relay On/Off Control ....................................................... 154
5.27 Press Regeneration Prevention .............................................................. 155
5.28 Analog Output......................................................................................... 157
5.28.1 Current Analog Output................................................................ 157
5.29 Digital Output .......................................................................................... 159
5.29.1 Multi-Function Relay Settings ..................................................... 159
5.29.2 Trip Output to Multi-Function Relay ............................................ 164
ix
Table of Contents
5.29.3 Multi-Function Relay Terminal Delay Time Settings ................... 165

5.30 Base Block.............................................................................................. 166
6 Learning Protection Features.......................................................................... 167

6.1 Motor Protection ..................................................................................... 167
6.1.1 Electronic Thermal Motor Overheating Prevention (ETH) ........... 167
6.1.2 Overload Early Warning and Trip ............................................... 169
6.1.3 Stall Prevention and Flux Braking ............................................... 171
6.2 Inverter and Sequence Protection ........................................................... 175
6.2.1 Input/output Open-phase Protection ........................................... 175
6.2.2 External Trip Signal .................................................................... 176
6.2.3 Inverter Overload Protection ....................................................... 177
6.2.4 Speed Command Loss ............................................................... 177
6.2.5 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration ............................ 179
6.2.6 Fan Fault Detection .................................................................... 183
6.2.7 Lifetime Diagnosis of Components ............................................. 183
6.2.8 Low Voltage Fault Trip................................................................ 184
6.2.9 Output Block by Multi-Function Terminal .................................... 184
6.2.10 Trip Status Reset........................................................................ 185
6.2.11 Inverter Diagnosis State ............................................................. 185
6.2.12 Operation Mode on Option Card Trip.......................................... 186
6.2.13 No Motor Trip ............................................................................. 187
6.2.14 Low Voltage Trip 2 ..................................................................... 187
6.2.15 Inverter Pre-overheat Warning ................................................... 188
6.2.16 Torque Detection Protection Action ............................................ 189
6.3 Fault/Warning List ................................................................................... 191
7 RS-485 Communication Features ................................................................... 193

7.1 Communication Standards ...................................................................... 193
7.2 Communication System Configuration .................................................... 195
7.2.1 Communication Line Connection ................................................ 195
7.2.2 Setting Communication Parameters ........................................... 196
7.2.3 Setting Operation Command and Frequency.............................. 198
7.2.4 Command Loss Protective Operation ......................................... 199
7.2.5 Setting Virtual Multi-Function Input ............................................. 199
7.2.6 Saving Parameters Defined by Communication ......................... 200
7.2.7 Total Memory Map for Communication ....................................... 200
7.2.8 Parameter Group for Data Transmission .................................... 201
x
Table of Contents
7.3 Communication Protocol ......................................................................... 202

7.3.1 Modbus-RTU Protocol ................................................................ 202
7.4 DriveConnect .......................................................................................... 205
7.5 Nx2000+ Expansion Common Area Parameter ....................................... 209
7.5.1 Monitoring Area Parameter (Read Only) .................................... 209
7.5.2 Control Area Parameter (Read/ Write)........................................ 214
7.5.3 Memory Control Area Parameter (Read and Write) .................... 216
8 Table of Functions ........................................................................................... 218

8.1 Operation Group ..................................................................................... 218
8.2 Drive Group (PAR→dr) ........................................................................... 219
8.3 Basic Function Group (PAR→bA) ........................................................... 223
8.4 Expanded Function Group (PAR→Ad).................................................... 227
8.5 Control Function Group (PAR→Cn) ........................................................ 233
8.6 Input Terminal Block Function Group (PAR→In) ..................................... 236
8.7 Output Terminal Block Function Group (PAR→OU) ................................ 240
8.8 Communication Function Group (PAR→CM) .......................................... 245
8.9 Application Function Group (PAR→AP) .................................................. 249
8.10 Protection Function Group (PAR→Pr) .................................................... 252
8.11 2nd Motor Function Group (PAR→M2) ................................................... 256
9 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 259

9.1 Trip and Warning .................................................................................... 259
9.1.1 Fault Trips .................................................................................. 259
9.1.2 Warning Messages..................................................................... 263
9.2 Troubleshooting Fault Trips .................................................................... 264
9.3 Other Faults ............................................................................................ 266
10 Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 271

10.1 Regular Inspection Lists.......................................................................... 271
10.1.1 Daily Inspections ........................................................................ 271
10.1.2 Annual Inspections ..................................................................... 273
10.1.3 Bi-annual Inspections ................................................................. 274
xi
Table of Contents
10.2 Storage and Disposal ............................................................................. 275

10.2.1 Storage ...................................................................................... 275
10.2.2 Disposal ..................................................................................... 276
11 Technical Specification ................................................................................... 277

11.1 Input and Output Specification ................................................................ 277
11.2 Product Specification Details .................................................................. 279
11.3 External Dimensions ............................................................................... 281
11.4 Peripheral Devices.................................................................................. 285
11.5 Fuse and Reactor Specifications ............................................................ 286
11.6 Terminal Screw Specification .................................................................. 287
11.7 Braking Resistor Specification ................................................................ 288
11.8 Continuous Rated Current Derating ........................................................ 289
11.9 Heat Emission ........................................................................................ 291
11.10 Remote Keypad Option........................................................................... 292
Index ...................................................................................................................... 295
xii
Preparing the Installation
1 Preparing the Installation

This chapter provides details on product identification, part names, correct installation
and cable specifications. To install the inverter correctly and safely, carefully read and
follow the instructions.
1.1 Product Identification

The Nx2000+ Inverter is manufactured in a range of product groups based on drive
capacity and power source specifications. Product name and specifications are
detailed on the rating plate. Check the product specification before installing the
product and make sure that it is suitable for the intended use. For more detailed
product specifications, refer to 11.1 input and Output Specification on page 277.
Note
Open the packaging and check the product name first and whether that the product is free
from defects. If the product is found to be faulty, contact your supplier.
Model Name
Power Source Specification ND/HD Amps

Output Specification
Serial Number
Enclosure Type
Part Number Description:
1
1.2 Part Names

See the assembly diagram below for the part names. Detailed images may vary
between product groups.
0.4–4.0 kW (3-Phase)
2
5.5–7.5 kW (3-Phase)
3
1.3 Installation Considerations

Inverters are composed of various precision, electronic devices, and therefore the
installation environment can significantly impact the lifespan and reliability of the
product. The table below details the ideal operation and installation conditions for the
inverter.
Items Description
Ambient
Heavy load: -10–50℃, Normal load: -10–40℃
temperature*
Ambient humidity Less than 95% relative humidity (no condensation)
Storage
-20–65°C
temperature
Environmental An environment free from corrosive or flammable gases, oil residue,
factors or dust
Lower than 3,280 ft (1,000 m) above sea level, less than 1G (9.8
m/sec2)
Operation
(Apply derating of 1% at a time on voltage/output current for every
altitude/oscillation
100 m increase starting from 1,000 m, going up to a maximum of
4,000m)
Air Pressure 70–106 kPa
* The ambient temperature is the temperature measured at a point 2” (5 cm) from the
surface of the inverter.
Do not allow the ambient temperature to exceed the allowable range while operating
the inverter.
4
1.4 Selecting the Installation Site

When selecting an installation location consider the following points:
• The location must be free from vibration, and the inverter must be installed on a
wall that can support the inverter’s weight.
• The inverter can become very hot during operation. Install the inverter on a surface
that is fire-resistant or flame-retardant and with sufficient clearance around the
inverter to allow air to circulate.
5
• Make sure that sufficient air circulation is provided around the product. When
installing the product inside the panel, carefully consider the position of the
product's cooling fan and the ventilation louver. The product must be placed for the
cooling fan to discharge heat satisfactorily during the operation.
6
• If you are installing multiple inverters in one location, arrange them side-by-side
and remove the top covers. The top covers MUST be removed for side-by-side
installations. Use a flat head screwdriver to remove the top covers.
7
• If you are installing multiple inverters, of different ratings, provide sufficient

clearance to meet the clearance specifications of the larger inverter.
8
1.5 Cable Selection

When you install power and signal cables in the terminal blocks, only use cables that
meet the required specification for the safe and reliable operation of the product.
Refer to the following information to assist you with cable selection.
• Wherever possible use cables with the largest cross-sectional area for mains power
wiring, to ensure that voltage drop does not exceed 2%.
• Use copper cables rated for 600 V, 75℃ for power terminal wiring.
• Use copper cables rated for 300 V, 75℃ for control terminal wiring.
Ground Cable and Power Cable Specification

Ground Power Terminal Wiring
Terminal
Capacity (kW) mm2 AWG
mm2 AWG Block Size
R/S/T U/V/W R/S/T U/V/W
0.4
4 12 1.5 1.5 16 16 M3
0.75
1.5
3–Phase 4 12 4 2.5 12 14 M4
2.2
200 V
4 6 10 6 6 10 10 M4
5.5
6 10 16 10 6 8 M4
7.5
0.4
0.75
2.5 14 1.5 1.5 16 16 M3.5
1.5
3–Phase
2.2
400 V
4 6 10 2.5 2.5 14 14 M4
5.5
6 10 10 6 8 10 M4
7.5
Signal (Control) Cable Specifications

Control Terminal Wiring
Without Crimp Terminal With Crimp Terminal
Terminals
Connectors Connectors
mm2 AWG mm2 AWG
24/P1,
P2–P5,
CM
0.8 18 0.5 20
A1/B1/C1/A2/C2,
VR/V1/I2/AO/CM,
S+/S-
9
Installing the Inverter
2 Installing the Inverter

This chapter describes the physical and electrical installation methods, including
mounting and wiring of the product. Refer to the flowchart and basic configuration
diagram provided below to understand the procedures and installation methods to be
followed to install the product correctly.
Installation Flowchart
The flowchart lists the sequence to be followed during installation. Install the product
following the flowchart and check the operation status. For more information on each
step, refer to the pages below.
Product Identification (p.1 Ref.)
Select the Installation Location (p.4 Ref.)
Mounting the Inverter (p.12 Ref.)
Wiring the Ground Connection (p.17 Ref.)

Power and Signal Wiring (14)
Power and Signal Wiring (p.18 Ref.)
Post-Installation Checks (p.31 Ref.)
Turning on the Inverter
Parameter Configuration (p.41 Ref.)
Testing (p.33 Ref.)
10
Basic Configuration
The diagram below shows the basic system configuration. Use the diagram for
reference when configuring the system by connecting the product with peripheral
devices. Ensure that the product has a suitable rating for the configuration and that all
the required peripherals and optional devices (brake unit, reactors, noise filters, etc.)
are available. For more details on peripheral devices, see to 11.4 Peripheral Devices
on page 285.
• Note that the illustration on this user manual may represent the product with the cover
open or the circuit breaker removed for explanation. When operating the inverter, make
sure to follow the instructions of user manual after fully installing the necessary parts,
such as the cover and circuit breaker.
• Do not start or stop the inverter with a magnetic contactor. This may cause damage to
the inverter.
• If the inverter is damaged and loses control, the machine may cause a dangerous
situation. Install an additional safety device such as an emergency brake to prevent
these situations.
• High levels of current draw during power-on can affect the system. Ensure that
correctly rated circuit breakers are installed to operate safely during power-on
situations.
• Reactors can be installed to improve the power factor. Note that reactors may be
installed within 30 ft (9.14 m) from the power source if the input power exceeds 10
times of inverter capacity. Refer to 11.5 Fuse and Reactor Specifications on page
286 and carefully select a reactor that meets the requirements.
11
2.1 Mount on the Wall or within the Panel

Mount the inverter on a wall or inside a panel following the procedures provided below.
Before installation, ensure that there is sufficient space to meet the clearance
specifications, and that there are no obstacles impeding the cooling fan’s air flow.
Select a wall or panel suitable to support the installation. Refer to 11.3 External
dimensions on page 281 and check the inverter’s mounting bracket dimensions.
1 Use a level to draw a horizontal line on the mounting surface, and then carefully
mark the fixing points.
2 Drill the two upper mounting bolt holes, and then install the mounting bolts. Do not
fully tighten the bolts at this time. Fully tighten the mounting bolts after the inverter
has been mounted.
12
3 Mount the inverter on a wall or inside a panel using two mounting bolts. Fully
tighten the upper mounting bolts, then install two lower mounting bolts and tighten
fully to mount the inverter. Ensure that the inverter is placed flat on the mounting
surface, and that the installation surface can securely support the weight of the
inverter.
Note
The quantity and dimensions of the mounting brackets vary based on the frame size.
Refer to 11.3 External dimensions on page 281 for detailed information about your
model.
13
• Do not transport the inverter by lifting with the inverter’s covers or plastic surfaces.
The inverter may tip over if covers break, causing injuries or damage to the product.
Always support the inverter using the metal frames when moving it.
• Use a transport method that is suitable for the weight of the product. Some high
capacity inverters can be too heavy for one person to carry. Use an adequate number
of people and transport tool to safely move the product.
• Do not install the inverter on the floor or mount it sideways against a wall. The inverter
must be installed vertically, on a wall or inside a panel, with its rear flat on the
mounting surface.
14
2.2 Wiring
Open the front cover, remove the cable guides and control terminal cover, and then
install the ground connection as specified. Complete the cable connections by
connecting an appropriately rated cable to the terminals on the power and control
terminal blocks. Read the following information carefully before carrying out wiring
connections to the inverter. All warning instructions must be followed.
• Install the inverter before carrying out wiring connections.

• Ensure that no small metal debris, such as wire cut-offs, remain inside the inverter.
Metal debris in the inverter may cause inverter failure.
• Tighten terminal screws to their specified torque. Loose terminal block screws may
allow the cables to disconnect and cause short circuit or inverter failure. Refer to 11.6
Terminal Screw Specification on page 287 for torque specifications.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Heavy objects may damage the
cable and result in electric shock.
• The power supply system for this equipment (inverter) is a grounded system. Only use
a grounded power supply system for this equipment (inverter). Do not use a TT, TN, IT,
or corner grounded system with the inverter.
• The equipment may generate direct current in the protective ground wire. When
installing the residual current device (RCD) or residual current monitoring (RCM), only
Type B RCDs and RCMs can be used.
• Use cables with the largest cross-sectional area, appropriate for power terminal wiring,
to ensure that voltage drop does not exceed 2%.
• Use copper cables rated at 600 V, 75℃ for power terminal wiring.
• Use copper cables rated at 300 V, 75℃ for control terminal wiring.
• Separate control circuit wires from the main circuits and other high voltage circuits (200
V relay sequence circuit).
• Check for short circuits or wiring failure in the control circuit. They could cause system
failure or device malfunction.
• Use shielded cables for control terminal wiring. Failure to do so may cause malfunction
due to interference. When grounding is needed, use shielded twisted pair (STP)
cables.
• If you need to re-wire the terminals due to wiring-related faults, ensure that the inverter
keypad display is turned off and the charge lamp under the front cover is off before
working on wiring connections. The inverter may hold a high voltage electric charge
long after the power supply has been turned off.
15
Step 1: Remove the front cover
For the power terminal and control terminal wiring, the front cover must be
disassembled in order. Note that the disassembling procedure of front cover and
control terminal cover may vary depending on the product group. Disassemble each
cover in the following order:
1 Loosen the bolt that secures the front cover (R). Push and hold the latch on the
right side of the cover. Then remove the cover by lifting it from the bottom and
moving it away from the front of the inverter.
Note
If you have installed the remote keypad, remove the plastic cover under the lower-right
part of the control terminal cover, and then connect the remote keypad signal to the RJ-45
connector.
16
Step 2: Ground Connection
Remove the front cover(s) and the control terminal cover. Then follow the instructions
below to install the ground connection for the inverter.
1 Locate the ground terminal and connect an appropriately rated ground cable to
the terminals. Refer to 1.5 Cable Selection on page 9 to find the appropriate
cable specification for your installation.
2 Connect the other ends of the ground cables to the supply earth (ground) terminal.
Note
• 200 V products require Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be < 100Ω.
• 400 V products require Special Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be less
than < 10 Ω.
Make sure to install ground connection between the equipment and the motor for safe
use. Otherwise it may cause an electrical shock and result in personal injury or even
death.
17
Step3 Power Terminal Wiring
The following illustration shows the terminal layout on the power terminal block. Refer
to the detailed descriptions to understand the function and location of each terminal
before making wiring connections. Ensure that the cables selected meet or exceed
the specifications in 1.5 Cable Selection on page 9 before installing them.
• Apply rated torques to the terminal screws. Loose screws may cause short circuits
and malfunctions. Tightening the screw too much may damage the terminals and
cause short circuits and malfunctions.
• Use copper wires only with 600 V, 75℃ rating for the power terminal wiring, and 300
V, 75℃rating for the control terminal wiring.
• Do not connect two wires to one terminal when wiring the power.
• Power supply wirings must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting
them to the U, V, W terminals causes internal damages to the inverter. Motor should
be connected to the U, V, and W Terminals. Arrangement of the phase sequence is
not necessary.
18
0.4–0.8 kW
1.5–2.2 kW
4.0 kW
19
5.5–7.5 kW
Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions
Terminal Labels Name Description

Ground Terminal Connect earth grounding.
R(L1)/S(L2)/T(L3) AC power input terminal Mains supply AC power connections.
B1/B2 Brake resistor terminals Brake resistor wiring connection.
3-phase induction motor wiring
U/V/W Motor output terminals
connections.
Note
• Do not use 3 core cables to connect a remotely located motor with the inverter.
• When operating Brake resistor, the motor may vibrate under the Flux braking
operation. In this case, please turn off the Flux braking (Pr.50).
• Make sure that the total cable length does not exceed 665 ft (202 m). For inverters < =
4.0 kW capacity, ensure that the total cable length does not exceed 165 ft (50 m).
• Long cable runs can cause reduced motor torque in low frequency applications due to
voltage drop. Long cable runs also increase a circuit’s susceptibility to stray
capacitance and may trigger over-current protection devices or result in malfunction of
equipment connected to the inverter. Voltage drop is calculated by using the following
formula:
Voltage Drop (V) = [√3 X cable resistance (mΩ/m) X cable length (m) X current (A)] /
1000
• Use cables with the largest possible cross-sectional area to ensure that voltage drop is
minimized over long cable runs. Lowering the carrier frequency and installing a micro
surge filter may also help to reduce voltage drop.
Distance < 330 ft (50 m) < 330 ft (100 m) > 330 ft (100 m)
Allowed Carrier Frequency < 15 kHz < 5 kHz < 2.5 kHz
20
Do not connect power to the inverter until installation has been fully completed and the
inverter is ready to be operated. Otherwise it may cause an electrical shock and result in
personal injury or even death.
• Power supply cables must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals and output wiring
to the motor must be connected to the U, V, and W terminals. Opposite connections
may damage the product.
• Use insulated ring lugs when connecting cables to R/S/T and U/V/W terminals.
• The inverter’s power terminal connections can cause harmonics that may interfere with
other communication devices located near to the inverter. To reduce interference the
installation of noise filters or line filters may be required.
• Are advanced-phase capacitors, surge protection and electromagnetic interference
filters installed correctly?
• To avoid circuit interruption or damaging connected equipment, do not install magnetic
contactors on the output side of the inverter (motor side). Metal debris in the inverter
may cause inverter failure.
21
Step 4 Control Terminal Wiring
The illustrations below show the detailed layout of control wiring terminals, and control
board switches. Ensure that the cables selected meet or exceed the specifications in
1.5 Cable Selection on page 9 before installing them.
Control Board Switches
Switch Description
SW1 NPN/PNP mode selection switch
SW2 Terminating Resistor selection switch
Connector
Name Description
Connect to Remote I/O or smart copier, connect with RS-485
RJ-45 Connector
communication.
22
Input Terminal Labels and Descriptions
Terminal
Category Name Description
Labels
Configurable for multi-function input
terminals.
Factory default terminals and setup are as
follows:
Multi-function • P1: Fx
Multi- P1–P5
Input 1-5 • P2: Rx
function
terminal • P3: BX
configuration • P4: RST
• P5: Speed-L
Common terminal for terminal input, RS-485
Sequence
CM communication, and analog terminal inputs
common terminal
and outputs.
Terminal for Used to setup or modify a frequency
Analog input VR frequency reference via analog voltage or current input.
reference setting • Maximum Voltage Output: 12 V
23
Terminal
Labels
• Maximum Current Output: 100 mA
• Potentiometer: 1/5 kΩ
Used to setup or modify the frequency
depending on the voltage input to the V1
Frequency setting terminal.
V1
(voltage) terminal
• Unipolar: 0–10 V (12 V Max.)
• Bipolar: -10–10 V (±12 V Max.)
Used to setup or modify a frequency
Current input for reference via the I2 terminal.
frequency • Input current: 4–20 mA
I2
reference input
Terminal • Maximum Input current: 20 mA
• Input resistance: 249 Ω
Output/Communication Terminal Labels and Descriptions
Terminal
Labels
Used to send inverter output information to
external devices: output frequency, output
current, output voltage, or a DC voltage.
Voltage output • Output Voltage: 0–10 V
Analog output AO
terminal
• Maximum output voltage/current: 12 V, 10
mA
• Factory default output: Frequency
External 24V
24 Maximum Current Output: 100 mA
power source
Sends out alarm signals when the inverter’s
safety features are activated (AC 250 V <1
A, DC 30 V < 1 A).
Fault signal • Fault condition: A1 and C1 contacts are
A1/C1/B1
output 1 connected (B1 and C1 open connection)
• Normal operation: B1 and C1 contacts
Digital Output
are connected (A1 and C1 open
connection)
Sends out alarm signals when the inverter’s
safety features are activated (AC 250 V <1
Fault signal A, DC 30 V < 1 A).
A2/C2
output 2 • Fault condition: A2 and C2 contacts are
open connection
• Normal operation: A2 and C2 contacts
24
Terminal
Labels
are connected
Used to send or receive RS-485 signals.
RS-485 RS-485 signal
S+/S- Refer to 7 RS-485 Communication
Communication input terminal
Features on page 193 for more details.
Pre-insulated Crimp Terminal
Use pre-insulated crimp terminal connectors to increase reliability of the control

terminal wiring. Refer to the specifications below to determine the crimp terminals to fit
various cable sizes.
Cable Spec. Dimensions (inches/mm)

AWG mm2 L* P d1 D
22 0.50 12.0 6.0 1.3 3.2
20 0.75 12.0 6.0 1.5 3.4
18 1.0 12.0 6.0 1.7 3.6
* If the length (L) of the crimp terminals exceeds 0.5” (12.7mm) after wiring, the
control terminal cover may not close fully.
25
To connect cables to the control terminals without using crimp terminals, refer to the
following illustration detailing the correct length of exposed conductor at the end of the
control cable.
Note
• While making wiring connections at the control terminals, ensure that the total cable
length does not exceed 165 ft (50 m).
• Ensure that the length of any safety related wiring does not exceed 100 ft (30m).
• Use ferrite material to protect signal cables from electro-magnetic interference.
• Take care when supporting cables using cable ties, to apply the cable ties no closer
than 6 inches from the inverter. This provides sufficient access to fully close the front
cover.
• When making control terminal cable connections, use a small flat-tip screw driver (0.1
in wide (2.5 mm) and 0.015 in thick (0.4 mm) at the tip).
26
Step 5 PNP/NPN Mode Selection
The Nx2000+ inverter supports both PNP (Source) and NPN (Sink) modes for
sequence inputs at the terminal. Select an appropriate mode to suit requirements
using the PNP/NPN selection switch (SW1) on the control board. Refer to the
following information for detailed applications.
PNP Mode (Source)
Select PNP using the PNP/NPN selection switch (SW1). CM is the common ground
terminal for all analog inputs at the terminal, and P24 is 24 V internal source. If you
are using an external 24 V source, build a circuit that connects the external source (-)
and the CM terminal.
27
NPN Mode (Sink)
Select NPN using the PNP/NPN selection switch (SW1). CM is the common ground
terminal for all analog inputs at the terminal, and P24 is 24 V internal source. Note
that the factory default setting is NPN mode.
28
Step 6 Disabling the EMC Filter for Power Sources with Asymmetrical
Grounding
Nx2000+, 400 V products do have built-in EMC filters. An EMC filter prevents
electromagnetic interference by reducing radio emissions from the inverter. EMC filter
feature is set to On by factory default. Current leakage increases when the EMC filter
feature is used.
Asymmetrical Grounding Connection
Intermediate
One phase of grounding point
a delta on
connection is one phase of a
grounded delta
connection
A 3-phase
End of a single
connection
phase is
without
grounded
grounding
• Do not activate the EMC filter if the inverter uses a power source with an asymmetrical
grounding structure, for example a grounded delta connection. Otherwise it may cause
an electrical shock and result in personal injury or even death.
• Before opening the cover to start working, wait at least 10 minutes after the power is
disconnected and check that the DC voltage of the product is discharged using a
tester. Otherwise it may cause an electrical shock and result in personal injury or even
death.
29
Before using the inverter, confirm the power supply’s grounding system. Disable the
EMC filter if the power source has an asymmetrical grounding connection. Check the
location of the EMC filter on/off screw and attach the plastic washer to the screw
under the control terminal block.
Step 7 Assembling the front cover
After completing the wiring and basic configurations, assemble the front cover in order.
Note that the assembly procedure may vary according to the product group or frame
size of the product.
30
2.3 Post-Installation Checklist

After completing the installation, check the items in the following table to make sure
that the inverter has been safely and correctly installed.
Items Details Ref. Result

Is the installation location appropriate? p.4
Does the environment meet the inverter’s
p.5
operating conditions?
Does the power source match the inverter’s rated
Installation p.277
input?
Location/Power
I/O Verification Is the inverter’s rated output sufficient to supply
the equipment?
(Derating is applied in specific conditions. Refer to p.277
11.8 Continuous Rated Current Derating on
page 289 for more details.)
Is a circuit breaker installed on the input side of the
p.11
inverter?
Is the circuit breaker correctly rated? p.285
Are the power source cables correctly connected
to the input terminals of the inverter?
p.18
(Caution: connecting the power source to the
U/V/W terminals may damage the inverter.)
Are the motor output cables connected in the
correct phase order?
(Caution: motors will rotate in reverse direction if p.18
the three phase cables are not wired in the correct
rotation.)
Are the cables used in the power terminal
p.9
Power Terminal connections correctly rated?
Wiring Is the inverter grounded correctly? p.17
Are the power terminal screws and the ground
terminal screws tightened to their specified p.18
torques?
Are the overload protection circuits installed
correctly on the motors (if multiple motors are run -
using one inverter)?
Is the inverter separated from the power source by
a magnetic contactor (if a braking resistor is in p.11
use)?
Are advanced-phase capacitors, surge protection
and electromagnetic interference filters installed
correctly? p.18
(These devices MUST not be installed on the
output side of the inverter.)
31
Items Details Ref. Result

Are shielded twisted pair (STP) cables used for
-
control terminal wiring?
Is the shielding of the STP wiring properly
-
grounded?
If 3-wire operation is required, are the multi-
function input terminals defined prior to the p.22
Control installation of the control wiring connections?
Terminal Wiring Are the control cables properly wired? p.22
Are the control terminal screws tightened to their
p.13
specified torques?
Is the total cable length of all control wiring less
p.26
than 165 ft (50 m)?
Is the total length of safety wiring less than 100 ft
p.26
(30 m)?
Are optional cards connected correctly? -
Is there any debris left inside the inverter? p.13
Are any cables contacting adjacent terminals,
-
creating a potential short circuit risk?
Are the control terminal connections separated
-
from the power terminal connections?
Miscellaneous Have the capacitors been replaced if they have
-
been in use for more than 2 years?
Have the fans been replaced if they have been in
-
use for more than 3 years?
Has a fuse been installed for the power source? p.286
Are the connections to the motor separated from
-
other connections?
Note
Shielded twisted pair (STP) cable has a highly conductive, shielded screen around twisted
cable pairs. STP cables protect conductors from electromagnetic interference.
32
2.4 Test Run

After the post-installation checklist has been completed, follow the instructions below
to test the inverter.
1 Turn on the power supply to the inverter. Ensure that the keypad display light is
on.
2 Select the command source.
3 Set a frequency reference, and then check the following:

• If V1 is selected as the frequency reference source, does the reference change
according to the input voltage?
• If I2 is selected as the frequency reference source, does the reference change
according to the input current?
4 Set the acceleration and deceleration time.
5 Start the motor and check the following:

• Ensure that the motor rotates in the correct direction. If the motor is rotating in
the reverse direction, refer to the details below.
• Ensure that the motor accelerates and decelerates according to the set times,
and that the motor speed reaches the frequency reference.
Note
If the forward command (Fx) is on, the motor should rotate counterclockWise when
viewed from the load side of the motor. If the motor rotates in the reverse direction,
switch the cables at the U and V terminals.
Verifying the Motor Rotation

1 On the keypad, set the drv (Frequency reference source) code in the Operation group
to 0 (Keypad).
2 Set a frequency reference.
3 Press the [RUN] key. Motor starts forward operation.
4 Observe the motor’s rotation from the load side and ensure that the motor rotates
counterclockWise (forward).
33
• Check the parameter settings before running the inverter. Parameter settings may
have to be adjusted depending on the load.
• Do not supply the inverter with an input voltage that exceeds the rated voltage for the
equipment. This may cause damage to the inverter.
• Before running the motor at maximum speed, confirm the motor’s rated capacity. As
inverters can be used to easily increase motor speed, take caution to ensure that motor
speeds do not accidently exceed the motor’s rated capacity.
34
Learning to Perform Basic Operations
3 Learning to Perform Basic Operations

This chapter describes the keypad layout, functions, and the operation method as well
as the function groups used for the inverter operation and the basic operation method
using the keypad. Become familiar with the correct basic operation method before
advancing to more complex uses by setting the various features of the inverter and
giving an operation command by changing the frequency or input voltage.
3.1 About the Keypad

The keypad is composed of two main components – the display and the operation
(input) keys. Refer to the following illustration to identify part names and functions.
35
3.1.1 About the Display

The following table lists display part names and their functions.
No. Name Function

Displays current operational status and parameter
❶ 7-Segment Display
information.
LED flashes during parameter configuration and when
❷ SET Indicator
the ESC key operates as the multi-function key.
LED turns on (steady) during an operation, and
❸ RUN Indicator
flashes during acceleration or deceleration.
❹ FWD Indicator LED turns on (steady) during forward operation.
❺ REV Indicator LED turns on (steady) during reverse operation.
The table below lists the way that the keypad displays characters (letters and
numbers).
Number/ Number/ Number/ Number/

Display Display Display Display
character character character character
0 A K U
1 B L V
2 C M W
3 D N X
4 E O Y
5 F P Z
6 G Q
7 H R
8 I S
9 J T
36
3.1.2 Operation Keys

The following table lists the names and functions of the keypad’s operation keys.
Key Name Function
[RUN] key Used to run the inverter.
STOP: Stops the inverter.

[STOP/RESET]
RESET: Resets the inverter if a fault or failure
key
occurs.
Switches between codes, or increases or decreases

[▲] key, [▼] key
parameter values.
Moves between groups or moves to the digit on the

left when setting the parameter. Press the
[MODE/SHIFT]
MODE/SHIFT key once again on the maximum
key
number of digits to move to the minimum number of
digits.
Switches from the selected state of parameter to the
input state.
[ENTER] key Edits parameter and apply change.
Accesses the operation information screen during
failure on the failure screen.
[Volume] Used to set the operation frequency.
* Operates as ESC key if two keys out of [MODE/SHIFT] key, [▲] key and [▼] key are
entered at the same time.
- Press ESC in the group navigation mode to go to the initial screen (the frequency
display screen).
- Press ESC in the mode to change parameter to go to group navigation mode
without saving.
Install a separate emergency stop switch in the circuit. The [STOP/RESET] key on the
keypad works only when the inverter has been configured to accept an input from the
keypad.
37
3.1.3 Control Menu

The following table lists the functions groups under Parameter mode.
Keypad
Group Description
Display
Configures basic parameters for inverter
Operation - operation.
Configures parameters for basic operations.
These include jog operation, motor capacity
Drive dr evaluation, torque boost, and other keypad
related parameters.
Configures basic operation parameters. These
Basic ba parameters include motor parameters and multi-
step frequency parameters.
Configures acceleration or deceleration patterns,
Advanced ad frequency limits, etc.
Control cn Configures sensorless vector-related features.
Configures input terminal-related features,
Input Terminal in including digital multi-functional inputs and
analog inputs.
Configures output terminal-related features such
Output Terminal ou as relays and analog outputs.
Configures communication features for RS-485
Communication cm or other communication options.
Application ap Configures functions related to PID control.
Configures motor and inverter protection
Protection pr features
Configures secondary motor related features.
The 2nd motor appears on the keypad only
Motor 2 m2 when one of the multi-function input terminals
(In.65–In.69) has been set to 26.
3.2 Learning to Use the Keypad

The keypad enables movement between groups and codes. It also enables users to
select and configure functions. At code level, you can set parameter values to turn on
or off specific functions, or decide how the functions will be used. Refer to 8 Table of
Functions on page 218 to find the functions you need.
Confirm the correct values (or the correct range of the values), and then follow the
examples below to configure the inverter with the keypad.
38
3.2.1 Group and Code Selection

Follow the examples below to learn how to switch between groups and codes.
Step Instruction Keypad Display
ou in
cm cn
Move to the group you want using the [MODE] ap ad
1 keys. Press the [MODE] key for longer than 1
second to move in the opposite direction. pr ba
m2 dr
0.00
Move up and down through the codes using the

2 [▼] and [▲] keys until you locate the code that
you require.
3 Press the [ENT] key to save the change. -
Note
When moving up and down through the codes using the [▲] and [▼] keys in each group,
there are cases where the code number does not increase or decrease. This is because
the number was left blank in the inverter program by expecting additional features or the
program was set up to not display the unused features.
Example) If Ad.24 (frequency limit) code is set to 0 (No), Ad.25 (frequency lower limit
value) and Ad.26 (frequency upper limit value) codes will not be displayed. Ad.24
(frequency limit) code must be set to 1 (Yes) to display Ad.25 (frequency lower limit value)
and Ad.26 (frequency upper limit value) codes.
39
3.2.2 Navigating Directly to Different Codes (Jump Codes)

The following example details navigating to code dr. 95, from the initial code in the
Drive group (dr. 0). This example applies to all groups whenever you would like to
navigate to a specific code number.

Ensure that you are currently at the first code of the Drive
1
group (dr.0). dr.0
Press the [ENT] key.
2
Number "9" will flash. 9
Press the [▼] key and change the ones' place number to
3
"5", so the destination code is "95". 5
Press the [MODE] to move to the tens' place.
4 The cursor will move to the left and "05" will be displayed. 05
At this time, the number "0" will be flashing.
Press the [▲] key to change the tens' place number to
5
"9", so the destination code is "95". 95
6
Code dr.95 is displayed. dr.95
40
3.2.3 Setting Parameter Values

Enable or disable features by setting or modifying parameter values for different
codes. Directly enter setting values, such as frequency references, supply voltages,
and motor speeds. Follow the instructions below to learn to set or modify parameter
values.

Select the group and code to setup or modify parameter
1 settings, and then press the [ENT] key. 5.0
The first number on the right side of the display will flash.
Move to the place value to edit using the Mode key,

change the value using the [▲] and [▼] keys, and then
2 press the [ENT] key. Press the [MODE] key for longer
than 1 second to move to the left place value.
The selected value will flash on the display.
3 Press the [ENT] key again to save the changes. -
Note
• A flashing number on the display indicates that the keypad is waiting for an input from
the user. Changes will be saved when the [ENT] key is pressed while the number is
flashing. The setting change will be canceled if you press any other key.
• Each code’s parameter values have default features and ranges specified. Refer to 8
Table of Functions on page 218 for information about the features and ranges before
setting or modifying parameter values.
41
3.3 Actual Application Examples
3.3.1 Acceleration Time Configuration

The following is an example demonstrating how to modify the Acceleration time (ACC)
code value (from 5.0 to 16.0) from the Operation group.

Ensure that the first code of the Operation group is
1 selected, and code 0.00 (Command Frequency) is 0.00
displayed.
Press the [▲] key.
2 The display will change to the second code in the acc
Operation group, the acceleration time (ACC) code.
The number "5.0" will be displayed, with "0" flashing. This
3 indicates that the current acceleration time is set to 5.0 5.0
seconds. The flashing value is ready to be modified by
using the keypad.
Press the [MODE] key to change the place value.
4 "5" in the ones' place from "5.0" will flash. This indicates 5.0
the flashing value, "5" is ready to be modified.
To make the target value "16.0", press the [▲] key to
5
change the ones' place value to "6". 6.0
Press the [MODE] key to move to the tens' place value.
6
"0" in the tens' place from "06.0" will flash. 06.0
change the tens' place value to "1", and then press the
7
[ENT] key. 16.0
Press the [ENT] key again to save the changes.
8 "ACC" will be displayed. The change to the acceleration acc
time setup has been completed.
42
3.3.2 Frequency Reference Configuration

The following is an example to demonstrate configuring a frequency reference of
30.05 Hz from the first code in the Operation group.

displayed.
2 The default value "0.00" will be displayed and "0" in the 0.00
second decimal place will flash.
Press the [MODE] key 3 times to move to the tens' place
3 value. 00.00
"0" in the tens' place will flash.
4 change the tens' place value to "3." 30.00
Press the [MODE] key 2 times.
5
The "0" in the second decimal place will flash. 30.00
change the second decimal place value to "5", and then
6
press the [ENT] key. 30.05
7 Flashing stops. The frequency reference has been 30.05
configured to 30.05 Hz.
Note
• A flashing number on the display indicates that the keypad is waiting for an input from
the user. Changes will be saved when the [ENT] key is pressed while the number is
flashing. The setting change will be canceled if you press any other key.
• The Nx2000+ inverter keypad display can display up to 4 digits. However, 5-digit
figures can be used and are accessed by pressing the [MODE] key, to allow keypad
input.
43
3.3.3 Jog Frequency Configuration

The following example demonstrates how to configure Jog Frequency by modifying
code 11 (Jog Frequency) in the Drive group from 10.00 Hz to 20.00 Hz. You can
configure the parameters for different codes in any other group in exactly the same
way.
1 Go to code 11 (dr.11) in the Drive group. dr.11

2 The current Jog Frequency value (10.00) for code dr.11 is 10.00
displayed.
3 value. 10.00
change the tens' place value to "2", and then press the
4
[ENT] key. 20.00
5 Code dr.11 will be displayed. The parameter change has dr.11
been completed.
44
3.3.4 Parameter Initialization

The following example demonstrates parameter initialization using code dr.93
(Parameter Initialization) in the Drive group.
1 Go to code 0 in the Drive group. dr.0

2
The current parameter value "9" will be displayed. 9
To make the target value "93", press the [▼] key to
3
change the ones' place value to "3". 3
4 Press the [MODE] key to move to the tens' place value. 03
To make the target value "93", press the [▲] or [▼] key
5
to change the tens' place value "9". 93
6
Code dr.93 will be displayed. dr.93
Press the [ENT] key once again.
7 The current parameter value for code dr.93 is set to 0 0
(Do not initialize).
Press the [▲] key to change the value to 1 (All Grp), and
8 then press the [ENT] key. 1
The parameter value will flash.
9 Parameter initialization begins. Parameter initialization is dr.93
complete when code dr.93 reappears on the display.
45
Note
Following parameter initialization, all parameters are reset to factory default values.
Ensure that parameters are reconfigured before running the inverter again after an
initialization.
3.3.5 Frequency Setting (Keypad) and Operation (via Terminal

Input)
1 Turn on the inverter. -
selected, and code 0.00 (Command Frequency) is
2
displayed, then press the [ENT] key. 0.00
The first number on the right side of the display will flash.
3 value. 00.00
Press the [▲] key to change it to 10.00, and then press
4 the [ENT] key. 10.00
5
The reference frequency has been changed. 10.00
Refer to the wiring diagram at the bottom of the table,
and turn on the switch between the P1 (FX) and CM
6 terminals.
The RUN indicator light flashes and the FWD indicator
light comes on steady. The current acceleration
frequency is displayed.
When the frequency reference is reached (10 Hz), open
the switch between the P1 (FX) and CM terminals.
The RUN indicator light flashes again and the current
7 deceleration frequency is displayed.
When the frequency reaches 0 Hz, the RUN and FWD
indicator lights turn off, and the frequency reference,
10.00, is displayed again.
46
[Wiring Diagram] [Operation Pattern]
Note
The instructions in the table are based on the factory default parameter settings. The
inverter may not work correctly if the default parameter settings are changed after the
inverter is purchased. In such cases, initialize all parameters to reset the values to the
factory default parameter settings before following the instructions in the table (refer to
5.21 Parameter initialization on page 149).
3.3.6 Frequency Setting (Potentiometer) and Operation

(Terminal Input)
displayed.
Press the [▲] key 4 times.
3
Move to the Frq (Frequency reference source) code. frq
4 The Frq code in the Operation group is currently set to 0 0
(keypad).
Press the [▲] key to change the parameter value to 2
(Fx/Rx 1-Set frequency input to potentiometer), and then
5
press the [ENT] key. 2
6 The Frq code will be displayed again. The frequency frq
input has been configured for the potentiometer.
Press the [▼] key 4 times.
Move to the first code of the Operation group (0.00).
7
From here frequency setting values can be monitored. 0.00
47

Adjust the potentiometer to increase or decrease the
8 -
frequency reference to 10 Hz.
Refer to the wiring diagram at the bottom of the table,
and turn on the switch between the P1 (FX) and CM
terminals.
9
When the frequency reference is reached (10 Hz), open
the switch between the P1 (FX) and CM terminals.
Note
inverter is purchased. In such cases, initialize all parameters to reset the values to factory
default parameter settings before following the instructions in the table (refer to 5.21
Parameter initialization on page 149).
48
3.3.7 Frequency setting with (internal) potentiometer and

operation command with the keypad [RUN] key
displayed.
3 Move to the operation group drv (command source) drv
code.
The drv code in the Operation group is currently set to 1
4
(Fx/Rx1 operation command set from the terminal 1
block).
Press the [▼] key to change the parameter value to 0
5 (Keypad), and then press the [ENT] key. 0
6 The drv code is displayed again. The frequency input drv
has been configured for the keypad.
7
Move to the Frq (Frequency reference source) code. frq
8 The Frq code in the Operation group is currently set to 0 0
(keypad).
Press the [▲] key to change the parameter value to 4
(V0-Set frequency input to (internal) potentiometer), and
9
then press the [ENT] key. 4
10 The Frq code will be displayed again. The frequency frq
input has been configured for the potentiometer.
Press the [▼] key 4 times.
11 Move to the first code of the Operation group (0.00). 0.00
From here frequency setting values can be monitored
Adjust the (internal) potentiometer to increase or
12 -
decrease the frequency reference to 10 Hz.
Press the [RUN] key.
13
49

When the frequency reaches the reference (10 Hz),
press the [STOP/RESET] key on the keypad.
Note
inverter is purchased. In such cases, initialize all parameters to reset the values to factory
default parameter settings before following the instructions in the table (refer to 5.21
Parameter initialization on page 149).
50
3.4 Monitoring the Operation
3.4.1 Output Current Monitoring

The following example demonstrates how to monitor the output current in the
Operation group using the keypad.

displayed.
2 Press the [▲] or [▼] key to move to the Cur code. cur
3
The output current (5.0 A) is displayed. 5.0
4
Returns to the Cur code. cur
Note
You can use the dCL (DC link voltage monitor) and vOL (output voltage monitor) codes in
the Operation group in exactly the same way as shown in the example above, to monitor
each function’s relevant values.
51
3.4.2 Trip Condition Monitor

The following example demonstrates how to monitor fault trip conditions in the
Operation group using the keypad.

Refer to the example keypad display.
1
An over current trip fault has occurred. oct
Press the [ENT] key, and then the [▲] key.
2 The operation frequency at the time of the fault (30.00 Hz) 30.00
is displayed.
Press the [▲] key.
3 The output current at the time of the fault (5.0 A) is 5.0
displayed.
Press the[▲] key.
The operation status at the time of the fault is displayed.
4
ACC on the display indicates that the fault occurred acc
during acceleration.
Press the [STOP/RESET] key.
5 The inverter resets and the fault condition is cleared. The 30.00
frequency reference is displayed on the keypad.
52
Note
• If multiple fault trips occur at the same time, a maximum of 3 fault trip records can be
retrieved as shown in the following example.
• If a warning situation occurs while operating with the entered frequency, a warn
display and the current screen will flash in 1 second intervals. Refer to 0
• Under load Fault Trip and Warning on page 181 for more details.
53
Learning Basic Features
4 Learning Basic Features

This chapter describes the basic features of the Nx2000+ inverter. Check the
reference page in the table to see the detailed description for each of the basic
features.
Basic Tasks Use Example Ref.

Frequency reference
Configures the inverter to allow you to setup or
source configuration for p.57
modify frequency reference using the Keypad.
the keypad
Frequency reference
Configures the inverter to allow input voltages at
source configuration for
the terminal block (V1) and to setup or modify a p.58
the terminal block (input
frequency reference.
voltage)
Frequency reference
Configures the inverter to allow input currents at
source configuration for
the terminal block (I2) and to setup or modify a p.64
the terminal block (input
frequency reference.
current)
Configures the inverter to set the frequency to the
Frequency reference
upper level controllers, such as PLCs or PCs, via
source configuration for p.66
the communications terminal (S+/S-) of the
RS-485 communication
terminal block or the RJ45 connector.
Frequency Hold by Enables the user to hold a frequency using analog
p.66
Analog Input inputs at terminals.
Configures multi-step frequency operations by
Multi-step frequency
receiving an input at the terminals defined for each p.67
configuration
step frequency.
Configures the inverter to start the operation with
The Keypad as a
the [RUN] key on the keypad and stop with the p.69
Command Input Device
[STOP/RESET] keys.
Command source
Configures the inverter to accept inputs at the
configuration for p.69
FX/RX terminals.
terminal block inputs
Configures the inverter to allow communication
RS-485 Communication
signals from upper level controllers, such as PLCs
as a Command Input p.71
or PCs, and to set up an operation command
Device
using S+ and S- terminals or the RJ45 connector.
Forward or Reverse Configures the inverter to limit a motor’s rotation
p.71
Run Prevention direction.
Configures to accelerate instantly if the operation
start at power-on p.72
command is on when inverter power is supplied.
Automatic restart after Configures the inverter to start operating if the
p.73
reset of a fault trip operation command is on after the inverter is reset
54

condition following a fault trip.
For automatic start-up configuration to work, the
operation command terminals at the terminal block
must be turned on.
Acc/Dec Time Based Configures the acceleration and deceleration
on Maximum times for a motor based on a defined maximum p.74
Frequency frequency.
Acc/Dec Time Based
Configures acceleration and deceleration times for
on Operation p.75
a motor based on a defined frequency reference.
Frequency
Configures multi-stage acceleration and
Multi-step Acc/Dec
deceleration times for a motor based on defined p.76
Time Configuration
parameters for the multi-function terminals.
Enables modification of acceleration and
Acc/Dec time switch
deceleration gradients without configuring the p.78
frequency
multi-functional terminals.
Enables modification of the acceleration and
Acc/Dec pattern
deceleration gradient patterns. Basic patterns to p.79
configuration
choose from include linear and S-curve patterns.
Stops the current acceleration or deceleration and
Acc/Dec stop command controls motor operation at a constant speed.
p.81
configuration Multi-function terminals must be configured for this
command.
Linear V/F pattern Used for loads that require constant torque
p.81
operation regardless of the frequency.
Configures the inverter to run the motor at a
Square reduction V/F square reduction V/F pattern. Fans and pumps are
p.82
pattern operation appropriate loads for square reduction V/F
operation.
Enables the user to set the parameter according
User V/F pattern
to the V/F pattern and the load characteristics of p.83
Operation
the motor.
Manual configuration of the inverter to produce a
momentary torque boost. This configuration is for
manual torque boost p.85
loads that require a large amount of starting
torque, such as elevators or lifts.
Automatically adjusts the torque or is used when a
Auto torque boost p.86
large amount of starting torque is required.
Adjusts the output voltage to the motor when the
Motor output voltage
power supply to the inverter differs from the p.86
adjustment
motor’s rated input voltage.
Acceleration start is a general acceleration mode.
If there are no extra settings applied, the motor
Accelerating start p.87
accelerates directly to the frequency reference
when the command is input.
55

Configures the inverter to perform DC braking
before the motor starts rotating again. This
DC braking after start configuration is used when the motor will be p.88
rotating before the voltage is supplied from the
inverter.
Deceleration stop is the typical method used to
stop a motor. The motor decelerates to 0 Hz and
Deceleration stop p.89
stops on a stop command, however there may be
other stop or deceleration conditions defined.
The frequency at which DC braking occurs must
be defined and during deceleration, when the
DC braking after stop p.90
motor reaches the defined frequency, DC braking
is applied.
When the Operation command is off, the inverter
Free-run stop output turns off, and the load stops due to residual p.91
inertia.
Configures the inverter to provide optimal, motor
Power braking deceleration, without tripping over-voltage p.92
protection.
Configures the frequency reference limits by
Start/maximum
defining a start frequency and a maximum p.93
frequency configuration
frequency.
Frequency Limit Using
Configures the frequency reference limits by
Upper and Lower Limit p.94
defining an upper limit and a lower limit.
Frequency Values
Configures the inverter to avoid running a motor in
Frequency jump p.95
mechanically resonating frequencies.
Used to configure the 2nd operation mode and
2nd Operation
switch between the operation modes according to p.96
Configuration
your requirements.
Multi-function Input Enables the user to improve the responsiveness
p.97
Terminal Control of the multi-function input terminals.
56
4.1 Frequency Reference Configuration

The Nx2000+ inverter provides several methods to setup and modify a frequency
reference for an operation. The keypad, analog inputs [for example voltage (V1) and
current (I2) signals], or RS-485, and Fieldbus option card can be used.
Group Code Name Setting Setting Range Unit

0 KeyPad-1
1 KeyPad-2
2 V1
Frequency reference
Operation Frq 4 Volume 0–8 -
source
5 I2
6 Int 485
8 Fieldbus
4.1.1 Set the Operation Frequency from the Keypad - Direct

Input
You can modify frequency reference by using the keypad and apply changes by
pressing the [ENT] key. To use the keypad as a frequency reference input source, go
to the Frq (Frequency reference source) code in the Operation group and change the
parameter value to 0 (Keypad-1). Input the frequency reference for an operation at the
0.00 (Command Frequency) code in the Operation group.

Frequency
Frq 0 KeyPad-1 0–8 -
reference source
Operation
Target
0.00 0.00 Min to Max Frq* Hz
frequency
* You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the Max. Frequency, as
configured with dr.20.
57
4.1.2 Set the Operation Frequency from the Keypad - Using [▲]
and [▼] keys
You can use the [▲] and [▼] keys like a potentiometer to modify the frequency
reference. Select the Frq (Frequency reference source) code in the Operation group
to 1 (Keypad-2). This allows frequency reference values to be increased or decreased
when the [▲] and [▼] keys are pressed from the Operation group 0.00 (target
frequency).

Frequency
Frq 1 KeyPad-2 0–8 -
reference source
Operation
Target
0.00 0.00 Min to Max Frq* Hz
frequency
* You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the Max. Frequency, as
configured with dr.20.
4.1.3 V1 Terminal as the Source

You can set the frequency by inputting the voltage from the V1 terminal (frequency
setting voltage terminal) from the control terminal block. Use voltage inputs ranging
from 0 to 10 V (unipolar) for forward only operation. Use voltage inputs ranging from -
10 to +10 V (bipolar) for both directions, where negative voltage inputs are used then
operations are reversed.
4.1.3.1 Setting a Frequency Reference for 0–10 V Input

Set the Frq (Frequency reference source) code in the Operation group to 2 (V1), and
then set code 06 (V1 Polarity) to 0 (unipolar) in the Input Terminal group (IN). Use the
voltage output of the external controller or use the VR terminal (frequency setting
power terminal) of the control terminal to input voltage in the V1 terminal using
potentiometer.
[Connecting to external power source] [Connecting to internal power source]
58

Frequency reference
Operation Frq 2 V1 0–8 -
source
Frequency for maximum Maximum Start Frequency–
01 Hz
analog input frequency Max. Frequency
05 V1 input voltage display 0.00 0.00–12.00 V
Unipola
06 V1 input polarity selection 0 0–1 -
r
V1 input filter time
07 100 0–10000 msec
constant
08 V1 minimum input voltage 0.00 0.00–10.00 V
In
V1 output at Minimum
09 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
voltage (%)
V1 maximum input
10 10.00 0.00–12.00 V
voltage
V1 output at Maximum
11 100.00 0–100 %
voltage (%)
16 Rotation direction options 0 No 0–1 -
17 V1 quantization level 0.04 0.00*, 0.04–10.00 %
* Quantizing is disabled if "0" is selected.
0–10 V Input Voltage Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Configures the frequency reference at the maximum input voltage when
a potentiometer is connected to the control terminal block. A frequency
set with code In.01 becomes the maximum frequency only if the value
set in code In.11 (or In.15) is 100.00%.
In.01 Freq at
100% • Set code In.01 to 40.00 and use default values for codes In.02–
In.16. Motor will run at 40.00 Hz when a 10 V input is provided at V1.
• Set code In.11 to 50.00 and use default values for codes In.01–
In.16. Motor will run at 30.00 Hz (50% of the default maximum
frequency–60 Hz) when a 10 V input is provided at V1.
In.05 V1
Configures the inverter to monitor the input voltage at V1.
Monitor[V]
As a low-pass filter, use if there is significant variation of frequency
parameter setting value due to high noise level. When used, it filters the
analog signal to pass only the clean input signals. The higher the
number of time constant filter, the lower the variation in frequency.
In.07 V1 Filter
However this slows down the time t and thus affects the response time.
The value t (time) indicates the time required for the frequency to reach
63% of the reference, when external input voltages are provided in
multiple steps.
59
Code and
Description
Features
These parameters are used to configure the gradient level and offset
values of the Output Frequency, based on the Input Voltage.
In.08 V1 volt x1–

In.11 V1 Perc y2
In.16 V1 Inverts the input value of V1. Set this code to 1 (Yes) if you need the
Inverting motor to run in the opposite direction from the current rotation.
Quantizing may be used when the noise level is high in the analog input
(V1 terminal) signal. The frequency is output by measuring (quantizing)
the height (value) of the input signal in a consistent interval. This means
that the delicate control on the output frequency (power resolution) is
low, but the noise is reduced, so it is suitable for systems that are
sensitive to noise.
In.17
V1 Quantizing Parameter values for quantizing refer to a percentage based on the
(Quantizing) maximum input. Therefore, if the value is set to 1% of the analog
maximum input of 10 V and maximum frequency of 60 Hz, the output
frequency will increase or decrease by 0.6 Hz per 0.1V difference.
To reduce the effect of the input signal changes (runout of height) on

the operation frequency, the output frequency during increase or
decrease of input signal value (height) is applied differently. When the
60
Code and
Description
Features
input signal value increases, the output frequency starts changing if the
height becomes equivalent to 3/4 of the quantizing value. From then on,
the output frequency increases according to the quantizing value. On
the other hand, when the input signal decrease, the output frequency
starts decreasing if the height becomes equivalent to 1/4 of the
quantizing value.
Although the noise can be reduced using the low-pass filter (In.07), the
response on the input signal takes long as the set value gets higher.
Since it becomes difficult to control the frequency if the input signal is
delayed, a period of long pulse (ripple) may occur on the output
frequency.
61
4.1.3.2 Setting a Frequency Reference for -10–10 V Input

Set the Frq (Frequency reference source) code in the Operation group to 2 (V1), and
then set code 06 (V1 Polarity) to 1 (bipolar) in the Input Terminal group (IN). Use the
output voltage from an external source to provide input to V1 (Frequency setting
voltage terminal).
[Setting voltage of -10 –+10 V on a V1 terminal]
[Bipolar input voltage and output frequency]

Frequency reference
source
Frequency for
01 60.00 0–Max Frequency Hz
maximum analog input
V1 input voltage
05 0.00 0.00–12.00 V V
display
V1 input polarity
In 06 1 Bipolar 0–1 -
selection
V1 Minimum input
12 0.00 10.00–0.00 V V
voltage
V1 output at Minimum
13 0.00 -100.00–0.00% %
voltage (%)
62

V1 Maximum input
14 -10.00 -12.00–0.00 V V
voltage
V1 output at Maximum
15 -100.00 -100.00–0.00% %
voltage (%)
Rotational Directions for Different Voltage Inputs
Operation Input voltage

command 0–10 V -10–0 V
FWD Fwd Rev
REV Rev Fwd
-10–10 V Voltage Input Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Sets the gradient level and off-set value of the output frequency in
relation to the input voltage. These codes are displayed only when
In.06 is set to 1 (bipolar).
For example, if the ln.12 code is set to -2 V, In.13 code is set to 10%,
In.14 code is set to -8 V, and In.15 code is set to 80%, the output
frequency will vary within the range of 6–48 Hz.
In.12 V1– volt

x1–
In.15 V1– Perc
y2
For details about the 0–+10 V analog inputs, refer to the code
descriptions In.08 V1 volt x1–In.11 V1 Perc y2 on page 60.
63
4.1.4 Built-in Volume Input (V0) as the Source

You can modify the frequency reference by using the built-in volume dial. Go to the
Frq (Frequency reference source) code in the Operation group and change the
parameter value to 4, and then rotate the built-in volume dial. You can monitor the
parameter setting of the frequency reference at the 0.00 (command frequency) code
in the Operation group.

Operatio
Frq Frequency reference source 4 V0 0–8 -
n
Frequency for maximum 0–Max
01 60.00 Hz
analog input Frequency
35 V0 input voltage display 0.00 0.00–5.00 V
Time constant of V0 input
37 100 0–10000 ms
filter
38 V0 Minimum input voltage 0.00 0.00–5.00 V
V0 output at minimum current
39 0.00 0–100 %
In (%)
40 V0 Maximum input voltage 5.00 0.00–5.00 V
V0 output at Maximum current
41 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
(%)
Changing rotation direction of
46 0 No 0–1 -
V0
0.00*, 0.04–
47 V0 quantization level 0.04 %
10.00
4.1.5 Setting a Reference Frequency using Input Current (I2)

Input voltage to the I2 terminal of the control terminal block to set the frequency. Set
the Frq (Frequency reference source) code in the Operation group to 5 (I2) and apply
4–20 mA input current to I2.

Operatio
Frq Frequency reference source 5 I2 0–8 -
n
Frequency for maximum
01 60.00 0–Max Frequency Hz
analog input
50 I2 input voltage display 0.00 0.00–20.00 mA
In
Time constant of I2 input
52 100 0–10000 ms
filter
53 I2 minimum input current 4.00 0.00–20.00 mA
64

I2 output at minimum
54 0.00 0–100 %
current (%)
55 I2 maximum input current 20.00 0.00–20.00 mA
I2 output at Maximum
56 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
current (%)
Changing rotation direction
61 0 No 0–1 -
of I2
62 I2 quantization level 0.04 0.00*, 0.04–10.00 %
* Quantizing is disabled if "0" is selected.
Input Current (I2) Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Configures the frequency reference for operation at the maximum
current (when In.56 is set to 100%).
• If In.01 is set to 40.00, and default settings are used for In.53–56,
In.01 Freq at 20 mA input current to the I2 terminal will produce a frequency
100% reference of 40.00 Hz.
• If In.56 is set to 50.00, and default settings are used for In.01 and
In.53–55, 20 mA input current (max) to I2 will produce a frequency
reference of 30.00 Hz.
In.50 I2 Monitor Used to monitor input current at I2.
Configures the time for the operation frequency to reach 63% of target
In.52 I2 Filter
frequency based on the input current at I2.
Configures the gradient level and off-set value of the output frequency.
In.53 I2 Curr x1–

In.56 I2 Perc y2
65
4.1.6 Frequency Reference Source Configuration for RS-485

Communication
Set the Frq (Frequency reference source) code in the Operation group to 6 (Int 485).
Control the inverter with upper-level controllers, such as PCs or PLCs, via RS-485
communication by using RS-485 signal input terminals (S+/S-) of the control terminal
block. Refer to 7 RS-485 Communication Features on page 193 for more details.
Setting
Group Code Name Setting Unit
Range
Frequency reference
Operation Frq 6 Int 485 0–8 -
source
Built-in communication
01 - 1 1–250 -
inverter ID
0 ModBus RTU
Built-in communication -
02 1 Reserved 0–2
protocol
2 Int Inv 485
CM Built-in communication
03 3 9600 bps 0–7 -
speed
0 D8/PN/S1
Built-in communication 1 D8/PN/S2
04 0–3 -
frame setting 2 D8/PE/S1
3 D8/PO/S1
4.2 Frequency Hold by Analog Input

If you set a frequency reference via analog input at the control terminal block, you can
hold the operation frequency of the inverter by assigning a multi-function input as the
analog frequency hold terminal. The operation frequency will be fixed upon an analog
input signal.
Setting
Range
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
Frequency reference
source
5 I2
6 Int 485
8 Fieldbus
Px terminal setting
In 65–69 21 Analog Hold 0–52 -
options
66
4.3 Multi-step Frequency Configuration

Multi-step operations can be carried out by assigning different speeds (or frequencies)
to the Px terminals. Step 0 uses the frequency reference source set with the Frq code
in the Operation group. Px terminal parameter values 7 (Speed-L), 8 (Speed-M) and 9
(Speed-H) are recognized as binary commands and work in combination with Fx or
Rx run commands. The inverter operates according to the frequencies set with St.1–3
(multi-step frequency 1–3), bA.53–56 (multi-step frequency 4–7) and the binary
command combinations.

Operatio Multi-step
St1–St3 - 0–Max Frequency Hz
n frequency 1–3
Multi-step
bA 53–56 - 0–Max Frequency Hz
frequency 4–7
7 Speed-L -
Px terminal setting
65–69 8 Speed-M 0–52 -
options
9 Speed-H -
In
Multi-step
89 command delay 1 1–5000 ms
time
Multi-step Frequency Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Operation group
Configure multi-step frequency 1–3.
St1–St3
bA.53–56
Configure multi-step frequency 4–7.
Step Freq - 4–7
67
Code and
Description
Features
Choose the P1-P5 terminals to setup as multi-step inputs, and then set
the relevant codes (In.65–69) to 7 (Speed-L), 8 (Speed-M), or 9
(Speed-H).
Provided that terminals P3, P4 and P5 have been set to Speed-L,
Speed-M and Speed-H respectively, the following multi-step operation
will be available.
In.65–69 Px
Define
[An example of a multi-step operation]
Speed Fx/Rx P5 P4 P3
0 ✓ - - -
1 ✓ - - ✓
2 ✓ - ✓ -
3 ✓ - ✓ ✓
4 ✓ ✓ - -
5 ✓ ✓ - ✓
6 ✓ ✓ ✓ -
7 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
[An example of a multi-step speed]
Set the time for the inverter to check for other terminal block inputs.
In.89 InCheck After adjusting In.89 to 100 ms and an input signal is received at P5,
Time the inverter will search for inputs at other terminals for 100 ms, before
proceeding to accelerate or decelerate based on P5’s configuration.
68
4.4 Command Source Configuration

Various devices can be selected as command input devices for the Nx2000+ inverter.
Input devices available to select include keypad, multi-function input terminal, RS-485
communication and field bus adapter.

0 Keypad
1 Fx/Rx-1
Command
Operation drv 2 Fx/Rx-2 0–4 -
Source
3 Int 485
4 Fieldbus
4.4.1 The Keypad as a Command Input Device

The keypad can be selected as a command input device to send command signals to
the inverter. This is configured by setting the drv (command source) code to 0
(Keypad). Press the [RUN] key on the keypad to start an operation, and the
[STOP/RESET] key to end it.

Command
Operation drv 0 Keypad 0–4 -
Source
4.4.2 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Fwd/Rev

Run Commands)
Multi-function terminals can be selected as a command input device. This is
configured by setting the drv (command source) code in the Operation group to 1
(Fx/Rx-1). Select terminals for the forward and reverse operations from P1–P5 multi-
function input terminals. Then select 1 (Fx) and 2 (Rx) respectively for 65–69 (Px
terminal setting options) codes of the In group. This enables both terminals to be
turned on or off at the same time, constituting a stop command that will cause the
inverter to stop operation.

Command
Operation drv 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–4 -
Source
Px terminal 1 Fx
In 65–69 0–52 -
setting options 2 Rx
69
Fwd/Rev Command by Multi-function Terminal – Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Operation group
drv– Cmd Set to 1 (Fx/Rx-1).
Source
In.65–69 Px Assign a terminal for forward (Fx) operation.
Define Assign a terminal for reverse (Rx) operation.
4.4.3 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Run and

Rotation Direction Commands)
Set the drv (command source) code in the Operation group to 2 (Fx/Rx-2). Select
terminals for the operation and rotation operations from P1–P5 multi-function input
terminals. Then select 1 (Fx) and 2 (Rx) respectively for 65–69 (Px terminal setting
options) codes of the In group. This enables both the Fx terminal to be used as the
operation command terminal and the Rx terminal as the terminal to select the
rotational direction (On: Rx, Off: Fx).

Operation drv Command Source 2 Fx/Rx-2 0–4 -
Px terminal setting 1 Fx
In 65–69 0–52 -
options 2 Rx
Run Command and Fwd/Rev Change Command Using Multi-function Terminal –

Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Operation group
drv– Cmd Set to 2 (Fx/Rx-2).
Source
70
Code and
Description
Features
In.65–69 Px Assign a terminal for run command (Fx).
Define Assign a terminal for changing rotation direction (Rx).
4.4.4 RS-485 Communication as a Command Input Device

Internal RS-485 communication can be selected as a command input device by
setting the drv (command source) code in the Operation group to 3 (Int 485). Control
the inverter with upper-level controllers, such as PCs or PLCs, via RS-485
communication by using RS-485 signal input terminals (S+/S-) of the control terminal
block. Refer to 7 RS-485 Communication Features on page 193 for more details.
Setting
Range
Operation drv Command Source 3 Int 485 0–4 -
01 1 1–250 -
inverter ID
02 0 ModBus RTU 0–2 -
protocol
CM
03 3 9600 bps 0–7 -
speed
04 0 D8/PN/S1 0–3 -
frame setting
4.5 Forward or Reverse Run Prevention

The rotation direction of motors can be configured to prevent motors to only run in one
direction.

0 None
Run prevention
Ad 09 1 Forward Prev 0–2 -
options
2 Reverse Prev
71
Forward/Reverse Run Prevention Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Choose a direction to prevent.
Configuration Function
Ad.09 Run 0 None Do not set run prevention.
Prevent
1 Forward Prev Set forward run prevention.
2 Reverse Prev Set reverse run prevention.
4.6 Power-on Run

When the Power-on Run command is enabled and the terminal block operation
command is ON for when there is a power supply to the inverter, it is started
immediately. To enable power-on run set the drv (command source) code to 1 (Fx/Rx-
1) or 2 (Fx/Rx-2) in the Operation group.
Setting
Range
Operatio 1, Fx/Rx-1 or
drv Command Source 0–4 -
n 2 Fx/Rx-2
Starting with power
Ad 10 1 Yes 0–1 -
on
Note
• A fault trip may be triggered if the inverter starts operation while a motor’s load (fan-
type load) is in free-run state. To prevent this from happening, set bit4 to 1 in Cn.71
(speed search options) of the Control group. The inverter will perform a speed search
at the beginning of the operation.
• If the speed search is not enabled, the inverter will begin its operation in a normal V/F
pattern and accelerate the motor. If the inverter has been turned on without power-on
run enabled, the terminal block command must first be turned off, and then turned on
again to begin the inverter’s operation.
72
Take caution on any safety accidents when operating the inverter with Power-on Run
enabled as the motor will begin rotating as soon as the inverter starts up.
4.7 Reset and Restart

Reset and restart operations can be setup for inverter operation following a fault trip,
based on the terminal block operation command (if it is configured). When a fault trip
occurs, the inverter cuts off the output and the motor will free-run. Another fault trip
may be triggered if the inverter begins its operation while motor load is in a free-run
state.
Setting
Range
Operatio 1 Fx/Rx-1 or
drv Command Source 0–4 -
n 2 Fx/Rx-2
Selection of startup on trip
08 1 Yes 0–1
reset
Pr Number of automatic
09 0 0–10
restarts
10 Auto restart delay time 1.0 0–60 sec
Note
• To prevent a repeat fault trip from occurring, set Cn.71 (speed search options) bit 2 to
1. The inverter will perform a speed search at the beginning of the operation.
• If the speed search is not enabled, the inverter will start its operation in a normal V/F
pattern and accelerate the motor. If the inverter has been turned on without ‘Reset and
Restart’ enabled, trips must be reset, then turn the terminal block command off and on
to begin the inverter’s operation.
Take caution on any safety accidents when operating the inverter with Automatic
Restart After Reset enabled as the motor will begin rotating as soon as the inverter is
reset from the terminal block or keypad after a trip occurs.
73
4.8 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
4.8.1 Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency

Acc/Dec time values can be set based on maximum frequency, not on inverter
operation frequency. To set Acc/Dec time values based on maximum frequency, set
bA. 08 (Acc/Dec reference) in the Basic group to 0 (Max Freq).
Acceleration time set at the ACC (acceleration time) code in the Operation group
(dr.03) refers to the time required for the inverter to reach the maximum frequency
from a stopped (0 Hz) state. Likewise, the value set at the DEC (deceleration time)
code in the Operation group (dr.04) refers to the time required to return to a stopped
state (0 Hz) from the maximum frequency.

ACC Acceleration time 5.0 0.0–600.0 sec
Operation
dEC Deceleration time 10.0 0.0–600.0 sec
dr 20 Maximum frequency 60.00 40.00–400.00 Hz
Acc/Dec reference
08 0 Max Freq 0–1 -
bA frequency
09 Time scale setting 1 0.1sec 0–2 -
Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency – Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Set the parameter value to 0 (Max Freq) to setup Acc/Dec time based
on maximum frequency.
Set the Acc/Dec time based on maximum
bA.08 0 Max Freq
frequency.
Ramp T Mode Set the Acc/Dec time based on operating
1 Delta Freq
frequency.
If, for example, maximum frequency is 60.00 Hz, the Acc/Dec times
are set to 5 seconds, and the frequency reference for operation is set
at 30 Hz, the time required to reach 30 Hz therefore is 2.5 seconds.
74
Code and
Description
Features
Use the time scale for all time-related values. It is particularly useful
when a more accurate Acc/Dec times are required because of load
characteristics, or when the maximum time range needs to be
extended.
bA.09 Time
scale Configuration Function
0 0.01sec Sets 0.01 second as the minimum unit.
1 0.1sec Sets 0.1 second as the minimum unit.
2 1sec Sets 1 second as the minimum unit.
Note that the range of maximum time values may change automatically when the units are
changed. If for example, the acceleration time is set at 6000 seconds, a time scale change
from 1 second to 0.01 second will result in a modified acceleration time of 60.00 seconds.
4.8.2 Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency

Acc/Dec times can be set based on the time required to reach the next step frequency
from the existing operation frequency. To set the Acc/Dec time values based on the
existing operation frequency, set bA. 08 (acc/dec reference) in the Basic group to 1
(Delta Freq).

Operatio ACC Acceleration time 5.0 0.0–600.0 sec
n dEC Deceleration time 10.0 0.0–600.0 sec
Acc/Dec reference
bA 08 1 Delta Freq 0–1 -
frequency
75
Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency – Setting Details

Code and
Description
Features
Set the parameter value to 1 (Delta Freq) to set Acc/Dec times based
on Maximum frequency.
Set the Acc/Dec time based on maximum
0 Max Freq
frequency.
Set the Acc/Dec time based on operating
1 Delta Freq
frequency.
bA.08 If Acc/Dec times are set to 5 seconds, and multiple frequency

Ramp T Mode references are used in the operation in 2 steps, at 10 Hz and 30 Hz, the
time to accelerate will be as follows.
4.8.3 Multi-step Acc/Dec Time Configuration

Acc/Dec times can be configured via a multi-function terminal by setting the ACC
(acceleration time) and dEC (deceleration time) codes in the Operation group.
Operatio ACC Acceleration time 5.0 0.0–600.0 sec
n dEC Deceleration time 10.0 0.0–600.0 sec
Multi-step
70–82 acceleration time 0.0 0.0–600.0 sec
1–7
bA
Multi-step
71–83 deceleration time 0.0 0.0–600.0 sec
1–7
11 XCEL-L
Px terminal
65–69 12 XCEL-M 0–52 -
setting options
49 XCEL-H
In
Multi-step
89 command delay 1 1–5000 ms
time
76
Acc/Dec Time Setup via Multi-function Terminals – Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
bA. 70–82
Set multi-step acceleration time 1–7.
Acc Time 1–7
bA.71–83
Set multi-step deceleration time 1–7.
Dec Time 1–7
Choose and configure the terminals to use for multi-step Acc/Dec time
inputs.
11 XCEL-L Acc/Dec command-L
12 XCEL-M Acc/Dec command-M
49 XCEL-H Acc/Dec command-H
Acc/Dec commands are recognized as binary code inputs and will

control the acceleration and deceleration based on parameter values
set with bA.70–82 and bA.71–83.
If, for example, the P4 and P5 terminals are set as XCEL-L and XCEL-
M respectively, the following operation will be available.
In.65–69
Px Define
(P1–P5)
Acc/Dec time P5 P4
0 - -
1 - ✓
2 ✓ -
3 ✓ ✓
[Configuration of multi-function terminals P4 and P5]
Set the time for the inverter to check for other terminal block inputs.
In.89 In Check In.89 is set to 100 ms and a signal is supplied to the P4 terminal, the
Time inverter searches for other inputs over the next 100 ms. When the time
expires, the Acc/Dec time will be set based on the input received at P4.
77
4.8.4 Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency

You can set a switch frequency for the Acc/Dec time to change the Acc/Dec gradients
without configuring the multi-function terminals.

ACC Acceleration time 5.0 0.0–600.0 sec
Operation
dEC Deceleration time 10.0 0.0–600.0 sec
Multi-step
70 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
acceleration time 1
bA
Multi-step
71 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
deceleration time 1
Acc/Dec time 0–Max
Ad 60 30.00 Hz
transition frequency Frequency
Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
After the Acc/Dec switch frequency has been set, Acc/Dec gradients
configured at bA.70 and 71 will be used when the inverter’s operation
frequency is at or below the switch frequency.
If the operation frequency exceeds the switch frequency, the
Ad.60 configured gradient level, configured for the ACC and dEC codes, will
Xcel Change Fr be used.
If you configure the P1–P5 multi-function input terminals for multi-step
Acc/Dec gradients (XCEL-L, XCEL-M, XCEL-H), the inverter will
operate based on the Acc/Dec inputs at the terminals instead of the
Acc/Dec switch frequency configurations.
78
4.9 Acc/Dec Pattern Configuration

Acc/Dec gradient level patterns can be configured to enhance and smooth the
inverter’s acceleration and deceleration curves. Linear pattern features a linear
increase or decrease to the output frequency, at a fixed rate. For an S-curve pattern a
smoother and more gradual increase or decrease of output frequency happens, ideal
for lift-type loads or elevator doors, etc. S-curve gradient level can be adjusted using
codes Ad. 03–06 in the Advanced group.
Acc/Dec reference 0 Max Freq
bA 08 0–1 -
frequency
01 Acceleration pattern 0 Linear -
0–1
02 Deceleration pattern 1 S-curve -
S-curve acceleration
03 40 1–100 %
start point gradient
S-curve acceleration
Ad 04 40 1–100 %
end point gradient
S-curve deceleration
05 40 1–100 %
start point gradient
S-curve deceleration
06 40 1–100 %
end point gradient
Acc/Dec Pattern Setting Details

Code and
Description
Features
If the acc/dec pattern is set as S-curve, set the gradient level (slant) for
the acceleration start time. Gradient level is the ratio which gradient
acceleration takes up in the section under 1/2 frequency based on the
Ad.03 Acc S 1/2 frequency of target frequency.
Start If the frequency reference and maximum frequency are set at 60 Hz
and Ad.03 is set to 50%, 0–15 Hz section will conduct curve
acceleration and the 15-30 Hz section will conduct linear acceleration
when the S-curve accelerates up to 30 Hz.
Set the gradient level for when the operation frequency reaches the
target frequency.
The curve ratio is the ratio that the curve acceleration takes place
Ad.04 Acc S within the section above the 1/2 frequency, based on the 1/2 frequency
End of the frequency reference.
If the setting is set identical to the Ad.03 Acc S Start example, the 30–
45 Hz section will conduct linear acceleration. The 45–60 Hz section
will first conduct curve acceleration then conduct at a constant speed.
Ad.05 Dec S
Start – Sets the rate of S-curve deceleration. The setup method is the same
Ad.06 Dec S as the ratio during acceleration.
End
79
[Acceleration / deceleration pattern configuration]
[Acceleration / deceleration S-curve pattern configuration]
Note
The Actual Acc/Dec time during an S-curve application
Actual acceleration time = user-configured acceleration time + user-configured
acceleration time x starting gradient level/2 + user-configured acceleration time x ending
gradient level/2.
Actual deceleration time = user-configured deceleration time + user-configured
deceleration time x starting gradient level/2 + user-configured deceleration time x ending
gradient level/2.
Note that actual Acc/Dec times become greater than user defined Acc/Dec times when
S-curve Acc/Dec patterns are in use.
80
4.10 Stopping the Acc/Dec Operation

Configure the multi-function input terminals to stop acceleration or deceleration and
operate the inverter at a fixed frequency.

Px terminal
In 65ㅡ69 25 XCEL Stop 0–52 -
setting options
4.11 V/F Control

Configure the inverter’s output voltages, gradient levels and output patterns to achieve
a target output frequency with V/F control. The amount of torque boost used during
low frequency operations can also be adjusted.
4.11.1 Linear V/F Pattern Operation

A linear V/F pattern configures the inverter to increase or decrease the output voltage
at a fixed rate for different operation frequencies based on V/F characteristics. Used
for loads that require constant torque regardless of the frequency.
81

09 Control mode 0 V/F 0–4 -
dr 18 Base frequency 60.00 30.00–400.00 Hz
19 Start frequency 0.50 0.01–10.00 Hz
bA 07 V/F pattern 0 Linear 0–3 -
Linear V/F Pattern Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Sets the base frequency. A base frequency is the inverter’s output
dr.18 Base Freq frequency when running at its rated voltage. Refer to the motor’s rating
plate to set this parameter value.
Sets the start frequency. A start frequency is a frequency at which the
inverter starts voltage output.
The inverter does not produce output voltage while the frequency
reference is lower than the set frequency. However, if a deceleration
stop is made while operating above the start frequency, output voltage
will continue until the operation frequency reaches a full-stop.
dr.19 Start Freq
4.11.2 Square Reduction V/F Pattern Operation

Square reduction V/F pattern is ideal for loads such as fans and pumps. It provides
non-linear acceleration and deceleration patterns to sustain torque throughout the
whole frequency range.
Setting
Range
1 Square
bA 07 V/F pattern 0–3 -
3 Square2
82
Square Reduction V/F Pattern Operation - Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Sets the parameter value to 1 (Square) or 2 (Square2) according to
the load’s start characteristics.
bA.07 V/F The inverter produces output voltage proportional
Pattern 1 Square
to 1.5 square of the operation frequency.
The inverter produces output voltage proportional
Square to 2 square of the operation frequency. This
3
2 setup is ideal for variable torque loads such as
fans or pumps.
4.11.3 User V/F Pattern Operation

The inverter allows the configuration of user-defined V/F patterns to suit the load
characteristics of special motors.

07 V/F pattern 2 User V/F 0–3 -
User Frequency 0–Max
41 15.00 Hz
1 Frequency
42 User Voltage 1 25 0–100 %
43 30.00 Hz
2 Frequency
bA 44 User Voltage 2 50 0–100 %
45 45.00 Hz
3 Frequency
46 User Voltage 3 75 0–100 %
47 Maximum frequency Hz
4 Frequency
48 User Voltage 4 100 0–100% %
83
User V/F Pattern Setting Details
Code and Features Description

Select the arbitrary frequency between the start and the maximum
bA.41 User Freq 1 – frequencies to set the user frequency (User Freq x). Also set the
bA.48 User Volt 4 voltage to correspond to each frequency in user voltage (User
Volt x).
The 100% output voltage in the figure below is based on the parameter settings of
bA.15 (motor rated voltage). If bA.15 is set to 0 it will be based on the input voltage.
• When a normal induction motor is in use, care must be taken not to configure the
output pattern away from a linear V/F pattern. Non-linear V/F patterns may cause
insufficient motor torque or motor overheating due to over-excitation.
• When a user V/F pattern is in use, forward torque boost (dr.16) and reverse torque
boost (dr.17) do not operate.
84
4.12 Torque Boost
4.12.1 Manual Torque Boost

Manual torque boost enables users to adjust output voltage during low speed
operation or motor start. Increase low speed torque or improve motor starting
properties by manually increasing output voltage. Configure manual torque boost
while running loads that require high starting torque, such as lift-type loads.

Torque boost
15 0 Manual 0–1 -
mode
Forward Torque
dr 16 2.0 0.0–15.0 %
boost
Reverse torque
17 2.0 0.0–15.0 %
boost
Manual Torque Boost Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
dr.16 Fwd Boost Set torque boost for forward operation.
dr.17 Rev Boost Set torque boost for reverse operation.
Excessive torque boost will result in over-excitation and motor overheating.
85
4.12.2 Auto Torque Boost

In V/F operation, this adjusts the output voltage if operation is improper due to a low
output voltage. It is used when operation is improper, due to a lack of starting torque,
by providing a voltage boost to the output voltage via the torque current.

Torque boost
dr 15 1 Auto 0–1 -
mode
Auto torque
dr 26 2 1–1000 -
boost filter gain
Auto torque
dr 27 boost motoring 50.0 0.0–300.0 %
voltage gain
Auto torque
boost
dr 28 50.0 0.0–300.0 %
regeneration
voltage gain
You can use the parameter value displayed on the motor’s rating plate without motor
parameter tuning. Use after entering the value recorded on the motor’s rating plate in
dr18 (base frequency), bA12 (motor’s rated slip frequency), bA13 (motor’s rated
current), and bA14 (motor’s no load current). If you do not use the value displayed on
the motor’s rating plate, each parameter value is set to the initial value and some
features may be limited.
In V/F operation, this adjusts the output voltage if operation is improper due to a low
output voltage. Use when it cannot be started due to the lack of the starting torque as
a method to output voltage by adding the voltage boost quantity calculated by using
torque current on the manual torque boost quantity (dr16, dr17). If the run direction is
forward, dr16 forward torque boost quantity is applied. If the direction is reverse, dr17
reverse torque boost quantity is applied. As the values to adjust the amount of
compensation according to the load, dr27 and dr28 automatic torque boost voltage
gain can be adjusted and used when there is a lack of starting torque or when
excessive current is flowing.
If number 1 (automatic torque boost) is selected from the dr15 code of drive (dr) group,
dr26, dr27, and dr28 parameters can be corrected and the inverter outputs voltage
according to the torque boost quantity.
86
4.13 Motor Output Voltage Adjustment

Output voltage settings are required when a motor’s rated voltage differs from the
input voltage to the inverter. Set the voltage value to configure the motor’s rated
operating voltage. The set voltage becomes the output voltage of the inverter’s base
frequency. If bA.15 (motor rated voltage) is set to 0, the inverter corrects the output
voltage based on the input voltage in the stopped condition. If the frequency is higher
than the base frequency, when the input voltage is lower than the parameter setting,
the input voltage will be the inverter output voltage.

bA 15 Motor rated voltage 0 0, 100-480 V
4.14 Start Mode Setting

Select the start mode to use when the operation command is input with the motor in
the stopped condition.
4.14.1 Accelerating Start

Acceleration start is a general acceleration mode. If there are no extra settings applied,
the motor accelerates directly to the frequency reference when the command is input.

Ad 07 Start Mode 0 Acc 0–1 -
87
4.14.2 DC Braking After Start

This start mode supplies a DC voltage for a set amount of time to provide DC braking
before an inverter starts to accelerate a motor. If the motor continues to rotate due to
its inertia, DC braking will stop the motor, allowing the motor to accelerate from a
stopped condition. DC braking can also be used with a mechanical brake connected
to a motor shaft, if a constant torque is required after the mechanical brake is released.
The function to start after DC braking will not operate if the control mode is set to IM
Sensorless.

Dc-
07 Start Mode 1 0–1 -
Start
Start DC braking
12 0.00 0.00–60.00 sec
time
Ad
0-Rated Current of
Amount of applied Inverter/Rated
13 50 %
DC Current of Motor x
100%
The amount of DC braking required is based on the motor’s rated current. If the DC
braking resistance is too high or brake time is too long, the motor may overheat or be
damaged. The maximum value of the amount of applied DC is limited to the inverter rated
current.
88
4.14.3 Initial Excitation of Stop Status (Pre-excite)

Use to apply the exciting current to the motor under a stop status. If you enter the
multi-function input signal set with the initial excitation signal, DC voltage will be
supplied to the motor.

0-Rated
Current of
Ad 13 Amount of applied DC 50 Inverter/Rated %
Current of
Motor x 100%
Px terminal setting Pre
In 65–69 34 - -
options excite
The amount of DC braking required is based on the motor’s rated current. If the DC
braking resistance is too high or brake time is too long, the motor may overheat or be
damaged. The maximum value of the amount of applied DC is limited to the inverter rated
current.
4.15 Stop Mode Setting

Select a stop mode to stop the inverter operation.
4.15.1 Deceleration Stop

Deceleration stop is a general stop mode. If there are no extra settings applied, the
motor decelerates down to 0 Hz and stops, as shown in the figure below.

Ad 08 Stop Mode 0 Dec 0–4 -
89
4.15.2 DC Braking After Stop

When the operation frequency reaches the set value during deceleration (DC braking
frequency), the inverter stops the motor by supplying DC power to the motor. With a
stop command input, the inverter begins decelerating the motor. When the frequency
reaches the DC braking frequency set at Ad.17, the inverter supplies DC voltage to the
motor and stops it.
08 Stop Mode 1 DC-Brake 0–4 -
Output block time
14 0.10 0.00–60.00 sec
before braking
15 DC braking time 1.00 0–60 sec
Ad 0-Rated Current of
16 DC braking rate 50 Inverter/Rated Current %
of Motor x 100%
DC braking
17 5.00 0.00–60.00 Hz
frequency
DC Braking After Stop Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Set the time to block the inverter output before DC braking. If the
inertia of the load is great, or if DC braking frequency (Ad.17) is set
Ad.14 Dc-Block
too high, a fault trip may occur due to overcurrent conditions when
Time
the inverter supplies DC voltage to the motor. Prevent overcurrent
fault trips by adjusting the output block time before DC braking.
Ad.15 Dc-Brake
Set the time duration for the DC voltage supply to the motor.
Time
Set the amount of DC braking to apply. The parameter setting is
based on the rated current of the motor. The maximum value of the
Ad.16 Dc-Brake
DC braking rate is limited as an inverter rated current.
Level
Maximum Value of Dc-Brake Level = Rated Current of
Inverter/Rated Current of Motor x 100%
90
Code and
Description
Features
Set the frequency to start DC braking. When the frequency is
Ad.17 Dc-Brake reached, the inverter starts deceleration.
Freq If the dwell frequency is set lower than the DC braking frequency,
dwell operation will not work and DC braking will start instead.
• Note that the motor can overheat or be damaged if an excessive amount of DC braking
is applied to the motor, or DC braking time is set too long.
• The motor can be overheated or damaged. The maximum value of DC braking is
limited to the rated current of the inverter.
4.15.3 Free Run Stop

When the Operation command is off, the inverter output turns off, and the load stops
due to residual inertia.
Free-
Ad 08 Stop Mode 2 0–4 -
Run
91
Note that when there is high inertia on the output side and the motor is operating at high
speed, the load’s inertia will cause the motor to continue rotating even if the inverter output
is blocked.
4.15.4 Power Braking

When the inverter’s DC voltage rises above a specified level due to motor
regenerated energy, a control is made to either adjust the deceleration gradient level
or reaccelerate the motor in order to reduce the regenerated energy. Power braking
can be used when short deceleration times are needed without brake resistors, or
when optimum deceleration is needed without causing an over voltage fault trip.
Setting
Range
Ad 08 Stop Mode 4 Power Braking 0–4 -
• To prevent overheating or damaging the motor, do not apply power braking to the
loads that require frequent deceleration.
• Stall prevention and power braking only operate during deceleration, and power
braking takes priority over stall prevention. In other words, when both bit3 of Pr.50 (stall
prevention and flux braking) and Ad.08 (power braking) are set, power braking will take
precedence and operate.
• Note that if deceleration time is too short or inertia of the load is too great, an
overvoltage fault trip may occur.
• Note that if a free run stop is used, the actual deceleration time can be longer than the
pre-set deceleration time.
92
4.16 Frequency Limit

Operation frequency can be limited by setting maximum frequency, start frequency,
upper limit frequency and lower limit frequency.
4.16.1 Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start

Frequency
19 Start frequency 0.50 0.01–10.00 Hz
dr Maximum
20 60.00 40.00–400.00 Hz
frequency
Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start Frequency - Setting

Details
Code and
Description
Features
Set the lower limit value for speed unit parameters that are expressed in
dr.19 Start
Hz or rpm. If an input frequency is lower than the start frequency, the
Freq
parameter value will be 0.00.
Set upper and lower frequency limits. All frequency selections are
dr.20 Max restricted to frequencies from within the upper and lower limits. This
Freq restriction also applies when you in input a frequency reference using the
keypad.
93
4.16.2 Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit

Frequency Values
24 Frequency limit 1 Yes 0–1 -
Frequency lower 0.0–maximum
25 0.50 Hz
limit value frequency
Ad
Lower limit–
Frequency upper Maximum
26 maximum Hz
limit value frequency
frequency
Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequencies - Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
The initial setting is 0 (No). When the setting is changed to 1
(Yes), the frequency can be set only between the lower limit
Ad.24 Freq Limit
frequency (Ad.25) and the upper limit frequency (Ad.26). When
the setting is 0 (No), codes Ad.25 and Ad.26 are not visible.
Set an upper limit frequency to all speed unit parameters that are
Ad.25 Freq Limit Lo,
expressed in Hz or rpm, except for the base frequency (dr.18).
Ad.26 Freq Limit Hi
Frequency cannot be set higher than the upper limit frequency.
94
4.16.3 Frequency Jump

Use frequency jump to avoid mechanical resonance frequencies. Jump through
frequency bands when a motor accelerates and decelerates. Operation frequencies
cannot be set within the pre-set frequency jump band.
When a frequency setting is increased, while the frequency parameter setting value
(voltage, current, RS-485 communication, keypad setting, etc.) is within a jump
frequency band, the frequency will be maintained at the lower limit value of the
frequency band. Then, the frequency will increase when the frequency parameter
setting exceeds the range of frequencies used by the frequency jump band.

27 Frequency jump 1 Yes 0–1 -
Jump frequency 0.00–Jump frequency upper limit
28 10.00 Hz
lower limit 1 1
Jump frequency Jump frequency lower limit 1–
29 15.00 Hz
upper limit 1 Maximum frequency
30 20.00 Hz
Ad lower limit 2 2
31 25.00 Hz
32 30.00 Hz
lower limit 3 3
33 35.00 Hz
95
4.17 2nd Operation Mode

Apply two types of operation modes and switch between them as required. For both
the first and second command source, set the frequency after shifting operation
commands to the multi-function input terminal. Mode switching can be used to stop
remote control during an operation using the communication option and to switch
operation mode to operate via the local panel, or to operate the inverter from another
remote control location.
Select one of the multi-function terminals from codes In.65–69 and set the parameter
value to 15 (2nd Source).
Setting
Range
drv Command Source 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–4 -
Operatio
Frequency reference
n Frq 2 V1 0–8 -
source
04 2nd command source 0 Keypad 0–4 -
bA
05 2nd frequency source 0 KeyPad-1 0–8 -
Px terminal setting
In 65–69 15 2nd Source 0–52 -
options
2nd Operation Mode Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
If signals are provided to the multi-function terminal set as the 2nd
bA.04 Cmd 2nd command source (2nd Source), the operation can be performed
Src using the set values from bA.04–05 instead of the set values from
bA.05 Freq 2nd the drv and Frq codes in the Operation group.
Src The 2nd command source settings cannot be changed while
operating with the 1st command source (Main Source).
• When setting the multi-function terminal to the 2nd command source (2nd Source) and
input (On) the signal, operation state is changed because the frequency setting and the
Operation command will be changed to the 2nd command. Before shifting input to the
multi-function terminal, ensure that the 2nd command is correctly set. Note that if the
deceleration time is too short or inertia of the load is too high, an overvoltage fault trip
may occur.
• Depending on the parameter settings, the inverter may stop operating when you switch
the command modes.
96
4.18 Multi-Function Input Terminal Control

Filter time constants and the type of multi-function input terminals can be configured
to improve the response of input terminals.

Multi-function input
85 10 0–10000 ms
terminal On filter
86 3 0–10000 ms
terminal Off filter
In 87 0 0000* - -
terminal selection
NO/NC selection of
88 0 0–1 -
operation command
90 0 0000* - -
terminal status
* Displayed as on the keypad.
Multi-Function Input Terminal Control Setting Details

Code and
Description
Features
Select whether or not to activate the time values set at In.85 and In.86.
If deactivated, the time values are set to the default values at In.85 and
In.86. If activated, the set time values at In.85 and In.86 are set to the
In.84 DI Delay corresponding terminals.
Sel
Items Enable state of terminal Disable state of terminal
Keypad
In.85 DI On
If the input terminal’s state is not changed during the set time, when the
Delay, In.86 DI
terminal receives an input, it is recognized as On or Off.
Off Delay
Select terminal contact types for each input terminal. The position of the
indicator light corresponds to the segment that is on as shown in the
table below. With the bottom segment on, it indicates that the terminal
is configured as an A terminal (Normally Open) contact. With the top
segment on, it indicates that the terminal is configured as a B terminal
In.87 DI NC/NO (Normally Closed) contact. Terminals are numbered P1–P5, from right
Sel to left.
Items B contact status A contact status

Keypad
In.88 Fx/Rx Select whether to use the terminal set to Fx/Rx as NO (Normal Open)
97
Code and
Description
Features
NO/NC Sel only or to use as NO (Normal Open) and NC(Normal Close). If set to 1:
NO only, the terminal in which the functions are set to Fx/Rx cannot be
set as NC.
If set to 0: NO/NC, terminals set as Fx/Rx can also be set as NC.
Display the configuration of each contact. When a segment is
configured as A terminal using dr.87, the On condition is indicated by
the top segment turning on. The Off condition is indicated when the
bottom segment is turned on. When contacts are configured as B
terminals, the segment lights behave conversely. Terminals are
In.90 DI Status
numbered P1–P5, from right to left.
Bit On when A contact is
Items Bit Off when A contact is set
set
Keypad
4.19 Fire Mode Operation

This function is used to allow the inverter to ignore minor faults during emergency
situations, such as fire, and provides continuous operation to fire pumps.
When turned on, Fire mode forces the inverter to ignore all minor fault trips and repeat
a Reset and Restart for major fault trips, regardless of the restart trial count limit.
Fire Mode Parameter Settings

Setting
Range
80 Fire Mode selection 1 Fire Mode 0–2 -
81 Fire Mode frequency 0–60 0–60
Fire Mode run
Ad 82 0–1 0–1
direction
Fire Mode operation Not
83 - -
count configurable
Px terminal setting
In 65–69 51 Fire Mode 0–52 -
options
Ad 80. If Fire Mode Sel parameter is selected as Fire Mode and the terminal selected
as 51: Fire Mode in In.65–69 Px terminal feature setup parameter is entered as On
state, the inverter will operate as Fire Mode and Ad 83. Fire Mode Count will be
increased by 1.
The inverter runs in Fire Mode when Ad. 80 (Fire Mode Sel) is set to Fire Mode Test,
and the multi-function terminal (In. 65-69 Px) configured for the fire mode (51: Fire
Mode) is turned on. But when the minor fault trips are ignored or there are major fault
trips, automatic Reset/Restart is not attempted, and the Fire Mode Count is not
increased.
98
Fire mode operation may result in inverter malfunction. Note that if AD 83 Fire mode count
is not "0" the warranty is voided.
Code Description Details

Ad.81 The frequency set at Ad. 81 (Fire mode frequency) is used
Fire mode
Fire for the inverter operation in Fire mode. The Fire mode
frequency
Mode frequency takes priority over the Jog frequency, Multi-step
reference
frequency frequencies, and the keypad input frequency.
During Fire Mode operation, the inverter accelerates for
Dr.03 Acc
the time set in Dr 03. Acc Time. If the Px terminal input set
Time / Fire mode
as Fire Mode input becomes Off status, the inverter
Dr.04 Acc/Dec times
decelerates for the time set in Dr 0.4. Dec Time until the
Dec Time
operation is ended.
Some fault trips are ignored during Fire mode operation.

The fault trip history is saved, but trip outputs are disabled
even when they are configured at the multi-function output
terminals.
Fault trips that are ignored in Fire mode

BX, External Trip, Low Voltage Trip, Inverter Overheat,
Inverter Overload, Overload, Electrical Thermal Trip,
Input/Output Open Phase, Motor Overload, Fan Trip, No
Motor Trips, and other minor fault trips.
PR.10 For the following fault trips, the inverter performs a Reset
Retry Fault trip process and Restart until the trip conditions are released. The retry
Delay delay time set at PR. 10 (Retry Delay) applies while the
inverter performs a Reset and Restart.
Fault trips that force a Reset Restart in Fire mode

Over Voltage, Over Current1 (OC1), Ground Fault Trip
The inverter stops operating when the following fault trips

occur:
Fault trips that stop inverter operation in Fire mode

H/W Diag, Over Current 2 (Arm-Short)
99
Learning Advanced Features
5 Learning Advanced Features

This chapter describes the advanced features of the Nx2000+ inverter. Check the
reference page in the table to see the detailed description for each of the application
features.
Advanced Tasks Use Example Ref.

Use the main and auxiliary frequencies in the predefined
Auxiliary frequency formulas to create various operating conditions. Auxiliary
p.102
operation frequency operation is ideal for Draw Operation* as this
feature enables fine-tuning of operation speeds.
Jog operation is a kind of a manual operation. The inverter
Jog operation operates to a set of parameter settings predefined for Jog p.107
operation, while the Jog command button is pressed.
Uses the upper and lower limit value switch output signals
Up-down operation (i.e. signals from push button) as Acc/Dec commands to p.109
motors.
3-wire operation is used to latch an input signal. This
3-wire operation configuration is used to operate the inverter by a push p.110
button.
This safety feature allows the inverter’s operation only after
a signal is input to the multi-function terminal designated for
Safe Operation
the safety operation mode. This feature is useful when extra p.112
mode
care is needed in operating the inverter using the multi-
purpose terminals.
Use this feature for the lift-type loads such as elevators,
Dwell operation when the torque needs to be maintained while the brakes p.113
are applied or released.
This feature ensures that the motor rotates at a constant
Slip compensation speed, by compensating for the motor slip as a load p.115
increases.
PID control provides automatic control of the inverter’s
PID Control output frequency for the purpose of constant automated p.117
control of flow, pressure, and temperature.
Used to automatically measure the motor control
Auto tuning parameters to optimize the inverter’s control mode p.124
performance.
An efficient mode to control magnetic flux and torque without
Sensorless vector special sensors. Efficiency is achieved through the high
p.127
control torque characteristics at low current when compared with
the V/F control mode.
Used to maintain the DC link voltage for as long as possible
Energy buffering by controlling the inverter output frequency during power p.133
interruptions, thus to delay a low voltage fault trip.
Energy saving Used to save energy by reducing the voltage supplied to p.136
100
Advanced Tasks Use Example Ref.

operation motors during low-load and no-load conditions.
Speed search Used to prevent fault trips when the inverter voltage is
p.137
operation output while the motor is idling or free-running.
Auto restart configuration is used to automatically restart the
Auto restart inverter when a trip condition is released, after the inverter
p.142
operation stops operating due to activation of protective devices (fault
trips).
Used to switch equipment operation by connecting two
2nd Motor motors to one inverter. Configure and operate the second
p.145
Operation motor using the terminal input defined for the second motor
operation.
Commercial power Used to switch the power source to the motor from the
p.146
source transition inverter output to a commercial power source, or vice versa.
Cooling fan control Used to control the cooling fan of the inverter. p.147
Set the timer value and control the On/Off state of the multi-
Timer settings p.152
function output and relay.
Used to control the On/Off operation of the load’s electronic
Brake control p.153
braking system.
Set standard values and turn On/Off the output relays or
Multi-function Relay
multi-function output terminals according to the analog input p.154
On/Off control
value.
Press regeneration Used during a press operation to avoid motor regeneration,
p.155
prevention by increasing the motor operation speed.
* Draw operation is an open loop tension control. This feature allows a constant
tension to be applied to the material that is drawn by a motor-driven device, by fine-
tuning the motor speed using operation frequencies that are proportional to a ratio of
the main frequency reference.
101
5.1 Operating with Auxiliary References

Frequency references can be configured with various calculated conditions that use
the main and auxiliary frequency references simultaneously. The main frequency
reference is used as the operating frequency, while auxiliary references are used to
modify and fine-tune the main reference.

Frequency
Operation Frq 0 Keypad-1 0–8 -
reference source
Auxiliary reference
01 1 V1 0–4 -
source
Auxiliary command
bA 02 0 M+(G*A) 0–7 -
calculation type
Auxiliary frequency
03 0.0 -200.0–200.0 %
reference gain
Px terminal setting
In 65– 71 40 dis Aux Ref 0–52 -
options
The table above lists the available calculated conditions for the main and auxiliary
frequency references. Refer to the table to see how the calculations apply to an
example where the Frq code has been set to 0 (Keypad-1), and the inverter is
operating at a main reference frequency of 30.00 Hz. Signals at -10 – +10 V are
received at terminal V1, with the reference gain set at 5%. In this example, the
resulting frequency reference is fine-tuned within the range of 27.00–33.00 Hz [Codes
In.01–16 must be set to the default values, and In.06 (V1 Polarity), set to 1 (Bipolar)].
Auxiliary Reference Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Set the input type to be used for the auxiliary frequency reference.
0 None Auxiliary frequency reference is disabled.
bA.01 Aux Ref Sets the V1 (voltage) terminal at the control terminal
Src 1 V1
block as the source of auxiliary frequency reference.
Select the volume dial of keypad as auxiliary
3 V0
command.
Sets the I2 (current) terminal at the control terminal
4 I2
block as the source of auxiliary frequency reference.
102
Code and
Description
Features
Set the auxiliary reference gain with bA.03 (Aux Ref Gain) to configure
the auxiliary reference and set the percentage to be reflected when
calculating the main reference. Note that items 4–7 below may result
in either plus (+) or minus (-) references (forward or reverse operation)
even when unipolar analog inputs are used.
Configuration Calculating final command frequency

0 M+(G*A) Main reference+(bA.03xbA.01xIn.01)
1 M*(G*A) Main referencex(bA.03xbA.01)
2 M/(G*A) Main reference/(bA.03xbA.01)
bA.02
Main reference+{Main
Aux Calc Type 3 M+{M*(G*A)}
referencex(bA.03xbA.01)}
4 M+G*2*(A-50) Main reference+bA.03x2x(bA.01–50)xIn.01
5 M*{G*2*(A-50)} Main referencex{bA.03x2x(bA.01–50)}
6 M/{G*2*(A-50)} Main reference/{bA.03x2x(bA.01–50)}
M+M*G*2*(A- Main reference+Main
7
50) referencexbA.03x2x(bA.01–50)
M: Main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)

G: Auxiliary reference gain (%)
A: Auxiliary frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%)
bA.03 Aux Ref Adjust the size of the input (bA.01 Aux Ref Src) configured for auxiliary
Gain frequency.
Set one of the multi-function input terminals to 40 (dis Aux Ref) and
In.65–69 Px
turn it on to disable the auxiliary frequency reference. The inverter will
Define
operate using the main frequency reference only.
103
Auxiliary Reference Operation E.g.

#1
Keypad Frequency Setting is Main Frequency and V1 Analog Voltage is Auxiliary
Frequency
• Main frequency: Keypad (operation frequency 30 Hz)
• Maximum frequency setting (dr.20): 400 Hz
• Auxiliary frequency setting (bA.01): V1[Display by percentage(%) or auxiliary
frequency (Hz) depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain setting (bA.03): 50%
• In.01-32: Factory default output
Example: an input voltage of 6V is supplied to V1, and the frequency corresponding to

10 V is 60 Hz. The table below shows the auxiliary frequency A as 36 Hz[=60 Hz X (6
V/10 V)] or 60%[= 100% X (6 V/10 V)].
Setting* Calculating final command frequency

0 M[z]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30 Hz(M)+(50%(G)x36 Hz(A))=48 Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x60%(A))=9 Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x60%(A))=100 Hz
3 M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])} 30 Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x60%(A))}=39 Hz
30 Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)x60
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz]
Hz=36 Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)}=3 Hz
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–50%)}=300 Hz
30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–
M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-
7 50%)
50[%])
=33 Hz
*M: Main frequency reference/ G: Auxiliary reference gain (%)/ A: Auxiliary
frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%)
104

#2
Keypad Frequency Setting is Main Frequency and I2 Analog Voltage is Auxiliary
Frequency
• Main frequency: Keypad (operation frequency 30 Hz)
• Auxiliary frequency setting (bA.01): I2[Display by percentage(%) or auxiliary
frequency (Hz) depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain setting (bA.03): 50%
Example: an input current of 10.4 mA is applied to I2, with the frequency corresponding
to 20 mA of 60 Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency A as 24 Hz (=60[Hz] X
{(10.4[mA]-4[mA])/ (20[mA] - 4[mA])} or 40% (=100[%] X {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA])/ (20[mA] -
4[mA])}.
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30 Hz(M)+(50%(G)x24 Hz(A))=42 Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6 Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150 Hz
M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]- 30 Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)x60 Hz=24
4
50[%])[Hz] Hz
30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)} =
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])
-3 Hz(Reverse)
30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)} = -300
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])}
Hz(Reverse)
M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2* 30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x (40%(A)–50%)=
7
(A[%]-50[%]) 27 Hz
* M: Main frequency reference/ G: Auxiliary reference gain (%)/ A: Auxiliary
105

#3
V1 is Main Frequency and I2 is Auxiliary Frequency
• Main frequency: V1 (frequency command setting to 5 V and is set to 30 Hz)
• Auxiliary frequency (bA.01): I2[Display by percentage (%) or auxiliary frequency (Hz)
depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain (bA.03): 50%
Example: an input current of 10.4 mA is applied to I2, with the frequency corresponding
to 20 mA of 60 Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency A as 24
Hz(=60[Hz]x{(10.4[mA]-4[mA])/(20[mA]-4[mA])} or 40%(=100[%] x {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA])
/(20 [mA] - 4[mA])}.

0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30 Hz(M)+(50%(G)x24 Hz(A))=42 Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6 Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150 Hz
M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]- 30 Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)x60 Hz=24
4
50[%])[Hz] Hz
30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)}=-3
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])}
Hz(Reverse)
30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)}=-300
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])}
Hz(Reverse)
M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]- 30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–
7
50[%]) 50%)=27 Hz
* M: Main frequency reference/ G: Auxiliary reference gain (%)/ A: Auxiliary

Note
When the maximum frequency value is high, output frequency deviation may result due to
analog input variation and deviations in the calculations.
106
5.2 Jog Operation

The jog operation allows for a temporary control of the inverter. You can enter a jog
operation command using the multi-function terminals.
The jog operation is the second highest priority operation, after the dwell operation. If
a jog operation is requested while operating the multi-step, up-down, or 3-wire
operation modes, the jog operation overrides all other operation modes.
5.2.1 Jog Operation 1-Forward

The jog operation is available in either forward or reverse direction, using the keypad
or multi-function terminal inputs. The table below lists parameter setting for a forward
jog operation using the multi-function terminal inputs.

11 Jog frequency 10.00 0.50–Max Frequency Hz
Jog run acceleration
12 20.00 0.00–600.00 sec
dr time
Jog run deceleration
13 30.00 0.00–600.00 sec
time
65– Px terminal setting
In 6 JOG 0–52 -
69 options
Forward Jog Description Details

Code and
Description
Features
Select the jog frequency from P1–P5 and then select 6. Jog from
In.65–69.
In.65–69 Px Define
[Terminal settings for jog operation]

dr.11 JOG Frequency Set the operation frequency.
dr.12 JOG Acc Time Set the acceleration speed.
dr.13 JOG Dec Time Set the deceleration speed.
If a signal is entered at the jog terminal while an FX operation command is on, the
operation frequency changes to the jog frequency and the jog operation begins.
107
5.2.2 Jog Operation 2-Fwd/Rev Jog by Multi-Function Terminal

For jog operation 1, an operation command must be entered to start operation, but
while using jog operation 2, a terminal that is set for a forward or reverse jog also
starts an operation. The priorities for frequency, Acc/Dec time and terminal block input
during operation in relation to other operating modes (Dwell, 3-wire, up/down, etc.) are
identical to jog operation 1. If a different operation command is entered during a jog
operation, it is ignored and the operation maintains the jog frequency.

0.50–Maximum
11 Jog Frequency 10.00 Hz
frequency
Jog run acceleration
dr 12 20.00 0.00–600.00 sec
time
Jog run deceleration
13 30.00 0.00–600.00 sec
time
65– Px terminal setting 46 FWD JOG
In 0–52 -
69 options 47 REV JOG
108
5.3 Up-down Operation

The Acc/Dec can be controlled through input at the multi-function terminal block.
Similar to a flowmeter, the up-down operation can be applied easily to a system that
uses the upper-lower limit switch signals for Acc/Dec commands.

Up-down operation
Ad 65 1 Yes 0–1 -
frequency save
17 Up
Px terminal setting 18 Down
In 65–69 0–52 -
options 20 U/D Clear
27 U/D Enable
The up-down operation will operate only when the multi-function terminal set to U/D
Enable is entered. For example, even if up-down signal is entered for the up-down
operation while operating according to the analog voltage input V1, the inverter will
operate according to the analog voltage input V1. If the up-down switchover (U/D
Enable) signal is entered, the operation will follow the up-down operation terminal
input and the analog voltage input V1 will not be used for the inverter operation until
the up-down switchover (U/D Enable) signal is disabled.
If the frequency reference source parameter is set as keypad during an up/down
operation, the frequency cannot be set up using the keypad and can only be changed
using the up/down terminal.
Up-down Operation Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Select three terminals for up-down operation and set them to 17
(Up), 18 (Down) and 27 (U/D Enable), respectively. If the up-down
switchover (U/D Enable) command is not entered,
acceleration/deceleration will follow the operation command set in
drv. If the up-down switchover (U/D Enable) command is entered
during acceleration/deceleration, acceleration/deceleration will stop
to wait for Up and Down commands.
In.65–69 Px
When the operation command and up-down activation command is
Define
entered, the operation will be accelerated if the Up terminal signal
turns On, and the acceleration will stop to operate as a constant
speed if the signal turns Off.
When signal is off, deceleration stops and it operates in constant

speed. Deceleration stops and constant speed operation begins
when both Up and Down signals are entered at the same time.
109
Code and
Description
Features
During a constant speed operation, the operating frequency is saved

automatically in the following conditions: the operation command (Fx
or Rx) is off, a fault trip occurs, or the power is off.
When the operation command is turned on again, or when the

inverter regains the power source or resumes to a normal operation
from a fault trip, it resumes operation at the saved frequency. To
delete the saved frequency, use the multi-function terminal block. Set
one of the multi-function terminals to 20 (U/D Clear) and apply
Ad.65 U/D Save
signals to it during constant speed operation. The saved frequency
Mode
and the up-down operation configuration will be deleted.
5.4 3-Wire Operation

The 3-wire operation latches the signal input (the signal stays on after the button is
released), and is used when operating the inverter with a push button.

Operation drv Command Source 1 Fx/Rx - 1 - -
110

Px terminal setting
In 65–69 14 3-Wire 0–52 -
options
To enable the 3-wire operation, the following circuit sequence is necessary. The
minimum input time (t) for 3-wire operation is 1ms, and the operation stops when both
forward and reverse operation commands are entered at the same time.
[Terminal connections for 3-wire operation]
[3-wire operation]
111
5.5 Safe Operation mode

When the multi-function terminals are configured to operate in safe mode, operation
commands can be entered in the Safe operation mode only. Safe operation mode is
used to safely and carefully control the inverter through the multi-function terminals.

Safe operation
70 1 DI Dependent -
selection
Safe operation
Ad 71 0 Free-Run 0–2 -
stop options
Safe operation
72 5.0 0.0–600.0 sec
deceleration time
Px terminal
In 65–69 13 RUN Enable 0–52 -
setting options
Safe Operation Mode Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
In.65–69 Px From the multi-function terminals, select a terminal to operate in safe
Define operation mode and set it to 13 (RUN Enable).
Always
Ad.70 Run En 0 Enables safe operation mode.
Enable
Mode
Recognizes the operation command from a
1 DI Dependent
multi-function input terminal.
Set the operation of the inverter when the multi-function input terminal
in safe operation mode is off.
Blocks the inverter output when the multi-
0 Free-Run
function terminal is off.
The deceleration time (Q-Stop Time) used in
safe operation mode. Once stopped, the
Ad.71 Run Dis 1 Q-Stop operation command must be entered again
Stop to restart the operation even if the multi-
function terminal is turned On.
The inverter decelerates to the deceleration
time (Q-Stop Time) in safe operation mode
Q-Stop and stops. Once stopped, a normal operation
2
Resume will be continued if the multi-function terminal is
entered again when the operation command is
turned On.
Ad.72 Q-Stop Sets the deceleration time when Ad.71 (Run Dis Stop) is set to 1 (Q-
Time Stop) or 2 (Q-Stop Resume).
112
5.6 Dwell Operation

The dwell operation is used to maintain torque during the application and release of
the brakes on lift-type loads. Inverter dwell operation is based on the Acc/Dec dwell
frequency and the dwell time set by the user. The following points also affect dwell
operation:
• Acceleration Dwell Operation: When an operation command runs, acceleration

continues until the acceleration dwell frequency and constant speed is reached
within the acceleration dwell operation time (Acc Dwell Time). After the Acc Dwell
Time has passed, acceleration is carried out based on the acceleration time and
the operation speed that was originally set.
• Deceleration Dwell Operation: When a stop command is run, deceleration
continues until the deceleration dwell frequency and constant speed is reached
within the deceleration dwell operation time (Dec Dwell Freq). After the set time
has passed, deceleration is carried out based on the deceleration time that was
originally set, then the operation stops.
When dr.09 (Control Mode) is set to 0 (V/F), the inverter can be used for operations
with dwell frequency before opening the mechanical brake of lift-type loads, such as
an elevator.

Dwell frequency on Start frequency–
20 5.00 Hz
acceleration Maximum frequency
Operation time during
21 0.0 0.0–10.0 sec
acceleration
Ad
Dwell frequency during Start frequency–
22 5.00 Hz
deceleration Maximum frequency
Operation time during
23 0.0 0.0–60.0 sec
deceleration
113
Note
Dwell operation does not work when:
• Dwell operation time is set to 0 sec or dwell frequency is set to 0 Hz.
• Re-acceleration is attempted from stop or during deceleration, as only the first
acceleration dwell operation command is valid.
[Acceleration dwell operation]
• Although deceleration dwell operation is carried out whenever stop commands are
entered and the deceleration dwell frequency is passed through, it does not work
during a deceleration by simple frequency change (which is not a deceleration due to a
stop operation), or during external brake control applications.
[Deceleration dwell operation]
When a dwell operation is carried out for a lift - type load before its mechanical brake is
released, motors can be damaged or their lifecycle reduced due to overflow current in the
motor.
114
5.7 Slip Compensation Operation

Slip refers to the variation between the setting frequency (synchronous speed) and
motor rotation speed. As the load increases there can be variations between the
setting frequency and motor rotation speed. Slip compensation is used for loads that
require compensation of these speed variations.
Setting
Range
09 Control mode 2 Slip Compen - -
dr 0.75 kW (0.75 kW
14 Motor capacity 2 0–15 -
based)
Number of motor
11 4 2–48 -
poles
12 Rated slip speed 90 (0.75 kW based) 0–3000 Rpm
Rated motor
13 3.6 (0.75 kW based) 1.0–1000.0 A
bA current
Motor noload
14 1.6 (0.75 kW based) 0.5–1000.0 A
current
16 Motor efficiency 72 (0.75 kW based) 64–100 %
17 Load inertia rate 0 (0.75 kW based) 0–8 -
Slip Compensation Operation Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
dr.09 Control Set dr.09 to 2 (Slip Compen) to carry out the slip compensation
Mode operation.
dr.14 Motor
Set the capacity of the motor connected to the inverter.
Capacity
bA.11 Pole
Enter the number of poles from the motor rating plate.
Number
bA.12 Rated Slip Enter the number of rated rotations from the motor rating plate.
bA.13 Rated Curr Enter the rated current from the motor rating plate.
Enter the measured current when the load on the motor axis is
removed and when the motor is operated at the rated frequency. If
bA.14 Noload Curr
no-load current is difficult to measure, enter a current equivalent to
30–50% of the rated motor current.
bA.16 Efficiency Enter the efficiency from the motor rating place.
115
Code and
Description
Features
Select load inertia based on motor inertia.
0 Less than 10 times motor inertia
1 10 times motor inertia
2–8 More than 10 times motor inertia
bA.17 Inertia Rate
𝑓𝑠 =Rated slip frequency

𝑓𝑟 =Rated frequency
𝑅𝑝𝑚=Number of the rated motor rotations
𝑃=Number of motor poles
116
5.8 PID Control

Pid control is one of the most common auto-control methods. It uses a combination of
proportional, integral, and differential (PID) control that provides more effective control
for automated systems.
The functions of PID control that can be applied to the inverter operation are as
follows:
Code Function
Controls speed by using feedback about the existing speed
Speed control level of the equipment or machinery to be controlled. Control
maintains consistent speed or operates at the target speed.
Controls pressure by using feedback about the existing
pressure level of the equipment or machinery to be controlled.
Pressure Control
Control maintains consistent pressure or operates at the
target pressure.
Controls flow by using feedback about the amount of existing
Flow Control flow in the equipment or machinery to be controlled. Control
maintains consistent flow or operates at a target flow.
Controls temperature by using feedback about the existing

temperature level of the equipment or machinery to be
Temperature Control
controlled. Control maintains a consistent temperature or
operates at a target temperature.
5.8.1 Basic PID Operation

PID operates by controlling the output frequency of the inverter, through automated
system process control to maintain speed, pressure, flow, temperature and tension.

Application function
01 2 Proc PID 0–2 -
selection
16 PID output monitor - - -
17 PID reference monitor - - -
18 PID feedback monitor - - -
AP
19 PID reference setting 50.00 -100.00–100.00 %
20 PID reference source 0 Keypad 0–7 -
21 PID feedback source 0 V1 0–6 -
PID controller proportional
22 50.0 0.0–1000.0 %
gain
117

23 PID controller integral time 10.0 0.0–200.0 sec
PID controller differential
24 0 0–1000 ms
time
PID controller feed-forward
25 0.0 0–1000 %
compensation gain
26 Proportional gain scale 100.0 0.0–100.0 %
27 PID output filter 0 0–10000 ms
29 PID upper limit frequency 60.00 -300.00–300.00 Hz
30 PID lower limit frequency 0.5 -300.00–300.00 Hz
32 PID output scale 100.0 0.1–1000.0 %
33 PID output inverse 0 No 0–1 -
PID controller 0–Max
34 0.00 Hz
motion frequency Frequency
PID controller
35 0.0 0.0–100.0 %
motion level
PID controller
36 600 0–9999 sec
motion delay time
PID sleep mode
37 60.0 0–999.9 sec
delay time
0–Max
38 PID sleep mode frequency 0.00 Hz
Frequency
39 PID wake-up level 35 0–100 %
PID wake-up mode
40 0 Below Level 0–2 -
selection
43 PID unit gain 100.0 0–300 %
44 PID unit scale 2 x1 0–4 -
45 PID 2nd proportional gain 100.00 0–1000 %
22 I-Term Clear
65– PID
In Px terminal setting options 23 0–52 -
69 Openloop
24 P Gain2
Note
When the PID switch operation (switching from PID operation to general operation) enters
the multi-function input, [%] values are converted to [Hz] values. The normal PID output,
PID OUT, is unipolar, and is limited by AP.29 (PID Limit Hi) and AP.30 (PID Limit Lo). A
100.0% calculation of the PID OUT value is based on the dr.20 (MaxFreq) parameter
setting.
118
PID Basic Operation Setting Details

AP.01 App Mode Set the code to 2 (Proc PID) to select functions for the process PID.
Displays the existing output value of the PID controller. The gain
AP.16 PID Output
and scale that were set at AP.43–44 are applied on the display.
AP.17 PID Ref Displays the existing reference value set for the PID controller. The
Value gain and scale that were set at AP.43–44 are applied on the display.
Displays the input value of the PID controller that is included in the
AP.18 PID Fdb
latest feedback. The gain and scale that were set at AP.43–44 are
Value
applied on the display.
When AP.20 (PID control reference source) is set to 0 (Keypad), the
AP.19 PID Ref Set reference value can be entered. If the reference source is set to any
other value, the setting values for AP.19 are void.
Selects the reference input for the PID control. If the V1 terminal is
set to PID feedback source (PID F/B Source), the V1 terminal
cannot be set to the PID reference source (PID Ref Source). To set
V1 as a reference source, change the feedback source.
0 Keypad Keypad
AP.20 PID Ref 1 V1 -10–10 V input voltage terminal
Source 3 V0 Volume dial input of keypad
4 I2 I2 4–20 mA input voltage terminal
5 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal
Communication command via a communication
7 FieldBus
option card
When using the keypad, the PID reference setting can be displayed
at AP.17.
Selects feedback input for PID control. Items can be selected as
reference input, except the keypad input (Keypad-1 and Keypad-2).
Feedback cannot be set to an input item that is identical to the item
AP.21 PID F/B selected as the reference.
Source
For example, when Ap.20 (Ref Source) is set to 1 (V1), for AP.21
(PID F/B Source), an input other than the V1 terminal must be
selected.
Sets the output ratio for differences (errors) between reference and
AP.22 PID P-Gain, feedback. If the P-gain is set to 50%, then 50% of the error is
AP.26 P Gain Scale output. The setting range for P-gain is 0.0-1,000.0%. For ratios
below 0.1%, use AP.26 (P Gain Scale).
119

Sets the time to output accumulated errors. When the error is 100%,
the time taken for 100% output is set. When the integral time (PID I-
Time) is set to 1 second, 100% output occurs after 1 second of the
AP.23 PID I- Time error remaining at 100%. Differences in a normal state can be
reduced by PID I Time.
When the multi-function terminal block is set to 21 (I-Term Clear)
and is turned on, all of the accumulated errors are deleted.
Sets the output volume for the rate of change in errors. If the
AP.24 PID D-Time differential time (PID D-Time) is set to 1 ms and the rate of change
in errors per sec is 100%, output occurs at 1% per 10 ms.
Sets the ratio that adds the target to the PID output. Adjusting this
AP.25 PID F-Gain
value leads to a faster response.
Used when the output of the PID controller changes too fast or the
entire system is unstable, due to severe oscillation. In general, a
lower value (default value=0) is used to speed up response time,
AP.27 PID Out LPF
but in some cases a higher value increases stability. The higher the
value, the more stable the PID controller output is, but the slower
the response time.
AP.29 PID Limit Hi,
Limits the output of the controller.
AP.30 PID Limit Lo
AP.32 PID Out

Adjusts the volume of the controller output.
Scale
AP.43 PID Unit
Gain,
Adjusts the size to fit the unit.
AP.44 PID Unit
Scale
The PID controller’s gain can be adjusted using the multi-function
terminal. When a terminal is selected from In.65–69 and set to 24
AP.45 PID P2-Gain
(P Gain2), and if the selected terminal is entered, the gain set in
AP.22 and AP.23 can be switched to the gain set in AP.45.
120
[PID control block diagram]
121
5.8.2 Pre-PID Operation

When an operation command is entered that does not include PID control, general
acceleration occurs until the set frequency is reached. When the controlled variables
increase to a particular point, the PID operation begins.
Pre-PID Operation Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
When general acceleration is required without the PID control, enter
AP.34 Pre-PID the frequency up to the general acceleration. If Pre-PID Freq is set to
Freq 30 Hz, the general operation continues until the control variable (PID
feedback variable) set at AP.35 is exceeded.
When the feedback variable of the PID controller is higher than the
AP.35 Pre-PID
value set at AP.35, the PID control operation begins. However, when a
Exit,
value is set for AP.36 (Pre-PID Delay) and a feedback variable less
AP.36 Pre-PID
than the value set at AP.36 is maintained for a set amount of time, the
Delay
“pre-PID Fail” fault trip will occur and the output will be blocked.
5.8.3 PID Operation Sleep mode

If the operation continues at a frequency lower than the set condition for PID operation,
the PID operation sleep mode starts. When PID operation sleep mode starts, the
operation will stop until the feedback exceeds the parameter value set at AP.39 (PID
WakeUp Lev).
122
PID Operation Sleep Mode Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
AP.37 PID Sleep
If an operation frequency lower than the value set at AP.38 is
DT,
maintained for the time set at AP.37, the operation stops and the PID
AP.38 PID Sleep
operation sleep mode starts.
Freq
Starts the PID operation when in PID operation sleep mode. If AP.40 is
set to 0 (Below Level), the PID operation starts when the feedback
AP.39 PID variable is less than the value set as the AP.39 parameter setting.
WakeUp Lev, If AP.40 is set to 1 (Above Level), the operation starts when the
AP.40 PID feedback variable is higher than the value set at AP.39. If AP.40 is set
WakeUp Mod to 2 (Beyond Level), the operation starts when the difference between
the reference value and the feedback variable is greater than the value
set at AP.39.
5.8.4 PID Switching (PID Openloop)

When one of the multi-function terminals (In.65–69) is set to 23 (PID Openloop) and is
turned on, the PID operation stops and is switched to general operation. When the
terminal turns off, the PID operation starts again.
123
5.9 Auto-tuning
The motor parameters can be measured automatically and can be used for auto
torque boost or sensorless vector control.
Example - Auto-Tuning Based on 0.75kW, 200V, 60Hz, 4 Pole Motor

dr 14 Motor capacity 1 0.75 kW 0–15 -
Number of motor
11 4 2–48 -
poles
12 Rated slip speed 70 0–3000 Rpm
Motor rated
13 3.3 1.0–1000.0 A
current
Motor noload
14 1.7 0.5–1000.0 A
current
Motor rated
15 220 170–480 V
voltage
bA 16 Motor efficiency 83 64–100 %
20 Auto tuning 0 None - -
Depends on the motor
21 Stator resistance 2.951 Ω
setting
Leakage Depends on the motor
22 25.20 mH
inductance setting
Stator Depends on the motor
23 171.1 mH
inductance setting
Rotor time
24 137 25–5000 ms
constant
124
Auto-Tuning Default Settings
Motor No-load Rated Slip Stator Leakage

Rated
Capacity Current Frequency Resistance Inductance
Current (A)
(kW) (A) (Rpm) () (mH)
0.2 1.1 0.8 100 14.0 40.4
0.4 1.9 1.0 90 6.42 38.8
0.75 3.3 1.7 70 2.951 25.20
1.5 5.9 2.7 70 1.156 12.07
200 V
2.2 8.6 3.9 50 0.809 6.44
3.7 13.8 5.7 50 0.485 4.02
5.5 20.0 6.2 50 0.283 3.24
7.5 25.5 7.4 50 0.183 2.523
0.2 0.7 0.5 100 28.00 121.2
0.4 1.1 0.6 90 19.40 117.0
0.75 1.9 0.9 70 8.97 76.3
1.5 3.4 1.7 70 3.51 37.3
400 V
2.2 4.3 2.3 50 3.069 24.92
3.7 6.9 3.2 50 1.820 15.36
5.5 11.5 3.6 50 0.819 9.77
7.5 15.0 4.4 50 0.526 7.58
Auto Tuning Parameter Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Select an auto tuning type and run it. Select one of the options and
then press the [ENT] key to run the auto tuning.
Auto tuning function is not enabled. If the auto
0 None tuning function is ran, this will indicate that the
auto tuning is complete.
Measures all motor parameters, including stator
resistance (Rs), leakage inductance (Lsigma),
bA.20 Auto stator inductance (Ls), no-load current (Noload
Tuning Curr), and rotor time constant (Tr) while the
motor is rotating.
All As the motor is rotating while the parameters are
1 (Rotation being measured, if the load is connected to the
type) motor spindle, the parameters may not be
measured accurately. For accurate
measurements, remove the load attached to the
motor spindle. However, note that the rotor time
constant (Tr) must be measured in a stopped
position.
125
Code and
Description
Features
Measures all parameters while the motor is in the
stopped position. Measures stator resistance (Rs),
leakage inductance (Lsigma), stator inductance
(Ls), no-load current (Noload Curr), and rotor time
constant (Tr).
All (static
2
type)
As the motor is not rotating while the parameters
are measured, the measurements are not affected
when the load is connected to the motor spindle.
However, when measuring parameters, do not
rotate the motor spindle on the load side.
Rs+Lsigma Measures parameters while the motor is rotating.
3 (rotating The measured motor parameters are used for
type) auto torque boost or sensorless vector control.
Measures the rotor time constant (Tr) with the
Tr (Static
6 motor in the stopped position and Control Mode
type)
(dr.09) is set to 4 (IM Sensorless).
bA.14 Noload Displays motor parameters measured by auto tuning.

Curr, bA.21 For parameters that are not included in the auto tuning measurement
Rs-bA.24 Tr list, the default setting will be displayed.
• Perform auto tuning ONLY after the motor has completely stopped running.
• Before you run auto tuning, check the motor pole number, rated slip, rated current,
rated voltage and efficiency on the motor’s rating plate and enter the data. The default
parameter setting is used for values that are not entered.
• When measuring all parameters when motor is static after selecting 2[(All(Static type)]
at bA20 (auto tuning), the accuracy is rather less than the method of selecting 1 (ALL)
and measuring the parameters when the motor is rotating. This means that the
performance sensorless operation may be lowered. Therefore, run static type auto
tuning by selecting 2 (All) only when the motor cannot be rotated (when gearing and
belts cannot be separated easily, or when the motor cannot be separated mechanically
from the load).
126
5.10 Sensorless Vector Control for Induction

Motors
Sensorless vector control is an operation to carry out vector control without the
rotation speed feedback from the motor but with an estimation of the motor rotation
speed calculated by the inverter. Compared to V/F control, sensorless vector control
can generate greater torque at a lower level of current.

09 Control mode 4 IM Sensorless - -
Varies by Motor
dr 14 Motor capacity 0–15 -
capacity
18 Base frequency 60 30–400 Hz
11 Number of motor poles 4 2–48 -
Varies by Motor
12 Rated slip speed 0–3000 Hz
capacity
Varies by Motor
13 Motor rated current 1–1000 A
capacity
bA Varies by Motor
14 Motor noload current 0.0–1000 A
capacity
15 Motor rated voltage 220/380/440/480 170–480 V
Varies by Motor
16 Motor efficiency 64–100 %
capacity
20 Auto tuning 1 All - -
09 Initial excitation time 1.0 0.0–60.0 sec
10 Initial excitation amount 100.0 100.0–300.0 %
Low-speed torque Varies by Motor
21 50–300 %
compensation gain capacity
Output torque Varies by Motor
22 50–300 %
Speed deviation Varies by Motor
Cn 23 50–300 %
Main compensation of Varies by Motor
24 50–300 %
speed deviation capacity
No load speed
29 deviation 1.06 0.50–2.00 -
compensation gain
Speed response
30 4.0 2.0–10.0 -
adjustment gain
127

53 Torque limit setting 0 Keypad-1 0–12 -
Forward direction
54 180.0 0.0–200.0 %
retrograde torque limit
Forward direction
55 regenerative torque 180.0 0.0–200.0 %
limit
Reverse direction
56 regenerative torque 180.0 0.0–200.0 %
limit
Reverse direction
57 180.0 0.0–200.0 %
retrograde torque limit
For high-performance operation, the parameters of the motor connected to the inverter
output must be measured. Use auto tuning (bA.20 Auto Tuning) to measure the
parameters before you run sensorless vector operation. To run high-performance
sensorless vector control, the inverter and the motor must have the same capacity. If the
motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity by more than two levels, control may
be inaccurate. In that case, change the control mode to V/F control. When operating with
sensorless vector control, do not connect multiple motors to the inverter output.
5.10.1 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Setting for

Induction Motors
To run sensorless vector control operation, set dr.09 (Control Mode) to 4 (IM
sensorless), select the capacity of the motor you will use at dr.14 (Motor Capacity),
and select the appropriate codes to enter the rating plate information of the motor.
Code Input (Motor Rating Plate Information)

dr.18 Base Freq Base frequency
bA.11 Pole Number Number of motor poles
bA.12 Rated Slip Rated slip
bA.13 Rated Curr Rated current
bA.15 Rated Volt Rated voltage
Efficiency
bA.16 Efficiency (when no information is on the rating plate, default values are
used.)
After setting each code, set bA.20 (Auto tuning) to 1 (All - rotation type) or 2 (All -
static type) and run auto tuning. Because rotation type auto tuning is more accurate
for 1[(All(Rotation type)] than 2[(All(Static type)], set 1[(All(Rotation type)] and run auto
128
tuning if the motor can be rotated.
Note
Excitation Current
A motor can be operated only after magnetic flux is generated by current flowing through
a coil. The power supply used to generate the magnetic flux is called the excitation
current.
The stator coil that is used with the inverter does not have a permanent magnetic flux, so
the magnetic flux must be generated by supplying an excitation current to the coil before
operating the motor.
129
Sensorless Vector Control Operation Setting Details for Induction Motors
Code and
Description
Features
Sets pre-excitation time. Pre-excitation is used to start the
Cn.09 PreExTime
operation after performing excitation up to the motor’s rated flux.
Allows for the reduction of the pre-excitation time. The motor flux
increases up to the rated flux with the time constant as shown in
the following figure.
To reduce the time taken to reach the rated flux, a higher motor flux
base value than the rated flux must be provided. When the
magnetic flux reaches the rated flux, the provided motor flux base
value is reduced.
Cn.10 Flux Force
Sets the zero-speed control time (hold time) in the stopped position.
The output is blocked after zero-speed operation for a set period
when the motor decelerates and is stopped by a stop command.
Cn.11 Hold Time
Cn.21 Out Trq. Cn.21 mainly has an effect on the low-speed operations. For details,
Comp. Gain at Low refer to p.132 in the 5.10.2 Sensorless Vector Control Operation
Spd Guide for Induction Motors.
Cn.22 is related to the torque load quantity that can mostly be
Cn.22 ScaleOut Trq. produced by the inverter. For details, refer to p.132 in the 5.10.2
Comp. Gain Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide for Induction
Motors.
Cn.23 mainly has an effect on the motor speed. For details, refer to
Cn.23 Spd. Comp.
p.132 in the 5.10.2 Sensorless Vector Control Operation
Sub Gain
Guide for Induction Motors.
130
Code and
Description
Features
Cn.24 mainly has an effect on the motor speed. For details, refer to
Cn.24 Spd. Comp.
p.132 in the 5.10.2 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide
Main Gain
for Induction Motors.
Cn.29 mostly has an effect on the error level of the estimated
Cn.29 Spd. Comp. frequency during no load. For details, refer to p.132 in the 5.10.2
Gain at No-load Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide for Induction
Motors.
Cn.30 Spd. Cn.30 is the value that is mainly changed according to the load inertia.
Response For details, refer to p.132 in the 5.10.2 Sensorless Vector Control
Adjustment Gain Operation Guide for Induction Motors.
Select a type of torque limit setting, using the keypad, terminal block
analog input (V1 and I2) or communication power. When setting
torque limit, adjust the torque size by limiting the speed controller
output. Set the retrograde and regenerative limits for forward and
reverse operation.
0 KeyPad-1
Sets the torque limit with the keypad.
1 KeyPad-2
Cn.53 Torque Lmt Sets the torque limit with the V1 input terminal
2 V1
Src of the terminal block.
Sets the torque limit with the volume dial of
4 V0
keypad.
Sets the torque limit with the I2 input terminal of
5 I2
the terminal block.
Sets the torque limit with the communication
6 Int 485
terminal of the terminal block.
Sets the torque limit with the Fieldbus
8 FieldBus
communication option.
The torque limit can be set up to 200% of the rated motor torque.
Cn.54 FWD +Trq
Sets the torque limit for forward retrograde (motoring) operation.
Lmt
Cn.55 FWD –Trq
Sets the torque limit for forward regenerative operation.
Lmt
Cn.56 REV +Trq Lmt Sets the torque limit for reverse regenerative operation.
Cn.57 REV –Trq Lmt Sets the torque limit for reverse retrograde (motoring) operation.
Sets the maximum torque.
In.02 Torque at
For example, if In.02 is set to 200% and an input voltage (V1) is
100%
used, the torque limit is 200% when 10 V is entered.
131
Gain value can be adjusted according to the load characteristics. However, use with
caution because motor overheating and system instability may occur depending on the
Gain value settings.
5.10.2 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide for Induction

Motors
Relevant
Problem Troubleshooting
Function Code
If the number of motor If there is a severe drop in the motor rotation to
Cn.22 Out Trq.
rotations drops due to 36 RPM or more, increase the Cn.22 Out Trq.
Comp. Gain
the lack of torque Comp. Gain value in 10% units.
Change the Cn.24 Spd. Comp. Main Gain
value in 5% units. Refer to the load-rotation
count gradient according to the Cn.24 Spd.
Comp. Main Gain value below.
Example: The gradient slants
counterclockWise as the Cn.24 Spd. Comp.
Main Gain value increases.
If the motor rotation

count error factor is 18 Cn.23 Spd.
RPM or greater even Comp. Sub Gain
though there is a Cn.24 Spd.
sufficient amount of Comp. Main Gain
torque.
Change the Cn.23 Spd. Comp. Sub Gain value

in 5% units. Refer to the load-rotation count
gradient according to the Cn.23 Spd. Comp.
Sub Gain value below.
Example: The gradient slants clockWise as
Cn.23 Spd. Comp. Sub Gain value increases.
132
Relevant
Problem Troubleshooting
Function Code
If torque is lacking due

Cn.21 Out Trq.
to a load increase in If torque is lacking under low speed, increase
Comp. Gain at
low speed (5 Hz or the Cn.21 value in 5% units.
Low Spd
less)
If rotating in reverse
Cn.21 Out Trq. If rotating in reverse direction due to a load
direction due to a load
Comp. Gain at increase in low speed, decrease the Cn.21
increase in low speed
Low Spd value 5% at a time.
(5 Hz or less)
If low speed (3 Hz or
Cn.30 Spd. Sometimes control is not possible under a low
less) out-of-phase
Response speed due to high load inertia. In this case,
occurs because the
Adjustment Gain increase the Cn.30 value by 1 unit at a time.
inertia of load is high.
If motor rotation count Cn.29 Spd. If over 10 RPM of motor rotation count error
error margin occurs Comp. Gain at occurs during no load operation, adjust the
during no load No-load Cn.29 value by 0.01 unit at a time.
Although the speed response is improved the
Cn.30
If speed response is greater the Cn.30 value, speed control may
Spd.Response
required become unstable. Excessive setup may cause
Adjustment Gain
an inverter trip.
5.11 Energy Buffering Operation (Kinetic Energy

Buffering)
When the input power supply is disconnected, the inverter’s DC link voltage
decreases, and a low voltage trip occurs blocking the output. A kinetic energy
buffering operation uses regenerative energy generated by the motor during the
blackout to maintain the DC link voltage. This extends the time for a low voltage trip to
occur, after an instantaneous power interruption. For the KEB feature to operate
properly, bA-19 input power voltage parameter must be set to match the voltage of
input power.
133

Input power voltage
bA 19 220/380 170–480 V
settings
0 None
77 Energy buffering selection 1 KEB-1 0–2 -
2 KEB-2
78 Energy buffering start level 125.0 110.0–200.0 %
Cn 79 Energy buffering stop level 130.0 Cn-78–210.0 %

80 Energy buffering P gain 1000 1–20000 -
81 Energy buffering I gain 500 0–20000 -
82 Energy buffering Slip gain 30.0 0–2000.0 %
Energy buffering
83 10.0 0.0–600.0 sec
restoration frequency
65 – KEB-1
In Pn terminal function setting 52 - -
69 Select
Kinetic Energy Buffering Operation Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Select the kinetic energy buffering operation when the input power
is disconnected. If 1 or 2 is selected, it controls the inverter's output
frequency and charges the DC link (inverter's DC part) with energy
generated from the motor. Also, this function can be set using a
terminal input. From the Pn terminal function settings, select KEB-1
Select, and then turn on the terminal block to run the KEB-1
function. (If KEB-1 Select is selected, KEB-1 or KEB-2 cannot be set
in Cn-77.)
Cn.77 KEB Configuration Function

Select General deceleration is carried out until a low
0 None
voltage trip occurs.
When the input power is blocked, it charges the DC

link with regenerated energy. When the input power
is restored, it restores normal operation from the
1 KEB-1 energy buffering operation to the frequency
reference operation. KEB Acc Time in Cn- 83 is
applied as the operation frequency acceleration time
when restoring to the normal operation.
134
Code and
Description
Features
When the input power is blocked, it charges the DC
link with regenerated energy. When the input power
is restored, it changes from the energy buffering
2 KEB-2 operation to the deceleration stop operation. The
Dec Time in dr-04 is applied as the operation
frequency deceleration time during the deceleration
stop operation.
[KEB-1]
CON-79
CON-78
DC Link
DCvoltage
Link
Start
Output frequency
frequency
KEB
KEB control Operation
(CON-89)
restore
(CON-89)
Px(FX)
[KEB-2]
CON-79
CON-78
DC Link
DCvoltage
Link
Output
frequency KEB
(DRV-04)
KEB control Deceleratio
n stop
(DRV-04)
Px(FX)
Cn.78 KEB Start Sets the start and stop points of the kinetic energy buffering operation.
Lev, The set values must be based on the low voltage trip level as 100%
Cn.79 KEB Stop and the stop level (Cn.79) must be set higher than the start level
Lev (Cn.78).
135
Code and
Description
Features
The controller P Gain is for maintaining the voltage of the DC power
Cn.80 KEB P
section during the kinetic energy buffering operation. Change the
Gain
setting value when a low voltage trip occurs right after a power failure.
The controller I Gain is for maintaining the voltage of the DC power
Cn.81 KEB I section during the kinetic energy buffering operation. Sets the gain
Gain value to maintain the frequency during the kinetic energy buffering
operation until the inverter stops.
Cn.82 KEB Slip The slip gain is for preventing a low voltage trip due to load when the
Gain kinetic energy buffering operation start from blackout.
Set the acceleration time of the operation frequency when it returns to
Cn.83 KEB Acc
normal operation from the energy buffering operation when the KEB-1
Time
mode is selected and the input power is restored.
Depending on the duration of Instantaneous power interruptions and the amount of load
inertia, a low voltage trip may occur even during a kinetic energy buffering operation.
Motors may vibrate during kinetic energy buffering operation for some loads except
variable torque load (for example, fan or pump loads).
5.12 Energy Saving Operation
5.12.1 Manual Energy Saving Operation

If the inverter output current is lower than the current which is set at bA.14 (Noload
Curr), the output voltage must be reduced as low as the level set at Ad.51 (Energy
Save). The voltage before the energy saving operation starts will become the base
value of the percentage. Manual energy saving operation will not be carried out during
acceleration and deceleration.
Setting
Range
Energy saving
50 1 Manual - -
operation
Ad
Energy saving
51 30 0–30 %
amount
136
5.12.2 Automatic Energy Saving Operation

The amount of energy saving can be automatically calculated based on the rated
motor current (bA.13) and the no-load current (bA.14). From the calculations, the
output voltage can be adjusted.

Energy saving
Ad 50 2 Auto - -
operation
If operation frequency is changed or acceleration and /deceleration is carried out by a stop

command during the energy saving operation, the actual Acc/Dec time may take longer
than the set Acc/Dec time due to the time required to return to the general operation from
the energy saving operation.
5.13 Speed Search Operation

This operation is used to prevent fault trips that can occur while the inverter output
voltage is disconnected and the motor is idling. Because this feature estimates the
motor rotation speed based on the inverter output current, it does not give the exact
speed.
Setting
Range
Speed search mode 0 Flying Start-1
70 - -
selection 1 Flying Start-2
Cn Speed search operation
71 0000* - bit
selection
Speed search reference
72 - Below 75 kW 80–200 %
current
137
Setting
Range
Speed search proportional
73 100 0–9999 -
gain
74 Speed search integral gain 200 0–9999 -
Output block time before
75 1.0 0–60 sec
speed search
31 Multi-function relay 1 item 1 Speed
OU - -
33 Multi-function relay 2 item 9 Search
*Displayed as on the Keypad.
138
Speed Search Operation Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Select a speed search type.
The speed search is carried out as it controls
the inverter output current during idling
below the Cn.72 (SS Sup-Current)
parameter setting. If the direction of the
idling motor and the direction of operation
command at restart are the same, a stable
Flying Start-
0 speed search function can be performed at
1
about 10 Hz or lower.
However, if the direction of the idling motor
and the direction of operation command at
restart are different, the speed search does
not produce a satisfactory result because the
direction of idling cannot be established.
The speed search is carried out as it PI
Cn.70 SS Mode
controls the ripple current which is generated
by the counter electromotive force during no-
load rotation. Because this mode establishes
the direction of the idling motor
(forward/reverse), the speed search function
is stable regardless of the direction of the
idling motor and direction of operation
Flying Start- command. However because the ripple
1
2 current is used which is generated by the
counter electromotive force at idle (the
counter electromotive force is proportional to
the idle speed), the idle frequency is not
determined accurately and re-acceleration
may start from zero speed when the speed
search is performed for the idling motor at
low speed (about 10–15 Hz, though it
depends on motor characteristics).
Speed search can be selected from the following 4 options. If the top
display segment is on it is enabled (On), and if the bottom segment
is on it is disabled (Off).
Cn.71 Speed
Search Items Bit On Status Bit Off Status
Keypad
139
Code and
Description
Features
Type and Functions of Speed Search Setting
Configuration
Function
bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1
Speed search for general
✓
acceleration
✓ Initialization after a fault trip
Restart after instantaneous power
✓
interruption
✓ Starting with power-on
• Speed search for general acceleration: If bit 1 is set to 1 and

the inverter operation command runs, acceleration starts with
speed search operation. When the motor is rotating under load, a
fault trip may occur if the operation command is run for the
inverter to provide output voltage. The speed search function
prevents such fault trip from occurring.
• Initialization after a fault trip: If Bit 2 is set to 1 and Pr.08 (RST

Restart) is set to 1 (Yes), the speed search operation
automatically accelerates the motor to the operation frequency
used before the fault trip, when the [Reset] key is pressed (or the
terminal block is initialized) after a fault trip.
• Automatic restart after reset of a fault trip: If bit 3 is set to 1,
and if a low voltage trip occurs due to a power interruption but the
power is restored before the internal power shuts down, the
speed search operation accelerates the motor back to its
frequency reference before the low voltage trip.
If an instantaneous power interruption occurs and the input power

is disconnected, the inverter generates a low voltage trip and
blocks the output. When the input power returns, the operation
frequency before the low voltage trip and the voltage is increased
by the inverter’s inner PI control.
If the current increases above the value set at Cn.72, the voltage
stops increasing and the frequency decreases (t1 zone). If the
current decreases below the value set at Cn.72, the voltage
increases again and the frequency stops decelerating (t2 zone).
When the normal frequency and voltage are resumed, the speed
search operation accelerates the motor back to its frequency
reference before the fault trip.
140
Code and
Description
Features
• Starting with power-on: Set bit 4 to 1 and Ad.10 (Power-on Run)

to 1 (Yes). If inverter input power is supplied while the inverter
operation command is on, the speed search operation will
accelerate the motor up to the frequency reference.
The amount of current flow is controlled during speed search
Cn.72 SS Sup-
operation based on the motor’s rated current. If Cn.70 (SS mode) is
Current
set to 1 (Flying Start-2), this code is not visible.
Cn.73 SS P/I-Gain, The P/I gain of the speed search controller can be adjusted. If Cn.70
Cn.75 SS Block (SS Mode) is set to 1 (Flying Start-2), different factory defaults based
Time on motor capacity are used and defined in dr.14 (Motor Capacity).
Note
• If operated within the rated output, the Nx2000+ series inverter is designed to withstand
instantaneous power interruptions within 15 ms and maintain normal operation. Based
on the rated heavy load current, safe operation during an instantaneous power
interruption within 15ms is guaranteed for 200 V and 400 V inverters (whose rated
input voltages are 200–230 VAC and 380–460 VAC respectively).
• The DC voltage inside the inverter may vary depending on the output load. If the power
interruption time is longer than 15 ms, a low voltage trip may occur.
When operating in sensorless mode for the load that works in free-run, the speed search
function (for general acceleration) must be set for smooth operation. If the speed search
function is not set, an overcurrent trip or overload trip may occur.
141
5.14 Auto Restart Settings

When inverter operation stops due to a fault and a fault trip is activated, the inverter
automatically restarts based on the parameter settings.
Setting
Range
08 Selection of startup on trip reset 0 No 0–1 -
Pr 09 Number of automatic restarts 0 0–10 -
10 Auto restart delay time 1.0 0.0–60.0 sec
71 Speed search operation selection - 0000*–1111 bit
72 Speed search reference current 150 80–200 %
73 Speed search proportional gain 100 0–9999
Cn
74 Speed search integral gain 200 0–9999
Output block time before speed
75 1.0 0.0–60.0 sec
search
Auto Restart Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Only operates when Pr.08 (RST Restart) is set to 1 (Yes). The
number of attempts to try the auto restart is set at Pr.09 (Auto Restart
Count). If a fault trip occurs during operation, the inverter
automatically restarts after the set time programmed at Pr.10 (Retry
Delay). At each restart, the inverter counts the number of tries and
subtracts it from the number set. Once the retry number count
Pr.08 RST reaches 0, the automatic restart is not conducted. After an auto
Restart, Pr.09 restart, if a fault trip does not occur within 60 sec, it will increase the
Retry Number, restart count number. The maximum number of increase is limited by
Pr.10 Retry the number set for Auto Restart Count.
Delay
If the inverter stops due to low voltage, emergency stop (Bx), inverter
overheating, or hardware diagnosis, an auto restart is not activated.
At auto restart, the acceleration options are identical to those of
speed search operation. Codes Cn.72–75 can be set based on the
load. Information about the speed search function can be found at
5.13 Speed Search Operation on page 137.
142
[Example of auto restart with a setting of 2]
If the auto restart number is set, be careful when the inverter resets from a fault trip. The
motor may automatically start to rotate.
5.15 Operational Noise Settings (Change of Carrier

Frequency Settings)
Group Code Name Setting Range Unit
0.4kW~4.0kW 2.0~15.0
Cn 04 Carrier Frequency kHz
5.5kW~7.5kW 1.0~15.0
* PWM: Pulse width modulation
Operational Noise Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Adjust motor operational noise by changing carrier frequency settings.
Power transistors (IGBT) in the inverter generate and supply high
Cn.04 Carrier frequency switching voltage to the motor. The switching speed in this
Freq process refers to the carrier frequency. If the carrier frequency is set
high, it reduces operational noise from the motor, and if the carrier
frequency is set low, it increases operational noise from the motor.
143
Refer to the table below for the change of carrier frequency settings according to the
load level, control mode, and capacity.
Heavy Duty Normal Duty

Setting Range Setting Range
Capacity Initial Initial
V/F S/L V/F S/L
Value Value
MinimumMaximumMinimumMaximum MinimumMaximumMinimumMaximum
0.4~4.0kW 2 15 2 15 2 5 2 5
3 3
5.5~7.5kW 1 15 2 15 1 5 2 5
Note
Factory default carrier frequency (0.4–7.5 kW)
• Normal Duty: 2 kHz(Max 5 kHz)
• Heavy load: 3 kHz(Max 15 kHz)
Nx2000+ Series Inverter Derating Standard

• Nx2000+ inverter is designed to respond to two types of load rates. Heavy load (heavy
duty) and normal load (normal duty). The overload rate represents an acceptable load
amount that exceeds rated load, and is expressed in a ratio based on the rated load
and the duration. The overload capacity on the Nx2000+ series inverter is 150%/1min
for heavy loads, and 120%/1min for normal loads. The current rating differs from the
load rating, as it also has an ambient temperature limit. For derating specifications,
refer to 11.8 Continuous Rated Current Derating on page 289.
• Current rating for ambient temperature at normal load operation.
• Below shows the carrier frequency rated current guaranteed area according to the
load.
Inverter capacity Normal load Heavy load
0.4–7.5 kW 2 kHz 6 kHz
144
5.16 2nd Motor Operation

The 2nd motor operation is used when a single inverter switch operates two motors.
Using the 2nd motor operation, a parameter for the 2nd motor is set. The 2nd motor is
operated when a multi-function terminal input defined as a 2nd motor function is
turned on.
Setting
Range
Px terminal 2nd
In 65–69 26 0–52 -
setting options Motor
2nd Motor Operation Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Set one of the multi-function input terminals to 26 (2nd Motor) to
display M2 (2nd motor group) group. An input signal to a multi-function
terminal set to 2nd motor will operate the motor according to the code
settings listed below. However, if the inverter is in operation, input
In.65–69 Px signals to the multi-function terminals will not read as a 2nd motor
Define parameter.
Pr.50 (Stall Prevent) must be set first, before M2.28 (M2-Stall Lev)
settings can be used. Also, Pr.40 (ETH Trip Sel) must be set first,
before M2.29 (M2-ETH 1min) and M2.30 (M2.ETH Cont) settings.
Parameter Setting at Multi-function Terminal Input on a 2nd Motor
Code and
Description Code Description
Features
M2.04 Acc Time Acceleration time M2.16 Inertia Rt Load inertia rate
M2.05 Dec Time Deceleration time M2.17 Rs Stator resistance
M2.06 Capacity Motor capacity M2.18 Lsigma Leakage inductance
M2.07 Base Freq Motor base frequency M2.19 Ls Stator inductance
M2.08 Ctrl Mode Control mode M2.20 Tr Rotor time constant
M2.10 Pole Num Pole number M2.25 V/F Patt V/F pattern
M2.11 Rate Slip Rated slip M2.26 Fwd Boost Forward Torque boost
M2.12 Rated
Rated current M2.27 Rev Boost Reverse torque boost
Curr
M2.13 Noload
No-load Current M2.28 Stall Lev Stall prevention level
Curr
M2.14 Rated Electronic thermal 1
Motor rated voltage M2.29 ETH 1min
Volt minute rating
145
Code and
Description Code Description
Features
Electronic thermal
M2.15 Efficiency Motor efficiency M2.30 ETH Cont
continuous rating
Example - 2nd Motor Operation

Use the 2nd motor operation when switching operation between a 7.5 kW motor and a
secondary 3.7 kW motor connected to terminal P3. Refer to the following settings.
Setting
Range
P3 terminal function
In 67 26 2nd Motor - -
setting
06 Motor capacity - 3.7 kW - -
M2
08 Control mode 0 V/F - -
5.17 Commercial Power Source Transition

Supply power transition is used to switch the power source for the motor connected to
the inverter from the inverter output power to the main supply power source
(commercial power source), or vice versa.
Grou Setting
Code Name Setting Unit
p Range
Px terminal setting
In 65–69 16 Exchange 0–52 -
options
Multi-function relay 1
31 17 Inverter Line - -
item
OU
33 18 Comm Line - -
item
146
Supply Power Transition Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
When the motor power source changes from inverter output to main
In.65–69 Px supply power, select a terminal to use and set the code value to 16
Define (Exchange). Power will be switched when the selected terminal is on.
To reverse the transition, switch off the terminal.
This function sets the multi-function relay to the no. 17 inverter line and
no. 18 comm line. Relay operation sequence is as follows.
OU.31 Relay 1
–OU.33 Relay 2
5.18 Cooling Fan Control

This function turns the inverter’s heat-sink cooling fan on and off. It is used in
situations where the load stops and starts frequently, or noise free environment is
required. The correct use of cooling fan control can extend the cooling fan’s life.
Setting
Range
Ad 64 Cooling fan control 0 During Run 0–2 -
Cooling Fan Control Detail Settings

Code and
Function
Features
Cooling fan runs when the power is supplied to the
inverter and the operation command is on. The cooling
Ad.64 Fan fan stops when the power is supplied to the inverter
Control During
0 and the operation command is off. When the inverter
Run
heat sink temperature is higher than its set value, the
cooling fan operates automatically regardless of its
operation status.
147
Code and
Function
Features
Always Cooling fan runs constantly if the power is supplied to
1
On the inverter.
With power connected and the run operation
Temp command on, if the setting is in Temp Control, the
2
Control cooling fan will not operate unless the temperature in
the heat sink reaches the set temperature.
Note
Despite setting Ad.64 to 0 (During Run), if the heat sink temperature reaches a set level
by current input harmonic wave or noise, the cooling fan may run as a protection function.
Also, the cooling fan operates regardless of the cooling fan control settings to protect the
internal circuit when the input voltage is 480 VAC or higher for 400 V products.
5.19 Input Power Frequency and Voltage Settings

Select the frequency for inverter input power. If the frequency changes from 60 Hz to
50 Hz, the frequencies set above 60 Hz including the maximum frequency and base
frequency will change to 50 Hz. Likewise, changing the input power frequency setting
from 50 Hz to 60 Hz will change all related function item settings from 50 Hz to 60 Hz.
Setting
Range
bA 10 input power frequency 0 60 Hz 0–1 -
Set Inverter input power voltage. Low voltage fault trip level changes automatically to
the set voltage standard.
Setting
Range
220 V 220 170–240
bA 19 Input power voltage V
400 V 380 320–480
5.20 Parameter save

The parameters the user has changed through the compatible common area are not
saved in the inverter memory. They are used for saving the changed parameter into
the inverter memory after changing the compatible common area parameter. The
parameters cannot be saved if the inverter is operating.
148
Setting
Range
0 None
dr 92 Parameter save Parameter 0~1 -
1
save
5.21 Parameter Initialization

The parameter changed by the user can be initialized to the factory default settings.
Initialize the data of all groups or initialize data by selecting specific groups. However,
during a fault trip situation or operation, parameters cannot be initialized.
Setting
Range
dr 93 Parameter initialization 0 No 0–14 -
149
Parameter Initialization Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
0 No -
Initialize all data. Select 1 (All Grp) and
press [PROG/ENT] key to start
1 Initialize all groups
initialization. On completion, 0 (No) will
be displayed.
2 Initialize dr group
3 Initialize bA group
dr.93 4 Initialize Ad group
Parameter Init 5 Initialize Cn group
6 Initialize In group
Initialize data by groups. Select initialize
7 Initialize OU group
group and press [PROG/ENT] key to start
8 Initialize CM group initialization. On completion, 0 (No) will
9 Initialize AP group be displayed.
11 Initialize AO group
12 Initialize Pr group
13 Initialize M2 group
Initialize Operation
14
Group
150
5.22 Parameter Lock

Use parameter view lock to hide parameters after registering and entering a user
password.
Setting
Range
94 Password registration - 0–9999 -
dr
95 Parameter lock settings - 0–9999 -
Parameter Lock Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Register a password to prohibit parameter modifications. Follow the
procedures below to register a password.
Step Procedures
Press the [ENT] key on dr-94 code and the saved password
1 input window will be displayed. If password registration is
being made for the first time, enter 0. It is the factory default.
dr-94
2 If a saved password has been set, enter the saved password.
If the entered password matches the saved password, then a
new window to enter a new password will be displayed. (The
3
process will not move to next stage until the user enters a
valid password).
4 Register a new password.
5 After registration, Code dr-94 will be displayed.
Press the [ENT] key when the change prevention feature is disabled,
and UL (Unlocked) is displayed. Press the [ENT] key again a field to
input password is shown. Enter the password and the Locked display
dr-95 is shown. Even if you press [ENT] key from the function code to
change the changing the parameter, this will not be changed to edit
mode. Enter password again to display UL (Unlocked). The change
prevention feature is disabled.
If parameter view lock and parameter lock functions are enabled, no inverter operation
related function changes can be made. It is very important that you memorize the
password.
151
5.23 Changed Parameter Display

This feature displays all the parameters that are different from the factory defaults.
Use this feature to track changed parameters.
Grou Setting
Code Name Setting Unit
p Range
Changed parameter
dr 89 0 View All - -
display
Changed Parameter Display Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
dr-89
0 View All Display all parameters
Changed Para
1 View Changed Display changed parameters only
5.24 Timer Settings

Set a multi-function input terminal to a timer and On/Off control the multi-function
output and relay according to the timer settings.
Setting
Range
Px terminal setting
In 65–69 38 Timer In 0–52 -
options
31
item
28 Timer Out - -
OU 33
item
55 Timer On delay 3.00 0.00–100 sec
56 Timer Off delay 1.00 0.00–100 sec
Timer Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
In.65–69 Px Choose one of the multi-function input terminals and change it to a
Define timer terminal by setting it to 38 (Timer In).
152
Code and
Description
Features
OU.31 Relay1, Set multi-function output terminal or relay to be used as a timer to 28
OU.33 Relay 2 (Timer out).
OU.55 Input a signal (On) to the timer terminal to operate a timer output (Timer
TimerOn Delay, out) after the time set at OU.55 has passed. When the multi-function
OU.56 input terminal is off, multi-function output or relay turns off after the time
TimerOff Delay set at OU.56.
5.25 Brake Control

This feature controls the On/Off operation of the load’s electronic braking system.
Setting
Range
dr 09 Control mode 0 V/F - -
41 Brake release current 50.0 0.0–180% %
42 Brake release delay time 1.00 0.0–10.0 sec
Brake release Forward 0–Max
44 1.00 Hz
frequency Frequency
Ad Brake release Reverse 0–Max
45 1.00 Hz
frequency Frequency
46 Brake engage delay time 1.00 0.00–10.00 sec
0–Max
47 Brake engage frequency 2.00 Hz
Frequency
31 Multi-function relay 1 item BR
OU 35 - -
33 Multi-function relay 2 item Control:
When brake control is activated, DC braking (Ad.12) at inverter start and dwell
operation (Ad.20–23) do not operate.
• Brake release sequence: During motor stop state, if an operation command is

entered, the inverter accelerates up to brake release frequency (Ad.44– 45) in
forward or in reverse direction. After reaching brake release frequency, if motor
current reaches brake release current (BR Rls Curr), the output relay or multi-
function output terminal for brake control sends a release signal. Once the signal
has been sent, acceleration will begin after maintaining frequency for brake release
delay time (BR Rls Dly).
153
• Brake engage sequence: If a stop command is sent during operation, the motor
decelerates. Once the output frequency reaches brake engage frequency (BR Eng
Fr), the motor stops deceleration and sends out a brake engage signal to a preset
output terminal. Frequency is maintained for the brake engage delay time (BR Eng
Dly) and will become 0 afterwards. If DC braking time (Ad.15) and DC braking
resistance (Ad.16) are set, inverter output is blocked after DC braking. For DC
braking, refer to 4.15.2 DC Braking After Stop on page 90.
5.26 Multi-Function Relay On/Off Control

Set reference values (on/off level) for analog input and control output relay or multi-
function output terminal on/off status accordingly.

Output terminal on/off
66 1 V1 - -
control mode
Output contact On Output contact off level–
Ad 67 90.00 %
level 100.00%
Output contact Off 0.00–Output terminal on
68 10.00 %
level level
31
item
OU 34 On/Off - -
33
item
154
Multi-function Relay On/Off Control Setting Details

Ad.66 On/Off Ctrl Src Select analog input On/Off control.
Ad.67 On-C Level,
Set On/Off level at the output terminal.
Ad.68 Off-C Level
5.27 Press Regeneration Prevention

Press regeneration prevention is used during press operations to prevent braking
during the regeneration process. If motor regeneration occurs during a press
operation, motor operation speed automatically goes up to avoid the regeneration
zone.
Gro Cod
Name Setting Setting Range Unit
up e
Selection of regeneration evasion
74 0 No 0–1 -
function for press
Voltage level of regeneration 350 V 200 V 300–400 V
75 V
evasion motion for press 700 V 400 V 600–800 V
Compensation frequency limit of 1.00
Ad 76 0.00–10.00 Hz Hz
regeneration evasion for press (Hz)
Regeneration evasion for press P
77 50.0 (%) 0–100% %
gain
Regeneration evasion for press I 500
78 20–30000 ms ms
gain (ms)
Press Regeneration Prevention Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Frequent regeneration voltage from a press load during constant
speed motor operation may force excessive work on the brake unit
Ad.74 RegenAvd
which may damage or shorten the brake life. To prevent this
Sel
situation, select Ad.74 (RegenAvd Sel) to control DC link voltage
and disable the brake unit operation.
155
Code and
Description
Features
Ad.75 RegenAvd Set brake operation prevention level voltage when the DC link
Level voltage goes up due to regeneration.
Ad.76 CompFreq Set alternative frequency width that can replace actual operation
Limit frequency during regeneration prevention.
Ad.77 RegenAvd
To prevent regeneration zone, set P gain/I gain in the DC link
Pgain, Ad.78
voltage suppress PI controller.
RegenAvd Igain
Note
Press regeneration prevention does not operate during accelerations or decelerations, but
it only operates during constant speed motor operation. When regeneration prevention is
activated, output frequency may change within the range set at Ad.76 (CompFreq Limit).
156
5.28 Analog Output

An analog output terminal provides output of 0–10 V voltage and 4–20 mA current.
5.28.1 Current Analog Output

An output size can be adjusted by selecting an output option at AO (Analog Output)
terminal.

01 Analog output 1 item 0 Frequency 0–15 -
02 Analog output 1 gain 100.0 -1000.0–1000.0 %
03 Analog output 1 bias 0.0 -100.0–100.0 %
04 Analog output 1 filter 5 0–10000 ms
OU
Analog constant
05 0.0 0.0–100.0 %
output1
Analog output1
06 0.0 0.0–1000.0 %
monitor
Voltage and Current Analog Output Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Select a constant value for output.
Outputs operation frequency as a standard. 10 V
0 Frequency output is made from the frequency set at dr.20
(Max Freq).
Output 10 V output is made from 200% of inverter rated
1
Current current (heavy load).
Sets the outputs based on the inverter output
voltage. 10 V output is made from a set voltage in
OU.01 AO1 Mode bA.15
Output
2 (Rated V).
Voltage
If 0 V is set in bA.15, 200 V/240 V/400 V models
output 10 V based on the actual input voltage (480
V).
Outputs inverter DC link voltage as a standard.
DC Link
3 Outputs 10 V when the DC link voltage is 410 Vdc
Volt
for 200 V models, and 820 Vdc for 400 V models.
Outputs the generated torque as a standard.
4 Torque
Outputs 10 V at 250% of motor rated torque.
5 Output Monitors output wattage. 200% of rated output is
157
Code and
Description
Features
Power the maximum display voltage (10 V).
Outputs the maximum voltage at 200% of no load
current. Outputs 0 V during V/F operation or slip
6 Idse compensation operation since it is an output of the
magnitude of the current on the magnetic flux
portion.
Outputs the maximum voltage at 250% of rated
7 Iqse torque current.
Target Outputs set frequency as a standard. Outputs 10 V

8
Freq at the maximum frequency (dr.20).
Outputs frequency calculated with Acc/Dec function
Ramp
9 as a standard. May vary with actual output
Freq
frequency. Outputs 10 V.
PID Ref Outputs command value of a PID controller as a
12
Value standard. Outputs approximately 6.6 V at 100%.
PID Fdk Outputs feedback volume of a PID controller as a
13
Value standard. Outputs approximately 6.6 V at 100%.
PID Outputs output value of a PID controller as a
14
Output standard. Outputs approximately 10 V at 100%.
15 Constant Outputs OU.05 (AO1 Const%) value as a standard.
Adjusts output value and offset. If frequency is selected as an output

item, it will operate as shown below.
𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦
𝐴𝑂1 = × 𝐴𝑂1 𝐺𝑎𝑖𝑛 + 𝐴𝑂1 𝐵𝑖𝑎𝑠
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞
OU.02 AO1 Gain, The graph below illustrates the analog voltage output (AO1) changes
OU.03 AO1 Bias depend on OU.02 (AO1 Gain) and OU.3 (AO1 Bias) values. Y-axis is
analog output voltage (0–10 V), and X-axis is % value of the output
item.
Example, if the maximum frequency set at dr.20 (Max Freq) is 60 Hz

and the present output frequency is 30 Hz, then the x-axis value on
the next graph is 50%.
158
Code and
Description
Features
OU.04 AO1 Filter Set filter time constant on analog output.

If analog output at OU.01 (AO1 Mode) is set to 15 (Constant), the
OU.05 A01
analog voltage output is dependent on the set parameter values (0–
Const%
100%).
OU.06 AO1 Monitors analog output value. Displays the maximum output voltage
Monitor as a percentage (%) with 10 V as the standard.
5.29 Digital Output
5.29.1 Multi-Function Relay Settings

30 Fault output item 010* - bit
31 29 Trip - -
item
33 14 Run - -
item
OU
Multi-function output
41 - 00– 11 bit
monitor
57 Detection frequency 30.00
0.00–Max
Detection frequency Hz
58 10.00 Frequency
band
65– Px terminal setting
In 16 Exchange - -
69 options
* Displayed as on the keypad.
159
Multi-Function Relay Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
OU.31 Relay1 Set the Relay 1 output item.
OU.33 Relay 2 Set the Relay 2 output item.
Set output terminal and relay functions according to OU.57 (FDT
Frequency), OU.58 (FDT Band) settings and fault trip conditions.
0 None No output signal.
Detects inverter output frequency reaching the
user set frequency. Outputs signal when the
conditions below are satisfied.
Absolute value(set frequency–output

frequency) < detected frequency width/2
When detected frequency width is 10 Hz, FDT-

1 FDT-1 1 output is as shown in the graph below.
OU.41 DO
Status
Outputs a signal when the user set frequency

and detected frequency (FDT Frequency) are
equal, and fulfills FDT-1 condition at the same
time.
[Absolute value (set frequency-detected

2 FDT-2
frequency) < detected frequency
width/2]&[FDT-1]
Detected frequency width is 10 Hz. When the

detected frequency is set to 30 Hz, FDT-2
output is as shown in the graph below.
160
Code and
Description
Features
Outputs signal when the operation frequency

below meets the conditions.
Absolute value(output frequency–operation

frequency) < detected frequency width/2
Detected frequency width is 10 Hz. When the

3 FDT-3
Output signal can be separately set for

acceleration and deceleration conditions.
• In acceleration: Operation frequency ≧

Detected frequency
• In deceleration: Operation frequency >
(Detected frequency–Detected frequency
width/2)
4 FDT-4 Detected frequency width is 10 Hz. When the

Over Load
5 Outputs a signal at motor overload.
(Overload)
161
Code and
Description
Features
Outputs a signal when a fault is triggered from
Inverter
6 a protective function operation by inverter
overload (IOL)
overload inverse proportion.
Under Load
7 Outputs a signal at load fault warning.
(Underload)
Fan Warning
8 Outputs a signal at fan fault warning.
(Fan Warning)
Stall Outputs a signal when a motor is overloaded
9
(motor stall) and stalled.
Outputs a signal when the inverter DC link
Over Voltage
10 voltage rises above the protective operation
(Over Voltage)
voltage.
Outputs a signal when the inverter DC link
Low Voltage
11 voltage drops below the low voltage protective
(Low Voltage)
level.
Over Heat
12 Outputs signal when the inverter overheats.
(Over Heat)
Outputs a signal when there is a loss of analog
input terminal and RS-485 communication
Lost
command at the terminal block. Outputs a
Command
13 signal when communication power and
(Lost
expansion an I/O power card is installed, and
Command)
also outputs a signal when losing analog input
and communication power commands.
Outputs a signal when operation command is
entered and the inverter outputs voltage. No
signal output during DC braking.
14 RUN
Outputs a signal at operation command off,

15 Stop
and when there is no inverter output voltage.
Steady
16 Outputs a signal in steady operation.
(Steady)
Inverter Line Outputs a signal while the motor is driven by
17
(Inverter Line) the inverter line.
Outputs a signal if a multi-function input
Comm Line terminal (exchange) is input. For details, refer
18
(Comm Line) to 5.17 Commercial Power Source
Transition on page 146.
162
Code and
Description
Features
Outputs a signal during inverter speed search
Speed Search
operation.
19 (Speed
For details, refer to 5.13 Speed Search
Search)
Operation on page 137.
Outputs signal if the motor is operating under
regeneration mode.
Regeneration Braking resistance is activated when the
21
(Regeneration) inverter DC voltage is higher than the voltage
set in Ad-79 and this feature operates only
when the inverter is operating.
Outputs signal when the inverter is in stand by
Ready
22 operation and ready to receive an external
(Ready)
operation command.
Outputs signal that is lower than the frequency
23 FDT-5 (Zspd)
set in OU-57 and OU-58.
This is a feature to activate the contact output
after a certain period of time using the multi-
28 Timer Out
function terminal block. For details, refer to
5.24 Timer Settings on page 152.
Outputs a signal after a fault trip.
29 Trip Refer to 5.26 Multi-Function Relay On/Off
Control on page 154 for more details.
Refer to 6.2.5 Dynamic Braking (DB)
31 DB Warn%ED
Resistor Configuration on page 179.
Outputs a signal using an analog input value
as a standard.
34 On/Off Control
Refer to 5.26 Multi-Function Relay On/Off
Control on page 154 for more details.
Outputs a brake release signal.
35 BR Control Refer to 5.25 Brake Control on page 153 for
more details.
This outputs when the energy buffering
operation is started because of low voltage of
the inverter's DC power section due to a power
40 KEB Operating failure on the input power. (This outputs in the
energy buffering state before the input power
restoration regardless of KEB-1 and KEB-2
mode settings.)
Outputs signal when inverter is under warning
42 Minor Fault
status.
163
5.29.2 Trip Output to Multi-Function Relay

Using multi-function relays 1 and 2, you can output the trip status of inverter.

30 Fault output item 010 - bit
31 29 Trip - -
item
OU Multi-function relay 2
33 14 Run - -
item
53 Fault output On delay 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec
54 Fault output Off delay 0.00 0.00–100.00 Sec
Trip Setting Details to Multi-Function Relay
Code and
Description
Features
Fault trip relay operates based on the fault trip output settings.
Items Bit On Status Bit Off Status
Keypad
After selecting the multi-function relay to use as the trip output,

select 29 (Trip Mode) in OU.31, 33. If the trip occurs from the
inverter, the applicable multi-function relay will be activated.
OU.30 Trip Out Activation status of multi-function relay can be set up as below
Mode depending on the trip type.
Configuration
Function
bit3 bit2 bit1
Operates when low voltage fault trips
✓
occur
Operates when fault trips other than low
✓
voltage occur
Operates when auto restart fails (Pr. 08–
✓
09)
OU.31 Relay1 Set the Relay 1 output item.
OU.33 Relay 2 Set the Relay 2 output item.
If a trip occurs, multi-function relay 1 or multi-function relay 2 will be
OU.53 TripOut On
activated after the time set in multi-function. Terminal is off with the
Dly, OU.54 TripOut
input initialized after the time delay set in OU.54.
OffDly
164
5.29.3 Multi-Function Relay Terminal Delay Time Settings

Set On delay time and Off delay time specifically to adjust the multi-function relay
operation time of the terminal. The delay time set in OU.50–51 will be applied to both
Relay 1 and Relay 2 except for when the multi-function relay feature is under trip
mode.
Setting
Range
Multi-function output On 0.00–
50 0.00 sec
delay 100.00
Multi-function output Off 0.00–
OU 51 0.00 sec
delay 100.00
Multi-function output
52 00* 00–11 bit
contact selection
Output Terminal Delay Time Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Select the contact type of relay 1 and relay 2. By setting the relevant
bit to 0, it will operate A terminal (Normally Open), and setting it to 1
will operate B terminal (Normally Closed). Shown below in the table
are Relay 1 and Relay 2 settings starting from the right bit.
OU.52 DO NC/NO
Sel Items Bit On Status Bit Off Status
Keypad
165
5.30 Base Block

This feature is used when output is blocked while operating the inverter or when the
multi-function relay must maintain the operating status by blocking output while
stopping. If the multi-function signal set as base block is entered during operation, the
motor will run freely. If the base block signal is disabled, speed search operation will
start with the value set in Cn-72–75 even if the Cn-71 speed search operation
selection parameter is not activated. The output being blocked by the base block
feature does not have effect on the multi-function relay and will be recognized as
being in operation even if there is no inverter output.

65–
In Px terminal setting options 33 Base Block 1–52 -
69
31 Multi-function relay 1 item 1–44 -
OU 14 Run
33 Multi-function relay 2 item - -
Base Block Operation Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Select the multi-function input terminal to receive the base block
In 65–69 Px define
signal and set the applicable terminal to 33 (Base Block).
Set the multi-function relay terminal to 14 (Run).
If the operation command is given, the inverter will accelerate up to
the command frequency. If the base block signal is entered during
acceleration or constant speed operation, the inverter will block the
OU31 Relay 1 output immediately and start free-run. If the base block signal is
OU33 Relay 2 disabled, the inverter will accelerate as a speed search operation until
Define it reaches the command frequency, without receiving a specific reset
command.
"bb" will be displayed on the keypad during the base block operation.
Disabling the base block will reset the inverter automatically and the
base block will not be recorded in the trip history.
166
Learning Protection Features
6 Learning Protection Features

Protection features provided by the Nx2000+ series inverter are categorized into two
types: protection from overheating damage to the motor, and protection against the
inverter malfunction.
6.1 Motor Protection
6.1.1 Electronic Thermal Motor Overheating Prevention (ETH)

ETH is a protective function that uses the output current of the inverter without a
separate temperature sensor, to predict a rise in motor temperature to protect the
motor based on its heat characteristics.
Setting
Range
Electronic thermal
40 prevention fault trip 0 None 0–2 -
selection
41 Motor cooling fan type 0 Self-cool - -
Pr
Electronic thermal 1
42 150 120–200 %
minute rating
Electronic thermal
43 120 50–150 %
continuous rating
Electronic Thermal (ETH) Prevention Function Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
ETH can be selected to provide motor thermal protection.
0 None The ETH function is not activated.
Pr.40 ETH Trip Sel
The inverter output is blocked. The motor
1 Free-Run
coasts to a halt (free-run).
2 Dec The inverter decelerates the motor to a stop.
167
Code and
Description
Features
Select the drive mode of the cooling fan, attached to the motor.
As the cooling fan is connected to the motor
axis, the cooling effect varies, based on motor
0 Self-cool
speed. Most universal induction motors have
this design.
Additional power is supplied to operate the
Forced- cooling fan. This provides extended operation
1
cool at low speeds. Motors designed for inverters
typically have this design.
Pr.41 Motor
Cooling
The amount of input current that can be continuously supplied to the

Pr.42 ETH 1min
motor for 1 minute, based on the motor-rated current (bA.13).
Sets the amount of current with the ETH function activated. The
range below details the set values that can be used during
continuous operation without the protection function.
Pr.43 ETH Cont
168
6.1.2 Overload Early Warning and Trip

A warning or fault ‘trip’ (cutoff) occurs when the motor reaches an overload state,
based on the motor’s rated current. The amount of current for warnings and trips can
be set separately.
Setting
Range
04 Load level setting 1 Heavy Duty - -
Overload warning
17 1 Yes 0–1 -
selection
18 Overload warning level 150 30–180 %
Pr
19 Overload warning time 10.0 0–30 sec
20 Motion at overload fault 1 Free-Run - -
21 Overload fault level 180 30–200 %
22 Overload fault time 60.0 0–60.0 sec
31
item
OU 5 Over Load - -
33
item
Overload Early Warning and Trip Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Select the load level.
Used in underloads, like fans and pumps
Normal
Pr.04 Load Duty 0 (overload tolerance: 120% of rated underload
Duty
current for 1 minute).
Used in heavy loads, like hoists, cranes, and
Heavy
1 parking devices (overload tolerance: 150% of
Duty
rated heavy load current for 1 minute).
If the overload reaches the warning level, the terminal block multi-
Pr.17 OL Warn function output terminal and relay are used to output a warning
Select signal. If 1 (Yes) is selected, it will operate. If 0 (No) is selected, it
will not operate.
When the input current to the motor is greater than the overload
warning level (OL Warn Level) and continues at that level during the
Pr.18 OL Warn
overload warning time (OL Warn Time), the multi-function output
Level,
(Relay 1, Relay 2) sends a warning signal. Multi-function relay
Pr.19 OL Warn
terminal and relay outputs signal if OU.31 and OU.33 codes are set
Time
to 5 (Over load). The signal output does not block the inverter
output.
169
Code and
Description
Features
Select the inverter protective action in the event of an overload fault
trip.
Pr.20 OL Trip 0 None No protective action is taken.
Select In the event of an overload fault, inverter output
1 Free-Run is blocked and the motor will free-run due to
inertia.
If a fault trip occurs, the motor decelerates and
3 Dec
stops.
When the current supplied to the motor is greater than the preset
Pr.21 OL Trip value at the overload trip level (OL Trip Level) and continues to be
Level, supplied during the overload trip time (OL Trip Time), the inverter
Pr.22 OL Trip Time output is either blocked according to the preset mode from Pr. 17 or
slows to a stop after deceleration.
Note
Overload warnings warn of an overload before an overload fault trip occurs. The overload
warning signal may not work in an overload fault trip situation, if the overload warn level
(OL Warn Level) and the overload warn time (OL Warn Time) are set higher than the
overload trip level (OL Trip Level) and overload trip time (OL Trip Time).
170
6.1.3 Stall Prevention and Flux Braking

The stall prevention function is a protective function that prevents motor stall caused
by overloads. If a motor stall occurs due to an overload, the inverter operation
frequency is adjusted automatically. When stall is caused by overload, high currents
are induced in the motor may cause motor overheat or damage the motor and
interrupt operation of the motor-driven devices.
Flux braking is used to gain the optimum deceleration time without the braking
resistance. If the deceleration time is too short, over voltage trip may occur due to the
regeneration energy from the motor. When using flux braking, ideal deceleration time
may be gained without over voltage trip because regenerative energy is expended at
the motor. Flux braking stops operating when the control mode is IM Sensorless.
Stall prevention motion and flux
50 0000* - bit
braking
Start frequency–
51 Stall frequency 1 60.00 Hz
Stall Freq 1
52 Stall level 1 180 30–250 %
Stall Freq 1–Stall Freq
3
Pr 54 Stall level 2 180 30–250 %
Stall Freq 2–Stall Freq
4
56 Stall level 3 180 30–250 %
Stall Freq 3–Maximum
frequency
58 Stall level 4 180 30–250 %
31 Multi-function relay 1 item
OU 9 Stall - -
33 Multi-function relay 2 item
* Displayed as on the Keypad.
171
Stall Prevention Function and Flux Braking Setting Details

Code and
Description
Features
Stall prevention can be configured for acceleration, deceleration, or
while operating a motor at constant speed. When the top LCD
segment is on, the corresponding bit is set. When the bottom LCD
segment is on, the corresponding bit is off.
Keypad
Configuration
Function
bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1
Stall protection during
✓
acceleration
Stall protection while operating
✓
at a constant speed
Stall protection during
✓
deceleration
Flux braking during
✓
deceleration
Pr.50 Stall Configuration Function

Prevent If inverter output current exceeds the
preset stall level (Pr. 52, 54, 56, 58) during
acceleration, the motor stops accelerating
Stall and starts decelerating. If current level
protectiondur stays above the stall level, the motor
0001
ing decelerates to the start frequency (dr.19). If
acceleration the current level causes deceleration below
the preset level while operating the stall
protection function, the motor resumes
acceleration.
Similar to stall protection function during
acceleration, the output frequency
Stall
automatically decelerates when the current
protection
level exceeds the preset stall level while
while
0010 operating at constant speed. When the
operating at
load current decelerates below the preset
constant
level, it resumes acceleration. During
speed
acceleration, the operation will follow the
stall protection settings for acceleration.
Stall The inverter decelerates and keeps the DC
0100 protection link voltage below a certain level to prevent
during an over voltage fault trip during
172
Code and
Description
Features
deceleration deceleration. As a result, deceleration
times can be longer than the set time
depending on the load.
Flux braking When using flux braking, deceleration time
1000 during may be reduced because regenerative
deceleration energy is expended at the motor.
Stall
protection Stall protection and flux braking operate
and flux together during deceleration to achieve the
1100
braking shortest and most stable deceleration
during performance.
deceleration
173
Code and
Description
Features
Additional stall protection levels can be configured for different
frequencies, based on the load type. As shown in the graph below, the
stall level can be set above the base frequency. The lower and upper
limits are set using numbers that correspond in ascending order. For
example, the range for Stall Frequency 2 (Stall Freq 2) becomes the
lower limit for Stall Frequency 1 (Stall Freq 1) and the upper limit for
Stall Frequency 3 (Stall Freq 3).
Pr.51 Stall Freq

1–
Pr.58 Stall Leve
l4
Note
Stall protection and flux braking operate together only during deceleration. Turn on the
third and fourth bits of Pr.50 (Stall Prevention) to achieve the shortest and most stable
deceleration performance without triggering an overvoltage fault trip for loads with high
inertia and short deceleration times. Do not use this function when frequent deceleration
of the load is required, as the motor can overheat and may be damaged easily.
When operating Brake resistor, the motor may vibrate under the Flux braking operation. In
this case, please turn off the Flux braking (Pr.50).
• Use caution when decelerating while using stall protection as depending on the load,
the deceleration time can take longer than the time set. Acceleration stops when stall
protection operates during acceleration.
• When the motor is operating, Stall Level 1 applies and determines the operation of stall
protection.
174
6.2 Inverter and Sequence Protection
6.2.1 Input/output Open-phase Protection

Open-phase protection is used to prevent overcurrent levels induced at the inverter
inputs due to an open-phase within the input power supply. Open-phase output
protection is also available. An open-phase at the connection between the motor and
the inverter output may cause the motor to stall, due to a lack of torque.

Input/output open-
05 00* - bit
phase protection
Pr
Input voltage range
06 15 1–100 V V
during open-phase
Input and Output Open-phase Protection Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Input and output phase protection can each be selected. When the dot
is displayed above the switch, the corresponding bit is set to on. When
it is below the switch, it is set to on.
Keypad
Pr.05 Phase Loss Configuration

Chk, Function
bit2 bit1
Pr.06 IPO V Band ✓ Output open-phase protection
✓ Input open-phase protection
Initial values by each product on input voltage range during open-

phase are shown as below.
Items Initial Value Unit
0.4 kW–2.2 kW (200 V/400 V) 15 V
4.0 kW–7.5 kW (200 V/400 V) 13 V
175
6.2.2 External Trip Signal

Set one of the multi-function input terminals to 4 (External Trip) to allow the inverter to
stop operation by using external signals.
Setting
Range
Px terminal setting
65–69 4 External Trip - -
options
In
87 - bit
terminal selection
External Trip Signal Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Selects the type of input contact. If the mark of the switch is at the
bottom (0), it operates as an A contact (Normally Open). If the mark is
at the top (1), it operates as a B contact (Normally Closed). The
In.87 DI NC/NO
corresponding terminals for each bit are as follows:
Sel
Bit 5 4 3 2 1
Terminals P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
176
6.2.3 Inverter Overload Protection

When the inverter input current exceeds the rated current, a protective function is
activated to prevent damages to the inverter based on inverse proportional
characteristics.
Setting
Range
31
item
OU 6 IOL - -
33
item
Note
A warning signal output can be provided in advance by the multi-function output terminal
before the inverter overload protection function (IOLT) operates. When the overcurrent
time reaches 60 of the allowed overcurrent (150%, 1 min), a warning signal output is
provided (signal output at 150%, 36 sec).
6.2.4 Speed Command Loss

When setting operation speed using an analog input at the terminal block,
communication options, or the keypad, speed command loss setting can be used to
select the inverter operation for situations when the speed command is lost due to the
disconnection of signal cables.
Setting
Range
Motion at speed command
12 1 Free-Run - -
loss
Time to determine speed
13 1.0 0.1–120 sec
command loss
Start
Pr
Operation frequency at speed frequency–
14 0.00 Hz
command loss Max.
frequency
Analog input loss decision
15 0 Half of x1 -
level
31 Multi-function relay 1 item Lost
OU 13 - -
33 Multi-function relay 2 item Command
177
Speed Command Loss Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
In situations when speed commands are lost, the inverter can be
configured to operate in a specific mode.
The speed command immediately becomes
0 None the operation frequency without any protection
function.
The inverter blocks output. The motor
1 Free-Run
performs in free-run condition.
The motor decelerates and then stops at the
Pr.12 Lost Cmd 2 Dec
time set at Pr.07 (Trip Dec Time).
Mode
The inverter calculates the average input
value for 10 seconds before the loss of the
3 Hold Input
speed command and uses it as the speed
reference.
The inverter calculates the average output
Hold value for 10 seconds before the loss of the
4
Output speed command and uses it as the speed
reference.
Lost The inverter operates at the frequency set at
5
Preset Pr. 14 (Lost Preset F).
Configure the voltage and decision time for speed command loss
when using analog input.
Based on the values set at In.08 and In.12,
protective operation starts when the input signal
is reduced to half of the initial value of the analog
input set using the speed command (Frq code of
Operation group) and it continues for the time
Half of (speed loss decision time) set at Pr. 13 (Lost
0
Pr.15 AI Lost Level, x1 Cmd Time). For example, set the speed
Pr.13 Lst Cmd Time command to 2 (V1) at the Frq code in the
Operation group, and In.06 (V1 Polarity) to 0
(Unipolar). When the voltage input drops to less
than half of the value set at In.08 (V1 Volt x 1),
the protective function is activated.
The protective operation starts when the signal
becomes smaller than the initial value of the
Below of analog input set by the speed command and it
1 continues for the speed loss decision time set at
x1
Pr.13 (Lost Cmd Time). Codes In.08 and In.12
are used to set the standard values.
178
Code and
Description
Features
In situations where speed commands are lost, set the operation
mode (Pr.12 Lost Cmd Mode) to 5 (Lost Preset). This operates the
Pr.14 Lost Preset F
protection function and sets the frequency so that the operation can
continue.
Set Pr.15 (Al Lost Level) to 1 (Below x 1), Pr.12 (Lost Cmd Mode) to 2 (Dec), and
Pr.13 (Lost Cmd Time) to 5 sec. Then it operates as follows:
Note
If speed command is lost while using communication options or the integrated RS-485
communication, the protection function operates after the command loss decision time set
at Pr.13 (Lost Cmd Time) is passed.
6.2.5 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration

For Nx2000+ series, the braking resistor circuit is integrated inside the inverter.

DB resistor warning
Pr 66 10 0–30 %
level
Multi-function relay
31
1 item
OU 31 DB Warn%ED - -
33
2 item
179
Dynamic Breaking Resistor Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Set the mount of braking resistor (%ED: Duty cycle) for use. Braking
resistor configuration sets the rate at which the braking resistor
operates for one operation cycle. The maximum time for continuous
braking is 15 sec and the braking resistor signal is not output from the
inverter after the 15 sec period has expired. The time until braking
resistance is available again after continuous use of braking resistance
for 15 seconds is calculated as below.
If the braking resistor usage rate is set to 0%, braking resistance can be
used without usage rate restriction. However, precaution is necessary
since there is risk of fire if the braking resistance usage is higher than
the power consumption of braking resistance.
An example of braking resistor set up is as follows:
Pr.66 DB
Warn%ED
[Example 1]
180
Code and
Description
Features
[Example 2]
• T_acc: Acceleration time to set frequency

• T_steady: Constant speed operation time at set frequency
• T_dec: Deceleration time to a frequency lower than constant speed
operation or the stop time from constant speed operation frequency
• T_stop: Stop time until operation resumes
Do not set the braking resistor to exceed the resistor’s power rating. If overloaded, it can
overheat and cause a fire. When using a resistor with a heat sensor, the sensor output
can be used as an external trip signal for the inverter’s multi-function input.
Under load Fault Trip and Warning

Load level
04 0 Normal Duty - -
setting
Under load
25 warning 1 Yes 0–1 -
selection
Under load
26 10.0 0–600 sec
warning time
Pr Under load fault
27 1 Free-Run - -
selection
Under load fault
28 30.0 0–600 sec
time
Under load lower
29 30 10–100 %
limit level
Under load
30 30 10–100 %
upper limit level
Under Load Trip and Warning Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Sets the occurrence of the under load trip. If set to 0 (None), the
underload fault trip is not detected. If set to 1 (Free-Run), the output is
Pr.27 UL Trip Sel
blocked in an underload fault trip situation. If set to 2 (Dec), the motor
decelerates and stops when an underload trip occurs.
Pr.25 UL Warn Sets the underload warning options. Set to 1 (Yes) and set the
181
Code and
Description
Features
Sel multi-function output terminals (at OU-31 and 33) to 7
(UnderLoad). The warning signals are output when an underload
condition arises.
Pr.26 UL Warn The protection function operates when the underload level condition
Time, explained above is maintained for a set warning time or fault trip time.
Pr.28 UL Trip This function does not operate if energy-saving operation is activated
Time at Ad-50 (E-Save Mode).
• Setting Heavy Duty

- Do not support Pr.29.
- At Pr.30, the underload level is decided based on the motor’s
rated current.
• Setting Normal Duty

Pr.29 UL LF - At Pr.29, the under load rate is decided based on twice the
Level, Pr.30 UL operation frequency of the motor’s rated slip speed (bA.12 Rated
BF Level Slip).
- At Pr.30, the under load rate is decided based on the base
frequency set at dr.18 (Base Freq). An upper limit and lower limit
is based on the inverter’s rated current.
182
6.2.6 Fan Fault Detection

Setting
Range
Pr 79 Cooling fan fault selection 0 Trip -
OU 31 Multi-function relay 1 item FAN
8 - -
OU 33 Multi-function relay 2 item Warning
Fan Fault Detection Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Set the cooling fan fault mode.
The inverter output is blocked and the fan trip
Pr.79 FAN 0 Trip is displayed when a cooling fan error is
Trip Mode detected.
When OU.33 (Relay 2) and OU.31 (Relay 1)
1 Warning are set to 8 (FAN Warning), the fan error signal
is output and the operation continues.
When the code value is set to 8 (FAN Warning), the fan error signal
OU.31 Relay 1, is output and operation continues. However, when the inverter inside
OU.33 Relay 2 temperature rises above a certain level, output is blocked due to
activation of overheat protection.
6.2.7 Lifetime Diagnosis of Components

Lifetime Diagnosis for Fans
Enter the Pr-87 (Fan exchange warning level) code (%). After the selected usage (%)
is reached (out of 50,000 hours), the fan exchange warning message will appear in
the multi-functional output or keypad.
The total fan usage level (%) appears at Pr-86. When exchanging fans, you may
initialize the accumulated value to 0 by setting the Pr-88 (Initializing accumulated time
for cooling fans) to 1.

Accumulated percent of
86 0.0 0.0–6553.5 %
fan usage
Pr
Fan exchange warning
87 90.0 0.0–100.0 %
Level
183
31
item
FAN
OU 37 - -
Exchange
33
item
6.2.8 Low Voltage Fault Trip

When inverter input power is lost and the internal DC link voltage drops below a
certain voltage level, the inverter stops output and a low voltage trip occurs.

Low voltage trip
Pr 81 0.0 0–60 sec
decision delay time
31
1 item
OU 11 Low Voltage - -
33
2 item
Low Voltage Fault Trip Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
If the code value is set to 11 (Low Voltage), the inverter output is
blocked first when the low voltage trip occurs and the trip is handled
after a set time.
Pr.81 LVT Delay
You can generate a warning signal on the low voltage trip using the
multi-function relay. The LVT Delay time is not applied on the warning
signal.
6.2.9 Output Block by Multi-Function Terminal

When the multi-function input terminal is set as the output block signal terminal and
the signal is input to the terminal, then the operation stops.

Px terminal setting
In 65–69 5 BX - -
options
184
Output Block by Multi-Function Terminal Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
When the operation of the multi-function input terminal is set to 5 (BX)
and is turned on during operation, the inverter blocks the output and
‘BX’ is displayed on the keypad display.
In.65–69 Px
While ‘BX’ is displayed on the keypad screen, the inverter’s operation
Define
information including the operation frequency and current at the time of
BX signal can be monitored. The inverter resumes operation when the
BX terminal turns off and operation command is input.
6.2.10 Trip Status Reset

Restart the inverter using the keypad or analog input terminal, to reset the trip status.

Px terminal setting
In 65–69 3 RST - -
options
Trip Status Reset Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Press [Stop/Reset] key on the keypad or use the multi-function input
In.65–69 Px
terminal to restart the inverter. Set the multi-function input terminal to 3
Define
(RST) and turn on the terminal to reset the trip status.
6.2.11 Inverter Diagnosis State

Check the diagnosis of components or devices for inverter to check if they need to be
replaced.

FAN Bit 00–01
89 replacement 00 - Bit
warning 01 FAN Warning
185
6.2.12 Operation Mode on Option Card Trip

Option card trips may occur when an option card is used with the inverter. Set the
operation mode for the inverter when a communication error occurs between the
option card and the inverter body, or when the option card is detached during
operation.

0 None
Motion selection at
Pr 80 1 Free-Run 0–3 -
option trip
2 Dec
Operation Mode on Option Trip Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
0 None No operation.
Pr.80 Opt Trip The inverter output is blocked and fault trip
Mode 1 Free-Run
information is shown on the keypad.
The motor decelerates to the value set at Pr.07
2 Dec
(Trip Dec Time).
186
6.2.13 No Motor Trip

If an operation command is run when the motor is disconnected from the inverter
output terminal, a ‘no motor trip’ occurs and a protective operation is performed by the
system.
Setting
Range
No motor motion at 0 None 0–1 -
31
detection 1 Free-run - -
Pr No motor detection
32 5 1–100 %
current level
33 No motor detection time 3.0 0.1–10 sec
No Motor Trip Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Pr.32 No Motor If the output current value [based on the rated current (bA.13)] is
Level, lower than the value set at Pr.32 (No Motor Level), and if this
Pr.33 No Motor continues for the time set at Pr.33 (No Motor Time), a ‘no motor trip’
Time occurs.
If bA.07 (V/F Pattern) is set to 1 (Square), set Pr.32 (No Motor Level) to a value lower
than the factory default. Otherwise, ‘no motor trip’ due to a lack of output current will result
when the ‘no motor trip’ operation is set.
6.2.14 Low Voltage Trip 2

If you set the Pr-82 (LV2 Selection) code to Yes (1), the trip notification is displayed
when a low voltage trip occurs. In this case, even if the voltage of the DC Link
condenser is higher than the trip level, the LV2 trip will not be retrieved. To retrieve
the trip, reset the inverter. The trip history will not be saved.

Pr 82 LV2 Selection Yes (1) 0/1 -
187
6.2.15 Inverter Pre-overheat Warning

This feature outputs a warning if the inverter temperature exceeds the temperature set
by the user in Pr-77. The user can set up the operation for when the warning is
generated before four types of overheating and output warning with the multi-function
relay.

Pre-overheat warning
77 90 10–110 ℃
temperature
0 None
Pr 1 Warning
Pre-overheat warning
78 0: None Free- -
operation setting 2
Run
3 Dec
31, Multi-function relay 1 item 41: Pre Over
OU 0–44 -
33 Multi-function relay 2 item Heat
Pre-overheat Warning Operation Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
Pr.77 Pre-
Set the pre-overheat warning temperature.
overheat warning
Setting Range: 10–110[℃]
temperature
0: None → No pre-overheat warning operation
1: Warning → If the pre-overheat warning temperature is exceeded,
warning message is displayed on the keypad and inverter will operate
Pr.78 Pre-
normally.
overheat warning
2: Free-Run → If the pre-overheat warning temperature is exceeded, a
operation setting
pre-overheat trip occurs and free-run will stop.
3: Dec → If the pre-overheat warning temperature is exceeded, a pre-
overheat trip occurs and deceleration will stop.
OU.31, 33 multi-
38: Pre-overheat warning → Signal is output if a pre-overheat warning
function relay 1,
or trip occurs.
2
188
6.2.16 Torque Detection Protection Action

This feature outputs torque status to the multi-function relay if a motor overload or
sudden underload occurs. This feature is activated when the multi-function relay
(OU31, 33) is set to 43, 44.
Setting
Range
Multi-function relay 1 Prt Trq Det
43
item 1
31, 33 0–44 -
Multi-function relay 2 Prt Trq Det
44
item 2
Torque detection 1
67* 0: None 0–8 -
operation setting
68* Torque detection 1 level 100 0–200.0 %
OU
Torque detection 1 delay
69* 0.1 0.0–10.0 sec
time
Torque detection 2
70** 0: None 0–8 -
operation setting
71** Torque detection 2 level 100 0–200.0 %
Torque detection 2 delay
72** 0.1 0.0–10.0 sec
time
*Visible only when the multi-function relay (OU.31, 33) is set to 43 (Prt Trq Det 1).
**Visible only when the multi-function relay (OU.31, 33) is set to 44 (Prt Trq Det 2).
The over and under torque detection action operates as shown in the figure by having
a hysteresis level of 10% compared to the motor's rated current.
Over Torque Detection Action
OutputMotor
Current of
Current
Motor
hysteresis(10%) hysteresis(10%)
Torque detection
OUT-68level
or OUT-71
Multi-function
outputMOsetting OUT-69
Torqueor detection
OUT-72 delay Torque
OUT-69 or detection
OUT-72 delay
(42: Prt Trq Dect1
or 43: Prt Trq Dect2)
189
Under Torque Detection Action
Output Motor
Current of
Current
Motor
hysteresis(10%) hysteresis(10%)
Torque detection
OUT-68 or OUT-71
level
Multi-function
outputMOsetting OUT-69
Torqueordetection
OUT-72 delay OUT-69 or detection
Torque OUT-72 delay
(42: Prt Trq Dect1
or 43: Prt Trq Dect2)
The over and under torque detection level set as OU68, 71 parameters are set as the
ratio on motor's rated current.
Torque Detection Operation Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
0: None → Torque detection is not operating.
1: OT CmdSpd Warn → Detects over torque and outputs warning only
when the inverter output frequency is the same as the command
frequency.
2: OT Warning → Detects over torque during the operation and outputs
warning.
3: OT CmdSpdTrip → Detects over torque and generates a trip only
frequency.
OU67, 70 Torque
4: OT Trip → Detects over torque during operation and generates a trip.
detection
5: UT CmdSpd Warn → Detects under torque and outputs warning only
operation setting
frequency.
6: OT Warning → Detects under torque during the operation and
outputs warning.
7: UT CmdSpd Trip → Detects under torque and generates a trip only
frequency.
8: UT Trip → Detects under torque during operation and generates a
trip.
OU.68, 71 Sets the torque detection level of torque detection 1, 2. The set value
Torque detection is a% of the motor's rated current. The detection level must be higher
level than Ba.14 no load current value.
OU.69, 72 Sets the delay time on torque detection 1, 2. When over or under
Torque detection torque is detected, a warning or trip is output after the torque detection
delay time delay time.
190
6.3 Fault/Warning List

The following list shows the types of faults and warnings that can occur while using
the Nx2000+ inverter. Please refer to 6 Learning Protection Features on page 167
for details about faults and warnings.
Category Description
Over current trip
Over voltage trip
External signal trip
Temperature sensor trip
ARM short current fault trip
Option fault trip*
Over heat trip
Out phase open trip
In phase open trip
Inverter overload trip
Ground fault trip**
Latch Fan trip
Motor over heat trip
Pre-PID operation failure
Major fault I/O board link trip
External brake trip
No motor trip
Low voltage trip during operation
Inverter pre-overheat trip
Over torque 1 trip
Under torque 1 trip
Over torque 2 trip
Under torque 2 trip
Low voltage fault trip
Level type Emergency stop trip
Command loss trip
External memory error
Fatal Analog input error
CPU Watch Dog fault trip
191
Category Description
Motor overload trip
Minor fault
Motor light load trip
Command loss fault trip warning
Overload warning
Under load warning
Inverter overload warning
Fan operation warning
Braking resistor braking rate warning
Warning Rotor time constant tuning error
Fan replacement warning
Inverter pre-overheat warning
Over torque 1 warning
Under torque 1 warning
Over torque 2 warning
Under torque 2 warning
*Appears only when using the option board.
**Ground detection feature is provided only in 4.0 kW, 2.2 kW 200 V, and 5.5 - 7.5 kW
products. Other products protect inverter with OVT/OCT/OC2 trip when grounding
occurs.
192
RS-485 Communication Features
7 RS-485 Communication Features

This section in the user manual explains how to control the inverter with a PLC or a
computer over a long distance using the RS-485 communication features. To use the
RS-485 communication features, connect the communication cables and set the
communication parameters on the inverter. Refer to the communication protocols and
parameters to configure and use the RS-485 communication features.
7.1 Communication Standards

Following the RS-485 communication standards, Nx2000+ products exchange data
with a PLC and computer. The RS-485 communication standards support the Multi-
drop Link System and offer an interface that is strongly resistant to noise. Please refer
to the following table for details about the communication standards.
Items Standard
Communication method/
RS-485/Bus type, Multi-drop Link System
Transmission type
Inverter type name Nx2000+
Number of connected
Maximum of 16 inverters / Maximum1,200 m (recommended
inverters/ Transmission
distance: within 700 m)
distance
Recommended cable size 0.75mm², (18AWG), Shielded Type Twisted-Pair (STP) Wire
Dedicated terminals (S+/S-) on the control terminal block

Installation type
Connected to the RJ-45 connector (no 1 pin S+, no 8 pin S-)
Supplied by the inverter-insulated power source from the
Power supply
inverter’s internal circuit
Communication speed 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps
Control procedure Asynchronous communications system

Communication system Half duplex system
Character system Modbus-RTU: Binary

Stop bit length 1-bit/2-bit
Frame error check 2 bytes
Parity check None/Even/Odd
193
Connect the communication lines by referring to the illustration below.
Use 2Pair STP (Shielded twisted Pair) cable (using only no.1 pin S+, no.8 pin S-/ no.1
and no.8 pins are twisted types) and a RJ45 STP plug. Use a RJ45 coupler for
connection between products and cable extension (Y type LAN coupler where STP
can be mounted). (Use LAN standardized products for cables, plugs, and couplers:
CAT5, CAT5e, CAT6.)
Note
• Communication cables must be installed by separating from the power cable.
• Use the RS-485 communication by selecting one from S+ or S- of the terminal block
and S+ or S- of the RJ45 plug.
194
7.2 Communication System Configuration

In an RS-485 communication system, the PLC or computer is the master device and
the inverter is the slave device. When using a computer as the master, the RS-
232converter must be integrated with the computer, so that it can communicate with
the inverter through the RS-232/RS-485 converter. Specifications and performance of
converters may vary depending on the manufacturer, but the basic functions are
identical. Please refer to the converter manufacturer’s user manual for details about
features and specifications.
Connect the wires and configure the communication parameters on the inverter by
referring to the following illustration of the communication system configuration.
7.2.1 Communication Line Connection

After checking that the power of the inverter is fully blocked, connect the RS-485
communication line to S+ or S-terminal of the control terminal or RJ45 connector (no.1
pin S+, no.8 pin S-) of the I/O board. The maximum number of inverters you can
connect is 16. For communication lines, use shielded twisted pair (STP) cables.
The maximum length of the communication line is 1,200 meters, but it is

recommended to use no more than 700 meters of communication line to ensure
stable communication. Please use a repeater to enhance the communication speed
when using a communication line longer than 1,200 meters or when using a large
number of devices. A repeater is effective when smooth communication is not
available due to noise interference.
195
7.2.2 Setting Communication Parameters

Before proceeding with setting communication configurations, make sure that the
communication lines are connected properly. Turn on the inverter and set the
communication parameters.
Setting
Range
01 1 1–250 -
inverter ID
Built-in communication ModBus
02 0 0, 2 -
protocol RTU
CM 03 3 9600 bps 0–7 -
speed
Built-in communication D8/PN/S
04 0 0–3 -
frame setting 1
Transmission delay after
05 5 0–1000 ms
reception
Communication Parameters Setting Details
Code and
Description
Features
CM.01 Int485 St
Set the inverter station ID between 1 and 250.
ID
Select one of the two built-in protocols: Modbus-RTU or LnT INV 485.
CM.02 Int485
Proto Configuration Function
0 Modbus-RTU Modbus-RTU compatible protocol
196
Code and
Description
Features
Set a communication setting speed up to 115,200 bps.
0 1200bps
1 2400bps
CM.03 Int485 2 4800bps
BaudR 3 9600bps
4 19200bps
5 38400bps
6 56Kbps
7 115 Kbps (115,200 bps)
Set a communication configuration. Set the data length, parity check

method, and the number of stop bits.
CM.04 Int485
Mode 0 D8/PN/S1 8-bit data / no parity check / 1 stop bit
1 D8/PN/S2 8-bit data / no parity check / 2 stop bit
2 D8/PE/S1 8-bit data / even parity / 1 stop bit
3 D8/PO/S1 8-bit data / odd parity / 1 stop bit
Set the response time for the slave (inverter) to react to the request
from the master. Response time is used in a system where the slave
device response is too fast for the master device to process. Set this
code to an appropriate value for smooth master-slave communication.
CM.05 Resp
Delay
197
7.2.3 Setting Operation Command and Frequency

Set the drv code of the operation group to 3 (Int 485) and the Frq code of the
operation group to 6 (Int 485) in order to set the operation command and frequency of
the common area parameters via communication.

drv Command Source 3 Int 485 0–4 -
Operation Frequency
Frq 6 Int 485 0–8 -
reference source
198
7.2.4 Command Loss Protective Operation

Configure the command loss decision standards and protective operations run when a
communication problem lasts for a specified period of time.
Command Loss Protective Operation Setting Details

Code and
Description
Features
Select the operation to run when a communication error has occurred
and lasted exceeding the time set at Pr.13.
The speed command immediately becomes the
0 None operation frequency without any protection
Pr.12 Lost Cmd function.
Mode, Free- The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in
1
Pr.13 Lost Cmd Run free-run condition.
Time 2 Dec The motor decelerates and then stops.
Hold The inverter continues in the speed command
3
Input input before the loss of speed.
Hold The inverter continues in the operation frequency
4
Output before the loss of speed.
Lost The inverter operates at the frequency set at Pr.
5
Preset 14 (Lost Preset F).
7.2.5 Setting Virtual Multi-Function Input

Multi-function input can be controlled using a communication address (0h0385). Set
codes CM.70–77 to the functions to operate, and then set the BIT relevant to the
function to 1 at 0h0322 to operate it. Virtual multi-function operates independently
from In.65–69 analog multi-function inputs and cannot be set redundantly. Virtual
multi-function input can be monitored using CM.86 (Virt Dl Status). Before you
configure the virtual multi-function inputs, set the DRV code according to the
command source.

Communication multi-
70–77 0 None 0–49 -
function input x
CM
Communication multi-
86 - - - -
function input monitoring
Example: When sending an Fx command by controlling virtual multi-function input in
the common area via Int485, set CM.70 to FX. Then, assign a 0h0001 value to the
communication address 0h0322 to operate the forward direction operation (Fx)
feature.
199
Note
The following are values and functions that are applied to address 0h0322:
Setting Function
0h0001 Forward operation (Fx)
0h0003 Reverse operation (Rx)
0h0000 Stop
7.2.6 Saving Parameters Defined by Communication

If you turn off the inverter after setting the common area parameters or keypad
parameters via communication and operate the inverter, the changes are lost and the
values changed via communication revert to the previous setting values when you
turn on the inverter.
Setting address 0h03E0 to 0 and then setting it again to 1 via communication allows
the existing parameter settings to be saved. However, setting address 0h03E0 to 1
and then setting it to 0 does not carry out the same function.
7.2.7 Total Memory Map for Communication

Communication Area Memory Map Description
Communication common
0h0000–0h00FF Common compatible area
compatible area
Parameter registration type Areas registered at CM.31–38 and
0h0100–0h01FF
area CM.51–58
0h0300–0h037F Inverter monitoring area
0h0380–0h03DF Inverter control area
0h03E0–0h03FF Inverter memory control area
0h0400–0h0FFF Reserved
0h1100 dr Group
0h1200 bA Group
Nx2000+ communication 0h1300 Ad Group
common area 0h1400 Cn Group
0h1500 In Group
0h1600 OU Group
0h1700 CM Group
0h1800 AP Group
0h1B00 Pr Group
0h1C00 M2 Group
200
7.2.8 Parameter Group for Data Transmission

By defining a parameter group for data transmission, the communication addresses
registered in the communication function group (CM) can be used in communication.
Parameter group for data transmission may be defined to transmit multiple
parameters at once, into the communication frame.

Output
31–38 communication - 0000–FFFF Hex
CM address x
Input communication
51–58 - 0000–FFFF Hex
address x
Currently Registered CM Group Parameter
Comm. Address Parameter Assigned Content by Bit

Status Parameter-1– Parameter communication code value registered
0h0100–0h0107
Status Parameter-8 at CM.31–38 (Read-only)
Control Parameter-
Parameter communication code value registered
0h0110–0h0117 1–
at CM.51–58 (Read/Write access)
Control Parameter-8
Note
When registering control parameters, register the operation speed (0h0005, 0h0380,
0h0381) and operation command (0h0006, 0h0382) parameters at the end of a parameter
control frame. The operation speed and operation command must be registered to the
highest number of the parameter control-h (Para Control-h).
For example, when the Para Ctrl Num is 5, register the operation speed to Para Control-4
and the operation command to Para Control-5.
201
7.3 Communication Protocol

The built-in RS-485 communication supports Modbus-RTU protocols.
7.3.1 Modbus-RTU Protocol
7.3.1.1 Function Code and Protocol (Unit: byte)

In the following section, station ID is the value set at CM.01 (Int485 St ID), and
starting address is the communication address. (The starting address size is in bytes).
For more information about communication addresses, refer to 7.4 Drive on page 205.
Function Code #03: Read Holding Register
Query Field Name Response Field Name

Station ID Station ID
Function(0x03) Function (0x03)
Starting Address Hi Byte Count
Starting Address Lo Data Hi
# of Points Hi Data Lo
# of Points Lo … # Number of Points
CRC Lo …
CRC Hi Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Lo
CRC Hi
Function Code #04: Read Input Register
Query Field Name Respo Response Field Name

Station ID nse Station ID
Function(0x04) Field Function (0x04)
Name
Starting Address Hi Byte Count
Starting Address Lo Data Hi
# of Points Hi Data Lo
# of Points Lo … # Number of Points
CRC Lo …
CRC Hi Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Lo
CRC Hi
202
Function Code #06: Preset Single Register

Function (0x06) Function (0x06)
Starting Address Hi Register Address Hi
Register Address Lo Register Address Lo
Preset Data Hi Preset Data Hi
Preset Data Lo Preset Data Lo
CRC Lo CRC Lo
CRC Hi CRC Hi
Function Code #16 (hex 0h10): Preset Multiple Register

Function (0x10) Function (0x10)
Starting Address Hi Starting Address Hi
Starting Address Lo Starting Address Lo
# of Register Hi # of Register Hi
# of Register Lo # of Register Lo
Byte Count CRC Lo
Data Hi CRC Hi
Data Lo
… # Number of Points
…
Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Lo
CRC Hi
203
Exception Code
Code
01: ILLEGAL
FUNCTION
02: ILLEGAL DATA
ADRESS
03: ILLEGAL DATA
VALUE
06: SLAVE DEVICE
BUSY
Response
Field Name
Station ID
Function*
Exception Code
CRC Lo
CRC Hi
* The function value uses the top level bit for all query values.
Example of Modbus-RTU Communication in Use

When the muti-step acceleration time1 (Communication address 0x1246) is changed to
5.0 sec and the Multi-step deceleration time1 (Communication address 0x1247) is
changed to 10.0 sec.
Frame Transmission from Master to Slave (Request)

Station Starting # of Byte
Items Function Data 1 Data 2 CRC
ID Address Register Count
0x432
Hex 0x01 0x10 0x1245 0x0002 0x04 0x0032 0x0064
4
CM.01 Preset Starting 50 100
Descr
Int485 Multiple Address -1 - - (ACC time (DEC time -
iption
St ID Register (0x1246-1) 5.0sec) 10.0sec)
Frame Transmission from Slave to Master (Response)
Items Station ID Function Starting Address # of Register CRC

Hex 0x01 0x10 0x1245 0x0002 0x5565
CM.01 Preset
Descr Starting Address -1
Int485 St Multiple - -
iption (0x1246-1)
ID Register
204
7.4 DriveConnect
For the Nx2000+ series, you can set the parameters and monitor the inverter status
using DriveConnect which is a PC software provided free of charge.
In DriveConnect, you can read/write individual parameters, groups, and all parameters.
In the case of the frequently used parameters, you can add to favorites to manage
them separately. For more details, see DriveConnect user's manual.
Detailed Information
On the DriveConnect Detailed Information screen , you can see the drive information
and the monitoring parameters. One output gauge and seven optional gauges are
provided. On the output gauge, you can monitor the output frequency/speed. On the
optional gauges, the user can select the items that can be monitored, such as the
output voltage, output current, or analog input, to be monitored in the form of a gauge.
For more details, see DriveConnect's user manual.
Trends Feature
On the Trends screen of DriveConnect, you can monitor the parameters in the graph
form. Monitoring graphs provide 8 channels. Trends provide monitoring, recording,
and trigger observation features. For more details, see DriveConnect user's manual.
205
Compatible Common Area Parameter
The following are common area parameters.
Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit R/W Assigned Content by Bit
Address
0h0000 Inverter model - - R 16: Nx2000+
0: 0.75kW, 1: 1.5kW, 2: 2.2kW,
4: 5.5kW, 5: 7.5kW,
0h0001 Inverter capacity - - R 6: 11kW, 7: 15kW, 8: 18.5kW,
9: 22kW
256 : 0.4kW, 259: 4.0kW
0h0002 Inverter input voltage - - R 0: 220 V level, 1: 440 V level
(E.g.) 0h0100: Version 1.00
0h0003 Version - - R
(E.g.) 0h0101: Version 1.01
0h0004 Reserved - - R/W -
0h0005 Target frequency 0.01 Hz R/W -
B15 Reserved
B14 0: Keypad Freq
B13 1: Keypad Torq
B12 2-16 Terminal block
B11 multi-step speed
B10 17: Up, 18: Down
19: STEADY
22: V1, 24: V0, 25: I2
26: Reserved
R B9 27: Built-in 485
28: Communication
option
30: JOG, 31: PID
Operation command B8 0: Keypad
0h0006 - -
(option) B7 1: Fx/Rx-1
2: Fx/Rx-2
3: Built-in 485
B6
4: Communication
option
B5 Reserved
B4 Emergency stop
W: Trip initialization
B3 (0→1)
R/W
R: Trip status
B2 Reverse operation (R)
B1 Forward operation (F)
B0 Stop (S)
0h0007 Acceleration time 0.1 sec R/W -
0h0008 Deceleration time 0.1 sec R/W -
0h0009 Output current 0.1 A R -
206
Comm.
Address
0h000A Output frequency 0.01 Hz R -
0h000B Output voltage 1 V R -
0h000C DC link voltage 1 V R -
0h000D Output power 0.1 kW R -
B15 Reserved
1: Frequency command
source by
B14
communication (built-in,
option)
1: Operation command
source by
B13
communication (built-in,
option)
Reverse operation
B12
command
Forward operation
B11
command
B10 Brake release signal
0h000E Operation status - - - B9 Jog mode
B8 Drive stopped.
B7 DC Braking
B6 Speed reached
B5 Decelerating
B4 Accelerating
Fault Trip - operates
B3 according to OU.30
setting
Operating in reverse
B2
direction
Operating in forward
B1
direction
B0 Stopped
B15 Reserved
B14 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 H/W-Diag
0h000F Fault trip information - - R B9 Reserved
B8 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 Level Type trip
207
Comm.
Address
B2 Reserved
B1 Reserved
B0 Latch Type trip
B15–
Reserved
B5
B4 P5
Input terminal
0h0010 - - R B3 P4
information
B2 P3
B1 P2
B0 P1
B15 Reserved
B14 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 Reserved
B9 Reserved
Output terminal B8 Reserved
0h0011 - - R
information B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 Reserved
B2 Reserved
B1 Relay 2
B0 Relay 1
0h0012 V1 0.01 % R V1 voltage input
0h0013 V0 0.01 % R Volume voltage input
0h0014 I2 0.01 % R I2 current input
Displays existing motor rotation
0h0015 Motor rotation speed 1 Rpm R
speed
0h0016
Reserved - - - -
- 0h0019
0h001 A Select Hz/rpm - - R 0: Hz, 1: Rpm
Display the number of
Display the number of poles for
0h001B poles for the selected - - R
the selected motor
motor
208
7.5 Nx2000+ Expansion Common Area Parameter
7.5.1 Monitoring Area Parameter (Read Only)

Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit Assigned Content by Bit
Address
0h0300 Inverter model - - 16: Nx2000+
0.4kW : 1900h, 0.75kW: 3200h
1.5kW: 4015h, 2.2kW: 4022h
4.0kW: 4040h
0h0301 Inverter capacity - -
5.5kW: 4055h, 7.5kW: 4075h
11kW: 40B0h, 15kW: 40F0h
18.5kW: 4125h, 22kW: 4160h
100 V single phase self cooling: 0120h
200 V 3-phase forced cooling: 0231h
100 V single phase forced cooling:
0121h
400 V single phase self cooling: 0420h
Inverter input
voltage/power (Single 200 V single phase self cooling: 0220h
0h0302 - - 400 V 3-phase self cooling: 0430h
phase, 3-
phase)/cooling method 200 V 3-phase self cooling: 0230h
0421h
0221h
400 V 3-phase forced cooling: 0431h
(E.g.) 0h0100: Version 1.00
0h0303 Inverter S/W version - -
(E.g.) 0h0101: Version 1.01
0h0304 Reserved - - -
B15
0: Normal state
B14 4: Warning occurred
B13 8: Fault occurred (operates
B12 according to Pr.30 setting)
0h0305 Inverter operation state - - B11

-
B8
B7 1: Speed searching
2: Accelerating
B6
3: At constant speed
B5 4: Decelerating
209
Comm.
Address
5: Decelerating to stop
6: H/W OCS
B4
7: S/W OCS
8: Dwell operating
B3 0: Stopped
1: Operating in forward
B2 direction
B1 2: Operating in reverse
direction
B0 3: DC operating (0 speed
control)
B15
B14 Operation command source
B13 0: Keypad
B12 1: Communication option
B11 2: -
B10 3: Built-in 485
B9 4: Terminal block
B8
B7 Frequency command source
Inverter operation, B6 0: Keypad speed
0h0306 frequency command - - B5 1: Keypad torque
source B4 2–4: Up/Down operation
B3 speed
B2 5: V1, 7: V0, 8: I2
B1 9: -
10: Built-in 485
11: Communication option
12: -
B0 13: Jog, 14: PID
25–39: Multi-step speed
frequency
0h0307
Reserved - - -
–0h30F
0h0310 Output current 0.1 A -
0h0311 Output frequency 0.01 Hz -
0h0312 Output rpm 0 Rpm -
0h0313 Motor feedback speed 0 Rpm -32768Rpm–32767Rpm(directional)
0h0314 Output voltage 1 V -
0h0315 DC link voltage 1 V -
0h0316 Output power 0.1 kW -
0h0317 Output torque 0.1 % -
0h0318 PID reference 0.1 % -
0h0319 PID feedback 0.1 % -
0h031 A Display the number of - - Displays the number of poles for the
210
Comm.
Address
poles for the 1st motor first motor
Display the number of Displays the number of poles for the
0h031B - -
poles for the 2st motor 2nd motor
Display the number of
Display the number of poles for the
0h031C poles for the selected - -
selected motor
motor
0h031D Select Hz/rpm - - 0: Hz, 1: Rpm
0h031E
Reserved - - -
–0h031F
BI5 Reserved
- -
B5 Reserved
B4 P5 (I/O board)
0h0320 Digital input information - -
B3 P4 (I/O board)
B2 P3 (I/O board)
B1 P2 (I/O board)
B0 P1 (I/O board)
BI5 Reserved
- Reserved
B4 Reserved
Digital output
0h0321 - - B3 Reserved
information
B2 Reserved
B1 Relay 2
B0 Relay 1
B15 Reserved
- Reserved
B8 Reserved
B7 Virtual DI 8 (CM.77)
Virtual digital input
0h0322 - - B5 Virtual DI 6 (CM.75)
information
Display the selected
0h0323 - - 0: 1st motor/1: 2nd motor
motor
0h0324 AI1 0.01 % Analog input V1 (I/O board)
0h0325 Reserved 0.01 % -
0h0326 AI3 0.01 % Volume input (I/O board)
0h0327 AI4 0.01 % Analog input I2 (I/O board)
0h0328 AO1 0.01 % Analog output 1 (I/O board)
0h0329 AO2 0.01 % Analog output 2 (I/O board)
0h032A AO3 0.01 % Reserved
0h032B AO4 0.01 % Reserved
211
Comm.
Address
0h032C Reserved - - -
Inverter module
0h032D 1 ℃ -
temperature
Inverter power
0h032E 1 kWh -
consumption
Inverter power
0h032F 1 MWh -
consumption
BI5 Fuse Open Trip
BI4 Over Heat Trip
BI3 Arm Short
BI2 External Trip
BI1 Overvoltage Trip
BI0 Overcurrent Trip
B9 NTC Trip
Latch type trip B8 Reserved
0h0330 - -
information - 1 B7 Reserved
B6 In phase open trip
B5 Out phase open trip
B4 Ground Fault Trip
B3 E-Thermal Trip
B2 Inverter Overload Trip
B1 Underload Trip
B0 Overload Trip
BI5 Reserved
BI4 Pre Over Heat Trip
BI3 Reserved
BI2 Reserved
BI1 Reserved
BI0 Bad option card
B9 No motor trip
Latch type trip B8 External brake trip
0h0331 - -
information - 2 B7 Bad contact at basic I/O board
B6 Pre PID Fail
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 FAN Trip
B2 Reserved
B1 Reserved
B0 Reserved
B15 Reserved
- -
Level type trip
information
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
212
Comm.
Address
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 Keypad Lost Command
B2 Lost Command
B1 LV
B0 BX
B15 Reserved
- Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 QueueFull
H/W Diagnosis Trip
information
B3 Watchdog-2 error
B2 Watchdog-1 error
B1 EEPROM error
B0 ADC error
B15 Reserved
- Reserved
B10 Reserved
B9 Auto Tuning failed
B8 Keypad lost
B7 Encoder disconnection
0h0334 Warning information - - B6 Wrong installation of encoder
B5 DB
B4 FAN running
B3 Lost command
B2 Inverter Overload
B1 Underload
B0 Overload
B3 Under Torque Detection 2
Latch type trip B2 Over Torque Detection 2
0h0335 - -
information - 3 B1 Under Torque Detection 1
B0 Over Torque Detection 1
0H03356
– Reserved - - -
0h033F
Total number of days the inverter has
0h0340 On Time date 0 Day
been powered on
Total number of minutes excluding the
0h0341 On Time minute 0 Min
total number of On Time days
Total number of days the inverter has
0h0342 Run Time date 0 Day
driven the motor
213
Comm.
Address
0h0343 Run Time minute 0 Min
total number of Run Time days
Total number of days the heat sink fan
0h0344 Fan Time date 0 Day
has been running
0h0345 Fan Time minute 0 Min
total number of Fan Time days
0h0346
Reserved - - -
–0h0348
0h0349 Reserved - - -
0h034A Option 1 - - 0: None, 9: CANopen
0h034B Reserved - - -
0h034C Reserved - - -
7.5.2 Control Area Parameter (Read/ Write)

Comm.
Address
0h0380 Frequency command 0.01 Hz Command frequency setting
0h0381 RPM command 1 Rpm Command rpm setting
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 0 → 1: Free-run stop
B2 0 → 1: Trip initialization
0h0382 Operation command - - 0: Reverse direction command,
B1
1: Forward direction command
0: Stop command, 1: Run
B0
command
Example: Forward operation
command: 0003h,
Reverse operation command: 0001h
0h0383 Acceleration time 0.1 sec Acceleration time setting
0h0384 Deceleration time 0.1 sec Deceleration time setting
BI5 Reserved
- Reserved
Virtual digital input B8 Reserved
0h0385 control - - B7 Virtual DI 8 (CM.77)
(0: Off, 1: On) B6 Virtual DI 7 (CM.76)
214
Comm.
Address
BI5 Reserved
BI4 Reserved
BI3 Reserved
BI2 Reserved
BI1 Reserved
BI0 Reserved
B9 Reserved
B8 Reserved
Digital output control B7 Reserved
0h0386 - -
(0: Off, 1: On) B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 Reserved
B2 Reserved
Relay 2 (0.4–7.5 kW, OU-33:
B1
None)
Relay 1 (0.4–7.5 kW, OU-31:
B0
None)
0h0387 Reserved - - Reserved
0h0388 PID reference 0.1 % PID reference command
0h0389 PID feedback value 0.1 % PID feedback value
0h038A Motor rated current 0.1 A -
0h038B Motor rated voltage 1 V -
0h038C–
Reserved - - Reserved
0h038F
0h0390 Torque Ref 0.1 % Torque command
0h0391 Fwd Pos Torque Limit 0.1 % Forward motoring torque limit
Positive-direction regeneration torque
0h0392 Fwd Neg Torque Limit 0.1 %
limit
0h0393 Rev Pos Torque Limit 0.1 % Reverse motoring torque limit
Negative-direction regeneration torque
0h0394 Rev Neg Torque Limit 0.1 %
limit
0h0395 Torque Bias 0.1 % Torque bias
Note
A frequency set via communication using the common area frequency address (0h0380,
0h0005) is not saved even when used with the parameter save function. To save a
changed frequency to use after a power cycle, follow these steps:
215
1 Set a frequency reference after setting the frequency reference source to 1 (Keypad-
1).
2 Set the frequency via communication into the parameter area frequency address
(0h1D04).
3 Perform the parameter save (0h03E0: '1') before turning off the power. After the
power cycle, the frequency set before turning off the power is displayed.
7.5.3 Memory Control Area Parameter (Read and Write)

Changeable
Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit During Function
Address
Operation
0h03E0 Save parameters - - X 0: No, 1: Yes
Monitor mode
0h03E1 - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
initialization
0: No, 1: All Grp, 2: Drv Grp
3: bA Grp, 4: Ad Grp, 5: Cn
Grp
6: In Grp, 7: OU Grp, 8: CM
Parameter Grp
0h03E2 - - X
initialization 9: AP Grp, 12: Pr Grp, 13:
M2 Grp, 14: Operation
group
Setting is prohibited during
fault trip interruptions.
Changed parameter
0h03E3 - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
display
0h03E4 Reserved - - - Reserved
0h03E5 Delete all fault history - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
Delete user-
0h03E6 - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
registrated codes
Hide parameter Write: 0–9999
0h03E7 0 Hex O
mode Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
Lock parameter Write: 0–9999
0h03E8 0 Hex O
mode Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
0h03E9 Reserved - - - Reserved
Initializing power
0h03EA - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
consumption
Initialize inverter
0h03EB operation - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
accumulative time
Initialize cooling fan
0h03EC accumulated - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
operation time
216
Note
• When setting parameters in the inverter memory control area, the values are
reflected to the inverter operation and saved. Parameters set in other areas via
communication are reflected to the inverter operation, but are not saved. All set
values are cleared following an inverter power cycle and revert back to its previous
values.
Therefore, make sure to save the parameter after setting the parameter of a
different area as communication and before turning off the inverter power. But it is
not necessary to save the parameter at the inverter memory control area and the
value will be saved to the inverter immediately once the setup is complete.
• Define the parameter carefully. After setting a parameter to 0 via communication,
set it to another value. If a parameter has been set to a value other than 0 and a
non-zero value is entered again, an error message is returned. The previously-set
value can be identified by reading the parameter when operating the inverter via
communication.
• The addresses 0h03E7 and 0h03E8 are parameters for entering the password.
When the password is entered, the condition will change from Lock to Unlock, and
vice versa. When the same parameter value is entered continuously, the
parameter is executed just once. Therefore, if the same value is entered again,
change it to another value first and then re-enter the previous value.
For example, if you want to enter 244 twice, enter it in the following order: 244 → 0
→ 244.
It may take longer to set the parameter values in the inverter memory control area
because all data is saved to the inverter. Be careful as communication may be lost during
parameter setup if parameter setup is continues for an extended period of time.
217
Table of Functions
8 Table of Functions
This chapter lists all the function settings for Nx2000+ series inverter. Set the
parameters required according to the following references. If a set value input is out of
range, the following messages will be displayed on the keyboard. In these cases, the
inverter will not operate with the [ENT] key.
• Set value not allocated: rd
• Set value repetition (multi-function input, PID reference, PID feedback related): OL
• Set value not allowed (optional value): no
8.1 Operation Group

SL: Sensorless vector control (dr.09), Property: Write-enabled during operation
Comm. Keypad Setting Initial

Code Name Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Display Range Value
0–Maximum
Target
- 0h1D00 0.00 frequency 0.00 O O O p.43
frequency
(Hz)
Acceleration 0.0–600.0
- 0h1D01 ACC 5.0 O O O p.74
time (s)
Deceleration 0.0–600.0
- 0h1D02 dEC 10.0 O O O p.74
time (s)
0 Keypad
1 Fx/Rx-1
Command 1:
- 0h1D03 drv 2 Fx/Rx-2 X O O p.69
Source Fx/Rx-1
3 Int 485
4 Fieldbus1
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
Frequency 0:
V0, built-
- 0h1D04 reference Frq 4 Keypad- X O O p.57
in volume
source 1
5 I2
6 Int 485
8 Fied Bus1
0.00–
Multi-step
Maximum
- 0h1D05 speed St1 10.00 O O O p.67
frequency
frequency 1
(Hz)
Multi-step 0.00–
- 0h1D06 St2 20.00 O O O p.67
speed Maximum
1
Table of options are provided separately in the option manual.
218
Table of Functions
Comm. Keypad Setting Initial

Address Display Range Value
frequency 2 frequency
(Hz)
0.00–
Multi-step
Maximum
- 0h1D07 speed St3 30.00 O O O p.67
frequency
frequency 3
(Hz)
Output
- 0h1D08 CUr - - - O O p.51
current
Motor
- 0h1D09 revolutions Rpm - - - O O -
per minute
Inverter DC
- 0h1D0A dCL - - - O O p.51
voltage
Inverter
- 0h1D0B output vOL - - - O O p.51
voltage
Out of order
- 0h1D0C nOn - - - O O -
signal
Forward
Select F direction
- 0h1D0D rotation drC operation F O O O -
direction Reverse
r
run
8.2 Drive Group (PAR→dr)

In the following table, data shaded in grey will be displayed when the related code has
been selected.

Comm. Initial
Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Value
dr-00 - Jump Code 1–99 9 O O O p.40
0 V/F p.81,
Control 2 Slip Compen
dr-09 0h1109 0: V/F X O O p.115,
mode
4 IM Sensorless p.127
0.00, Start
Jog frequency–
dr-11 0h110B 10.00 O O O p.107
Frequency Maximum frequency
(Hz)
219
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Jog run
dr-12 0h110C acceleration 0.0–600.0 (s) 20.0 O O O p.107
time
Jog run
dr-13 0h110D deceleration 0.0–600.0 (s) 30.0 O O O p.107
time
0: 0.2 kW
1: 0.4 kW
2: 0.75 kW
3: 1.1 kW
4: 1.5 kW
Varies by
Motor 5: 2.2 kW
dr-14 0h110E Motor X O O p.124
capacity 6: 3.0 kW
capacity
7: 3.7 kW
8: 4.0 kW
9: 5.5 kW
10: 7.5 kW
11: 11.0 kW
Torque 0 Manual
dr-15 0h110F 0: Manual X O X p.85
boost mode 1 Auto
Forward
dr-16 0h1110 Torque 0.0–15.0 (%) 2.0 X O X p.85
boost
Reverse
dr-17 0h1111 0.0–15.0 (%) 2.0 X O X p.85
torque boost
30.00–400.00 (Hz)
Base [V/F, Slip Compen]
dr-18 0h1112 60.00 X O O p.81
frequency 40.00–120.00 (Hz)
[IM Sensorless]
Start
dr-19 0h1113 0.01–10.00 (Hz) 0.50 X O O p.81
frequency
40.00–400.00 (Hz)
Maximum [V/F, Slip Compen]
dr-20 0h1114 60.00 X O O p.93
frequency 40.00–120.00 (Hz)
[IM Sensorless]
Auto torque
dr-262 0h111 A boost filter 1–1000 2 O O X
gain
2
Appears when Dr15 is 1 (automatic torque boost).
220
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Auto torque
boost
dr-272 0h111B 0.0–300.0[%] 50.0 O O X
motoring
gain
Auto torque
boost
dr-282 0h111C 0.0–300.0[%] 50.0 O O X
regeneration
gain
Select ranges
inverter displays at
power input
Operation
0
frequency
1 Acceleration time
2 Deceleration time
Command
3
Source
Frequency
4
reference source
Multi-step speed
5
frequency 1
Multi-step speed
6
Select frequency 2 0:
dr-80 0h1150 ranges at Multi-step speed Operation O O O -
7
power input frequency 3 frequency
8 Output current
9 Motor RPM
Inverter DC
10
voltage
User select
11
signal (dr.81)
Currently out of
12
order
Select run
13
direction
14 Output current 2
15 Motor RPM 2
Inverter DC
16
voltage 2
User select
17
signal 2 (dr.81)
Select Monitors user

dr-81 0h1151 0: Output O O O -
monitor selected code
221
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
code 0 Output voltage (V) voltage
Output power
1
(kW)
2 Torque(kgf  m)
PID feedback
3
monitor
Display 0 View All 0: View
dr-89 0h03E3 changed O O O p.152
1 View Changed All
parameter
0 None
1 SmartDownload
0: None X O O -
dr-91 0h115B Smart copy 3 SmartUpLoad
4 RemoteUpLoad
5 RemoteDownload
dr-92 0h115C Parameter 0 None
0:None X O O -
save 1 Parameter Save
0 No
1 All Grp
2 dr Grp
3 bA Grp
4 Ad Grp
5 Cn Grp
Parameter
dr-93 0h115D 6 In Grp 0: No X O O p.149
initialization
7 OU Grp
8 CM Grp
9 AP Grp
12 Pr Grp
13 M2 Grp
14 run Grp
Password
dr-94 0h115E 0–9999 - O O O p.151
registration
Parameter
dr-95 0h115F 0–9999 - O O O p.151
lock settings
Software
dr-97 0h1161 - - - O O -
version
Display I/O
dr-98 0h1162 board - - - O O -
version
222
Table of Functions
8.3 Basic Function Group (PAR→bA)

been selected.
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Jump
bA-00 - 1–99 20 O O O p.40
Code
0 None
Auxiliary
1 V1
bA-01 0h1201 reference 0: None X O O p.102
source 3 V0
4 I2
0 M+(G*A)
1 Mx (G*A)
2 M/(G*A)
Auxiliary
3 M+[M*(G*A)]
command
bA-023 0h1202 4 M+G*2 (A–50%) 0: M+(GA) X O O p.102
calculatio
n type 5 Mx[G*2 (A–50%)
6 M/[G*2 (A–50%)]
M+M*G*2 (A–
7
50%)
Auxiliary
frequency
bA-033 0h1203 -200.0–200.0 (%) 100.0 O O O p.102
reference
gain
0 Keypad
2nd 1 Fx/Rx-1
1:
bA-04 0h1204 command 2 Fx/Rx-2 X O O p.96
Fx/Rx-1
source 3 Int 485
4 FieldBus4
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2nd 2 V1 0:
bA-05 0h1205 frequency 4 V0 O O O p.96
Keypad-1
source 5 I2
6 Int 485
8 FieldBus4
bA-07 0h1207 V/F 0 Linear 0: X O X p.81
3
Displayed if bA.01 is not set to 0 (None).
4
Refer to the optional items' manuals provided separately for the optional items.
223
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
pattern 1 Square Linear
2 User V/F
3 Square 2
Acc/Dec 0 Max Freq
0: Max
bA-08 0h1208 reference X O O p.74
1 Delta Freq Freq
frequency
Time 0 0.01 sec
bA-09 0h1209 scale 1 0.1 sec 1: 0.1 sec X O O p.74
setting 2 1 sec
input 0 60 Hz
bA-10 0h120A power 0: 60 Hz X O O p.148
frequency 1 50 Hz
Number of
bA-11 0h120B 2–48 X O O p.115
motor poles
Rated slip
bA-12 0h120C 0–3000 (Rpm) X O O p.115
speed
Dependen
Motor
t on motor
bA-13 0h120D rated 1.0–1000.0 (A) X O O p.115
setting
current
Motor
bA-14 0h120E noload 0.0–1000.0 (A) X O O p.115
current
Motor
bA-15 0h120F rated 0, 100–480 (V) 0 X O O p.86
voltage
Dependen
Motor
bA-16 0h1210 64–100 (%) t on motor X O O p.115
efficiency
setting
Load
bA-17 0h1211 inertia 0–8 0 X O O p.115
rate
Trim
bA-18 0h1212 power 70–130 (%) 100% O O O -
display
Input
bA-19 0h1213 power 170–480 V 220/380 V O O O p.148
voltage
0 None
1 All (Rotation type)
Auto 2 All (Static type)
bA-20 - 0: None X X O p.124
tuning Rs+Lsigma
3
(Rotation type)
6 Tr (Static type)
bA-21 - Stator Dependent on motor Dependen X X O p.124
224
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
resistance setting t on motor
Leakage setting
bA-22 - inductanc X X O p.124
e
Stator
bA-23 - inductanc X X O p.124
e
Rotor time
bA-245 -
constant
25–5000 (ms) - X X O p.124
User 0.00–
bA-416 0h1229 Frequenc Maximum frequency 15.00 X O X p.83
y1 (Hz)
User
bA-426 0h122A Voltage 1
0–100 (%) 25 X O X p.83
User 0.00–
bA-436 0h122B Frequenc Maximum frequency 30.00 X O X p.83
y2 (Hz)
User
bA-446 0h122C Voltage 2
0–100 (%) 50 X O X p.83
User 0.00–
bA-456 0h122D Frequenc Maximum frequency 45.00 X O X p.83
y3 (Hz)
User
bA-466 0h122E Voltage 3
0–100 (%) 75 X O X p.83
User
0.00–Maximum Maximum
bA-476 0h122F Frequenc X O X p.83
frequency (Hz) frequency
y4
User
bA-486 0h1230 0–100 (%) 100 X O X p.83
Voltage 4
Multi-step
speed 0.00–Maximum
bA-537 0h1235 40.00 O O O p.67
frequency frequency (Hz)
4
Multi-step
speed 0.00–Maximum
bA-547 0h1236 50.00 O O O p.67
5
Multi-step
bA-557 0h1237 speed O O O p.67
frequency 6
5
Displayed when dr.09 is set to 4 (IM Sensorless).
6
Displayed if either bA.07 or M2.25 is set to 2 (User V/F).
7
Displayed if one of In.65-69 is set to Speed–L/M/H.
225
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Multi-step
bA-567 0h1238 speed O O O p.67
frequency 7
Multi-step
bA-70 0h1246 acceleration 0.0–600.0 (s) 20.0 O O O p.76
time 1
Multi-step
bA-71 0h1247 deceleration 0.0–600.0 (s) 20.0 O O O p.76
time 1
Multi-step
time 2
Multi-step
time 2
Multi-step
bA-748 0h124A acceleration 0.0–600.0 (s) 40.0 O O O p.76
time 3
Multi-step
bA-758 0h124B deceleration 0.0–600.0 (s) 40.0 O O O p.76
time 3
Multi-step
bA-768 0h124C acceleration 0.0–600.0 (s) 50.0 O O O p.76
time 4
Multi-step
bA-778 0h124D deceleration 0.0–600.0 (s) 50.0 O O O p.76
time 4
Multi-step
8
bA-78 0h124E acceleration 0.0–600.0 (s) 40.0 O O O p.76
time 5
Multi-step
bA-798 0h124F deceleration 0.0–600.0 (s) 40.0 O O O p.76
time 5
Multi-step
time 6
Multi-step
time 6
Multi-step
time 7
8
Displayed one of In.65-69 is set to Xcel–L/M/H.
226
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Multi-step
time 7
8.4 Expanded Function Group (PAR→Ad)

been selected.
Comm. Setting Initial

Address Range Value
Ad-00 - Jump Code 1–99 24 O O O p.40
Acceleration
Ad-01 0h1301 0 Linear X O O p.79
pattern
0: Linear
Deceleration
Ad-02 0h1302 1 S-curve X O O p.79
pattern
S-curve
acceleration
Ad-039 0h1303 1–100 (%) 40 X O O p.79
start point
gradient
S-curve
acceleration
Ad-049 0h1304 1–100 (%) 40 X O O p.79
end point
gradient
S-curve
deceleration
Ad-0510 0h1305 1–100 (%) 40 X O O p.79
start point
gradient
S-curve
deceleration
Ad-0610 0h1306 1–100 (%) 40 X O O p.79
end point
gradient
0 Acc
Ad-07 0h1307 Start Mode 0: Acc X O O p.87
1 Dc-Start
0 Dec
Ad-08 0h1308 Stop Mode 0: Dec X O O p.89
1 Dc-Brake
9
Displayed when Ad. 01 is set to 1 (S-curve).
10
Displayed when the Ad. 02 code is set to 1 (S-curve).
227
Table of Functions

Address Range Value
2 Free-Run
Power
4
Braking
0 None
Run Forward
1
Ad-09 0h1309 prevention Prev 0: None X O O p.71
options Reverse
2
Prev
Starting with 0 No
Ad-10 0h130A 0: No O O O p.72
power on 1 Yes
Start DC
Ad-1211 0h130C 0.00–60.00 (s) 0.00 X O X p.87
braking time
0-Rated
Current of
Amount of Inverter/Rated
Ad-13 0h130D 50 X O X p.87
applied DC Current of
Motor x 100
(%)
Output
12 blocking time
Ad-14 0h130E 0.00–60.00 (s) 0.10 X O O p.89
before DC
braking
DC braking
Ad-1512 0h130F 0.00–60.00 (s) 1.00 X O O p.89
time
0-Rated
Current of
DC braking Inverter/Rated
Ad-1612 0h1310 50 X O O p.89
rate Current of
Motor x 100
(%)
Start
DC braking
Ad-1712 0h1311 frequency–60 5.00 X O O p.89
frequency
Hz
Start
Dwell
frequency–
Ad-20 0h1314 frequency on 5.00 X O O p.113
Maximum
acceleration
frequency(Hz)
Dwell
operation time
Ad-21 0h1315 0.0–60.0 (s) 0.0 X O O p.113
on
acceleration
11
Displayed when Ad. 07 is set to 1 (DC-Start).
12
Displayed when Ad. 08 is set to 1 (DC-Brake).
228
Table of Functions

Address Range Value
Dwell Start
frequency frequency–
Ad-22 0h1316 5.00 X O O p.113
during Maximum
deceleration frequency(Hz)
Operation time
Ad-23 0h1317 during 0.0–60.0 (s) 0.0 X O O p.113
deceleration
Frequency 0 No
Ad-24 0h1318 0: No X O O p.94
limit 1 Yes
Frequency 0.00–Upper
Ad-2513 0h1319 lower limit limit 0.50 O O O p.94
value frequency(Hz)
Lower limit
Frequency
frequency– Maximum
Ad-2613 0h131 A upper limit X O O p.94
Maximum frequency
value
frequency(Hz)
Frequency 0 No
Ad-27 0h131B 0: No X O O p.95
jump 1 Yes
0.00–Jump
Jump
frequency
Ad-2814 0h131C frequency 10.00 O O O p.95
upper limit1
lower limit 1
(Hz)
Jump
Jump frequency
Ad-2914 0h131D frequency lower limit1– 15.00 O O O p.95
upper limit 1 Maximum
frequency (Hz)
00–Jump
Jump
14 frequency
Ad-30 0h131E frequency 20.00 O O O p.95
upper limit2
lower limit 2
(Hz)
Jump
Jump frequency
14
Ad-31 0h131F frequency lower limit2– 25.00 O O O p.95
frequency (Hz)
Jump 0.00–Jump
Ad-3214 0h1320 30.00 O O O p.95
frequency frequency
13
Displayed when the Ad.24 code is set to 1 (Yes).
14
229
Table of Functions

Address Range Value
lower limit 3 upper limit3
(Hz)
Jump
Jump frequency
Ad-3314 0h1321 frequency lower limit3– 35.00 O O O p.95
frequency (Hz)
Brake release
Ad-4115 0h1329 0.0–180.0 (%) 50.0 O O O p.153
current
Brake release
Ad-4215 0h132A 0.00–10.00 (s) 1.00 X O O p.153
delay time
Brake release 0.00–
15
Ad-44 0h132C Forward Maximum 1.00 X O O p.153
Brake release 0.00–
Ad-4515 0h132D Reverse Maximum 1.00 X O O p.153
Brake engage
Ad-4615 0h132E 0.00–10.00 (s) 1.00 X O O p.153
delay time
0.00–
15 Brake engage
Ad-47 0h132F Maximum 2.00 X O O p.153
frequency
frequency (Hz)
0 None
Energy saving
Ad-50 0h1332 1 Manual 0: None X O X p.136
operation
2 Auto
Energy saving
Ad-5116 0h1333 0–30 (%) 0 O O X p.136
amount
Acc/Dec time 0.00–
Ad-60 0h133C transition Maximum 0.00 X O O p.78
Rotation count
Ad-61 0h133D 0.1–6000.0[%] 100.0 O O O -
speed gain
0 x1
Ad-62 0h133E Rotation count 0: x 1 O O O -
1 x 0.1
15
Displayed if either OU.31 or OU.33 is set to 35 (BR Control).
16
Displayed if Ad.50 is not set to 0 (None).
230
Table of Functions

Address Range Value
speed scale 2 x 0.01
3 x 0.001
4 x 0.0001
Rotation count 0 Rpm
Ad-63 0h133F 0: rpm O O O -
speed unit 1 mpm
0 During Run
Cooling fan 1 Always ON 0: During
Ad-64 0h1340 O O O p.147
control Temp Run
2
Control
Up/down 0 No
operation
Ad-65 0h1341 frequency 0: No O O O p.109
1 Yes
save
0 None
Output contact 1 V1
Ad-66 0h1342 On/Off control 0: None X O O p.154
options 3 V0
4 I2
Output contact
Output contact
Ad-67 0h1343 On level off level– 90.00 X O O p.154
100.00%
-100.00–
Output contact
Ad-68 0h1344 Off level output contact 10.00 X O O p.154
on level (%)
Always
0
Safe operation Enable 0: Always
Ad-70 0h1346 selection X O O p.112
DI Enable
1
Dependent
0 Free-Run
Safe operation 1 Q-Stop 0: Free-
Ad-7117 0h1347 stop options X O O p.112
Q-Stop Run
2
Resume
Safe operation
Ad-7217 0h1348 deceleration 0.0–600.0 (s) 5.0 O O O p.112
time
Selection of
regeneration 0 No
Ad-74 0h134A evasion 0: No X O O p.155
function for 1 Yes
press
17
Displayed when Ad.70 is set to 1 (DI Dependent).
231
Table of Functions

Address Range Value
Voltage level 200 V: 300–
350
of 400 V
regeneration
Ad-75 0h134B X O O p.155
evasion 400 V: 600–
700
motion for 800 V
press
Compensation
frequency limit
of
Ad-7618 0h134C 0.00–10.00 Hz 1.00 X O O p.155
regeneration
evasion for
press
Regeneration
Ad-7718 0h134D evasion for 0.0–100.0% 50.0 O O O p.155
press P gain
Regeneration
20–30000
Ad-7818 0h134E evasion for 500 O O O p.155
(ms)
press I gain
200 V: Min19– 390[V]
DB Unit turn
400[V]
Ad-79 0h134F on voltage X O O -
400 V: Min19– 780[V]
level
800[V]
0 None 0: None
Fire Mode 1 Fire Mode
Ad-80 0h1350 X O O p.98
selection 2 Fire Mode
Test
Start
Fire Mode
frequency–
Ad-8120 0h1351 Operation 60.00 X O O p.98
Maximum
frequency
frequency [Hz]
Fire Mode 0 Forward 0:
Ad-8220 0h1352 X O O p.98
Run direction 1 Reverse Forward
Fire Mode
Not
Ad-8320 operation - - - - p.98
configurable
count
18
19
Voltage type which DC converted the bA.19 AC input voltage: +20 V (200 Vtype),
+40 V (400 V type). 200 V type is limited to 350 V and 400 V type is limited to 600 V.
20
Displayed if Ad.80 is not set to 0 (None).
232
Table of Functions
8.5 Control Function Group (PAR→Cn)

been selected.
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Cn-00 - Jump Code 1–99 4 O O O p.40
V/F:
1.0–15.0
Heavy (kHz)
IM:
3.0 p.143
Duty
2.0–15.0
Carrier (kHz)
Cn-04 0h1404 X O O
frequency21 V/F:
1.0–5.0
Normal (kHz)
2.0 p.143
Duty IM:
2.0–5.0
(kHz )
0:
Cn-05 0h1405 Switching mode 0 Normal PWM Normal X O O p.143
PWM
Initial excitation
Cn-09 0h1409 0.00–60.00 (s) 1.00 X X O p.130
time
Initial excitation
Cn-10 0h140A 100.0–300.0 (%) 100.0 X X O p.130
amount
Continued
Cn-11 0h140B 0.00–60.00 (s) 0.00 X X O p.130
operation duration
Varies
Low-speed torque
by
Cn-21 0h1415 compensation 50–300 (%) X X O p.130
Motor
gain
capacity
Varies
Output torque
by
Motor
gain
capacity
Varies
Speed deviation
by
Motor
gain
capacity
Main Varies
Cn-24 0h1418 compensation of 50–300 (%) by X X O p.130
speed deviation Motor
21
Applicable to 5.5 - 7.5 kW products. Refer to 5.15 for information on all capacities.
233
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
capacity
No load speed
deviation
Cn-29 0h141D 0.50–2.00 1.06 O X O p.130
compensation
gain
Speed response
Cn-30 0h141E 2.0–10.0 4.0 O X O p.130
adjustment gain
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1 0:
Torque limit
Cn-53 0h1435 4 V0 Keypad- X X O p.130
setting method
5 I2 1
6 Int 485
8 FieldBus
Positive-direction
Cn-5422 0h1436 reverse torque 0.0–200.0 (%) 180 O X O p.130
limit
Positive-direction
Cn-5522 0h1437 regeneration 0.0–200.0 (%) 180 O X O p.130
torque limit
Negative-direction
Cn-5622 0h1438 regeneration 0.0–200.0 (%) 180 O X O p.130
torque limit
Negative-direction
Cn-5722 0h1439 reverse torque 0.0–200.0 (%) 180 O X O p.130
limit
Flying Start- 0:
Speed search 0
Cn-70 0h 1446 123 Flying X O O p.137
mode selection
1 Flying Start-2 Start-1
Speed search bit 0000–1111
Selects the
Cn-71 0h1447 operation 000024 X O O p.137
0001 speed search
selection function at
22
Displayed when dr.09 is set to 4 (IM Sensorless). This will change the initial value
of the parameter at Ad.74 (Torque limit) to 150%.
23
Will not be displayed if dr.09 is set to 4 (IM Sensorless).
24
It will be displayed on the keypad as .
234
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
acceleration.
Initialization
0010 after a fault
trip
Restart after
instantaneous
0100
power
interruption
Starting with
1000
power-on
Speed search
Cn-7225 0h1448 80–200 (%) 150 O O O p.137
reference current
Flying
Start-1
Speed search : 100
Cn-7326 0h1449 0–9999 O O O p.137
proportional gain Flying
Start-2
: 60027
Flying
Start-1
Speed search : 200
Cn-7426 0h144A 0–9999 O O O p.137
integral gain Flying
Start-2
: 1000
Output block time
Cn-7526 0h144B before speed 0.0–60.0 (s) 1.0 X O O p.137
search
Speed search
Cn-7626 0h144C 50–150 (%) 100 O O O -
Estimator gain
0 No
Energy buffering 1 KEB-1
Cn-77 0h144D 0: No X O O p.133
selection
2 KEB-2
Energy buffering
Cn-7828 0h144E 110.0–200.0 (%) 125.0 X O O p.133
start level
25
Displayed when any of the Cn.71 code bits are set to 1 and Cn70 is set to 0 (Flying
Start-1).
26
Displayed when any of the Cn.71 code bits are set to 1.
27
The initial value is 1200 when the motor-rated capacity is less than 7.5 kW
28
Displayed when Cn.77 is not set to 0 (No).
235
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Energy buffering
Cn-7928 0h144F Cn78–210.0 (%) 130.0 X O O p.133
stop level
Energy buffering
Cn-8028 0h1450 0–20000 1000 O O O p.133
P gain
Energy buffering I
Cn-8128 0h1451 1–20000 500 O O O p.133
gain
Energy buffering
Cn-8228 0h1452 0–2000.0% 30.0 O O O p.133
Slip gain
Energy buffering
Cn-8328 0h1453 0.0–600.0 (s) 10.0 O O O p.133
acceleration time
8.6 Input Terminal Block Function Group (PAR→In)

been selected.
Comm. Initial
Address Value
In-00 - Jump Code 1–99 65 O O O p.40
Frequency for Start frequency–
Maximum
In-01 0h1501 maximum Maximum O O O p.58
analog input frequency(Hz) frequency
Torque at
In-02 0h1502 maximum 0.0–200.0 (%) 100.0 O X X -
analog input
V1 input
In-05 0h1505 voltage -12.00–12.00 (V) 0.00 - O O p.58
display
V1 input 0 Unipolar 0:
In-06 0h1506 polarity X O O p.58
selection 1 Bipolar Unipolar
Time constant
In-07 0h1507 of V1 input 0–10000 (ms) 100 O O O p.58
filter
V1 Minimum
In-08 0h1508 0.00–10.00 (V) 0.00 O O O p.58
input voltage
V1 output at
In-09 0h1509 Minimum 0.00–100.00 (%) 0.00 O O O p.58
voltage (%)
V1 Maximum
In-10 0h150A 0.00–12.00 (V) 10.00 O O O p.58
input voltage
236
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
V1 output at
In-11 0h150B Maximum 0.00–100.00 (%) 100.00 O O O p.58
voltage (%)
V1 Minimum
In-1229 0h150C -10.00–0.00 (V) 0.00 O O O p.62
input voltage
V1 output at
In-1329 0h150D Minimum -100.00–0.00 (%) 0.00 O O O p.62
voltage (%)
V1 Maximum
In-1429 0h150E
input voltage
-12.00–0.00 (V) -10.00 O O O p.62
V1 output at
In-1529 0h150F Maximum -100.00–0.00 (%) -100.00 O O O p.62
voltage (%)
Changing 0 No
rotation
In-16 0h1510 0: No O O O p.58
direction of 1 Yes
V1
V1
0.0030, 0.04–
In-17 0h1511 quantization 0.04 X O O p.58
10.00 (%)
level
V0 input
In-35 0h1523 voltage 0.00–5.00 (V) 0.00 - O O p.64
display
Time constant
In-37 0h1525 of V0 input 0–10000 (ms) 100 O O O p.64
filter
V0 Minimum
In-38 0h1526 0.00–5.00 (V) 0.00 O X O p.64
input voltage
V0 output at
In-39 0h1527 Minimum 0.00–100.00 (%) 0.00 O O O p.64
voltage (%)
V0 Maximum
In-40 0h1528 0.00–5.00 (V) 5.00 O X O p.64
input voltage
V0 output at
In-41 0h1529 Maximum 0.00–100.00 (%) 100.00 O O O p.64
voltage (%)
29
Displayed when In.06 is set to 1 (Bipolar).
30
Quantizing is not used when set to 0.
237
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Changing 0 No
rotation
In-46 0h152E 0: No O O O p.64
direction of 1 Yes
V0
V0
0.0030, 0.04–
In-47 0h152F quantization 0.04 O O O p.64
10.00 (%)
level
I2 input
In-50 0h1532 voltage 0–24 (mA) 0.00 - O O p.64
display
I2 input filter
In-52 0h1534 0–10000 (ms) 100 O O O p.64
time constant
I2 minimum
In-53 0h1535 0.00–20.00 (mA) 4.00 O O O p.64
input current
I2 output at
In-54 0h1536 Minimum 0.00–100.00 (%) 0.00 O O O p.64
current (%)
I2 maximum
In-55 0h1537 0.00–20.00 (mA) 20.00 O O O p.64
input current
I2 output at
In-56 0h1538 Maximum 0.00–100.00 (%) 100.00 O O O p.64
current (%)
Changing 0 No
In-61 0h153D rotation 0: No O O O p.64
1 Yes
direction of I2
I2
0.0029,0.04–10.00
In-62 0h153E quantization 0.04 O O O p.64
(%)
level
P1 terminal 0 None
In-65 0h1541 function 1: Fx X O O p.69
setting 1 Fx
P2 terminal 2 Rx p.69
In-66 0h1542 function 2: Rx X O O
setting 3 RST p.185
P3 terminal External
4 p.176
In-67 0h1543 function Trip 5: BX X O O
setting 5 BX p.184
P4 terminal 6 JOG p.107
In-68 0h1544 function 3: RST X O O
setting 7 Speed-L p.67
In-69 0h1545 P5 terminal 8 Speed-M 7: Sp-L X O O p.67
238
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
function
setting 9 Speed-H p.67
11 XCEL-L p.76
12 XCEL-M p.76
RUN
13 p.112
Enable
14 3-Wire p.110
15 2nd Source p.96
16 Exchange p.146
17 Up p.109
18 Down p.109
20 U/D Clear p.109
Analog
21 p.66
Hold
I-Term
22 p.117
Clear
PID
23 p.117
Openloop
24 P Gain2 p.117
25 XCEL Stop p.81
26 2nd Motor p.145
27 U/D Enable -
33 Baseblock -
34 Pre Excite p.89
38 Timer In p.152
40 dis Aux Ref p.102
46 FWD JOG p.108
47 REV JOG p.108
49 XCEL-H p.76
51Fire Mode p.98
KEB-1
52 p.133
Select
Multi-function P5–P1
In-84 0h1554 input terminal 1 111131 O O O p.97
0 Disable(Off)
31
239
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
On filter
selection 1 Enable(On)
Multi-function
In-85 0h1555 input terminal 0–10000 (ms) 10 O O O p.97
On filter
Multi-function
In-86 0h1556 input terminal 0–10000 (ms) 3 O O O p.97
Off filter
P5 – P1
Multi-function A contact
In-87 0h1557 input terminal 0 (NO) 0 000032 X O O p.97
selection B contact
1
(NC)
Selects the
0 NO
NO/NC
In-88 0h1558 0 X O O
operation
command 1 NO/NC
Multi-step
In-89 0h1559 command 1–5000 (ms) 1 X O O p.67
delay time
Multi-function P5–P1
input terminal 0 release(Off) 0 0000
In-90 0h155A - O O p.97
status Connection
1
(On)
SW1 Bit 0–1
In-99 0h1563 (NPN/PNP), 0 NPN 0 - O O -
status 1 PNP
8.7 Output Terminal Block Function Group

(PAR→OU)
been selected.
Comm. Initial
Address Value
OU-00 - Jump Code 1–99 30 O O O p.40
32
240
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
0 Frequency
Output
1
Current
Output
2
Voltage
DCLink
3
Voltage
4 Torque
Analog 5 Output Power
0:
OU-01 0h1601 output 1 6 Idse O O O p.157
Frequency
item 7 Iqse
8 Target Freq
9 Ramp Freq
10 Speed Fdb
12 PID Ref Value
PID Fdb
13
Value
14 PID Output
15 Constant
Analog
-1000.0–1000.0
OU-02 0h1602 output 1 100.0 O O O p.157
(%)
gain
Analog
OU-03 0h1603 output 1 -100–100 (%) 0 O O O p.157
bias
Analog
OU-04 0h1604 0–10000 (ms) 5 O O O p.157
output 1 filter
Analog
OU-05 0h1606 constant 0.0–100.0 (%) 0.0 O O O p.157
output1
Analog
OU-06 0h1606 output1 0.0–1000.0 (%) 0.0 - O O p.157
monitor
bit 000–111
1 Low voltage
Any faults
Fault output 2 other than low
OU-30 0h161E 01033 O O O p.164
item voltage
Final failure of
3 automatic
restart
33
241
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
0 None
1 FDT-1
2 FDT-2
3 FDT-3
4 FDT-4
5 Over Load
6 IOL
7 Under Load
8 Fan Warning
9 Stall
10 Over Voltage
11 Low Voltage
12 Over Heat
Lost
13
Command
14 Run
15 Stop
16 Steady
Multi- 17 Inverter Line
OU-31 0h161F function 18 Comm Line 29: Trip O O O p.159
relay 1 item 19 Speed Search
21 Regeneration
22 Ready
23 Zero Speed
28 Timer Out
29 Trip
31 DB Warn%ED
34 On/Off Control
35 BR Control
36 Reserved
37 FAN Exchange
38 Fire Mode
40 KEB Operating
41 Pre Overheat
42 Minor fault
Torque
43
Detect1
Torque
44
Detect2
0 None
1 FDT-1
Multi-
2 FDT-2
OU-33 0h1621 function 14: Run O O O p.159
3 FDT-3
relay 2 item
4 FDT-4
5 Over Load
242
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
6 IOL
7 Under Load
8 Fan Warning
9 Stall
10 Over Voltage
11 Low Voltage
12 Over Heat
Lost
13
Command
14 Run
15 Stop
16 Steady
17 Inverter Line
18 Comm Line
19 Speed Search
21 Regeneration
22 Ready
23 Zero Speed
28 Timer Out
29 Trip
31 DB Warn%ED
34 On/Off Control
35 BR Control
36 Reserved
37 FAN Exchange
38 Fire Mode
KEB
40
Operating
41 Pre Overheat
42 Minor fault
Torque
43
Detect1
Torque
44
Detect2
Multi-function
OU-41 0h1629 - 00 - - - p.159
relay monitor
Multi-function
OU-50 0h1632 relay On 0.00–100.00 (s) 0.00 O O O p.165
delay
Multi-function
OU-51 0h1633 relay Off 0.00–100.00 (s) 0.00 O O O p.165
delay
243
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Relay2, Relay1
Multi-function A contact
OU-52 0h1634 relay contact 0 (NO) 0034 X O O p.165
selection B contact
1
(NC)
Fault output
OU-53 0h1635 0.00–100.00 (s) 0.00 O O O p.164
On delay
Fault output
OU-54 0h1636 0.00–100.00 (s) 0.00 O O O p.164
Off delay
Timer On
OU-55 h1637 0.00–100.00 (s) 0.00 O O O p.152
delay
Timer Off
OU-56 0h1638 0.00–100.00 (s) 0.00 O O O p.152
delay
Detection 0.00–Maximum
OU-57 0h1639 30.00 O O O p.159
Detection
0.00–Maximum
OU-58 0h163A frequency 10.00 O O O p.159
frequency (Hz)
band
0 None
OT CmdSpd
1
Warn
2 OT Warning
OT
Torque 3
CmdSpdTrip
detection 1
OU-67 0h1643 4 OT Trip 0 X O O p.189
operation
UT CmdSpd
setting35 5
Warn
6 UT Warning
UT
7
CmdSpdTrip
8 UT Trip
Torque
OU-68 0h1644 detection 1 0.0~200.0 100.0 O O O p.189
level35
Torque
OU-69 0h1645 detection 1 0~100 1 O O O p.189
delay time35
Torque 0 None
OU-70 0h1646 0 X O O p.189
detection 2 1 OT CmdSpd
34
35
Visible only when the multi-function relay (OU-31, 33) is set to 43 (Prt Trq Det 1).
244
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
operation Warn
setting36 2 OT Warning
OT
3
CmdSpdTrip
4 OT Trip
UT CmdSpd
5
Warn
6 UT Warning
UT
7
CmdSpdTrip
8 UT Trip
Torque
OU-71 0h1647 detection 2 0.0~200.0 100.0 O O O p.189
level36
Torque
OU-72 0h1648 detection 2 0~100 1 O O O p.189
delay time36
8.8 Communication Function Group (PAR→CM)

been selected.
Comm. Initial
Address Value
CM-00 - Jump Code 1–99 20 O O O p.40
Built-in
CM-01 0h1701 communication 1–250 1 O O O p.196
inverter ID
0 ModBus
Built-in 0:
RTU
CM-02 0h1702 communication ModBus O O O p.196
LnT Inv
protocol 2 RTU
485
0 1200 bps
1 2400 bps
Built-in 3:
CM-03 0h1703 communication 2 4800 bps 9600 O O O p.196
speed 3 9600 bps bps
4 19200 bps
36
Visible only when the multi-function relay (OU-31, 33) is set to 44 (Prt Trq Det 2).
245
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
5 38400 bps
6 56 Kbps
7 115 Kbps37
0 D8/PN/S1
Built-in 1 D8/PN/S2 0:
CM-04 0h1704 communication D8/PN/ O O O p.196
2 D8/PE/S1
frame setting S1
3 D8/PO/S1
Transmission
CM-05 0h1705 delay after 0–1000 (ms) 5ms O O O p.196
reception
Communicatio
CM-
0h1706 n option S/W - 0.00 O O O -
0638
version
Communicatio
CM-
0h1707 n option 0–255 1 O O O -
0738
inverter ID
FIELD BUS
CM-
0h1708 communication - 12Mbps - O O -
0838
speed
Communicatio
CM-
0h1709 n option LED - - O O O -
0938
status
Number of
CM-30 0h171E output 0–8 3 O O O p.201
parameters
Output
0000–FFFF
CM-31 0h171F communication 000A O O O p.201
Hex
address 1
Output
communication 0000–FFFF
CM-32 0h1720 000E O O O p.201
address 2 Hex
Output
0000–FFFF
CM-33 0h1721 communication 000F O O O p.201
Hex
address 3
Output
0000–FFFF
CM-34 0h1722 communication 0000 O O O p.201
Hex
address 4
37
115200 bps
38
Displayed only when a communication option card is installed.
246
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Output
0000–FFFF
Hex
address 5
Output
0000–FFFF
Hex
address 6
Output
0000–FFFF
Hex
address 7
Output
0000–FFFF
Hex
address 8
Number of
CM-50 0h1732 input 0–8 2 O O O p.201
parameters
Input
0000–FFFF
CM-51 0h1733 communication 0005 X O O p.201
Hex
address 1
Input
0000–FFFF
Hex
address 2
Input
0000–FFFF
Hex
address 3
Input
0000–FFFF
Hex
address 4
Input
0000–FFFF
Hex
address 5
Input
0000–FFFF
Hex
address 6
Input
0000–FFFF
Hex
address 7
Input
0000–FFFF
CM-58 0h173A communication 0000 X O O p.201
Hex
address 8
Field bus data 0 No
CM-68 0h1744 0 X O O p.201
swap 1 Yes
Communicatio
CM-70 0h1746 n multi-function 0 None 0: None O O O p.215
input 1
CM-71 0h1747 Communication 1 Fx 0: None O O O p.215
247
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
multi-function
input 2
Communicatio
CM-72 0h1748 n multi-function 2 Rx 0: None O O O p.215
input 3
Communicatio
n multi-function
CM-73 0h1749 3 RST 0: None O O O p.215
input 4
Communicatio
External
CM-74 0h174A n multi-function 4 0: None O O O p.215
Trip
input 5
Communicatio
CM-75 0h174B n multi-function 5 BX 0: None O O O p.215
input 6
Communicatio
CM-76 0h174C n multi-function 6 JOG 0: None O O O p.215
input 7
7 Speed-L
8 Speed-M
9 Speed-H
11 XCEL-L
12 XCEL-M
RUN
13
Enable
14 3-Wire
15 2nd Source
16 Exchange
17 Up
Communicatio 18 Down
CM-77 0h174D n multi-function 20 U/D Clear 0: None O O O p.215
input 8 Analog
21
Hold
I-Term
22
Clear
PID
23
Openloop
24 P Gain2
25 XCEL Stop
26 2nd Motor
27 U/D Enable
33 Baseblock
34 Pre Excite
38 Timer In
248
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
40 dis Aux Ref
46 FWD JOG
47 REV JOG
49 XCEL-H
51 Fire Mode
KEB-1
52
Select
Communicatio
n multi-function
CM-86 0h1756 - 0 X O O p.199
input
monitoring
Selection of 0 Int485
data frame
CM-90 0h175A 0 O O O -
communication 1 KeyPad
monitor
Rev Data
CM-91 0h175B 0–65535 - X O O -
frame count
Err Data frame
CM-92 0h175C 0–65535 - X O O -
count
NAK Data
CM-93 0h175D 0–65535 - X O O -
frame count
CM- Communicatio 0 No
- 0: No X O O -
9439 n data upload 1 Yes
8.9 Application Function Group (PAR→AP)

been selected.
Comm. Setting
Code Name Initial Value Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Range
AP-00 - Jump Code 1–99 20 O O O p.40
0 None
Application
1 - 0:
AP-01 0h1801 function X O O p.117
Proc None
selection 2
PID
PID output
AP-1640 0h1810 (%) 0.00 - O O p.117
monitor
39
Displayed only when a communication option card is installed.
40
Displayed when AP.01 is set to 2 (Proc PID).
249
Table of Functions
Comm. Setting
Address Range
PID
AP-1740 0h1811 reference (%) 50.00 - O O p.117
monitor
PID feedback
AP-1840 0h1812 (%) 0.00 - O O p.117
monitor
PID
-100.00–
AP-1940 0h1813 reference 50.00 O O O p.117
100.00 (%)
setting
0 Keypad
1 V1
PID
3 V0 0:
AP-2040 0h1814 reference X O O p.117
4 I2 Keypad
source
5 Int 485
7 FieldBus
0 V1
2 V0
PID feedback
AP-2140 0h1815 3 I2 0: V1 X O O p.117
source
4 Int 485
6 FieldBus
PID controller
0.0–1000.0
AP-2240 0h1816 proportional 50.0 O O O p.117
(%)
gain
PID controller 0.0–200.0
AP-2340 0h1817 10.0 O O O p.117
integral time (s)
PID controller
AP-2440 0h1818 differentiation 0–1000 (ms) 0 O O O p.117
time
PID controller
feed-forward 0.0–1000.0
AP-2540 0h1819 0.0 O O O p.117
compensatio (%)
n gain
Proportional 0.0–100.0
AP-2640 0h181 A 100.0 X O O p.117
gain scale (%)
PID output 0–10000
AP-2740 0h181B 0 O O O p.117
filter (ms)
Process
0
PID
AP-2840 0h181C PID Mode 0 X O O -
Normal
1
PID
PID lower
PID upper
limit
AP-2940 0h181D limit
frequency–
60.00 O O O p.117
frequency
300.00 (Hz)
PID lower -300.00 –PID
AP-3040 0h181E limit upper limit -60.00 O O O p.117
frequency frequency(H
250
Table of Functions
Comm. Setting
Address Range
z)
40 PID output 0.1–1000.0
AP-32 0h1820 100.0 X O O p.117
scale (%)
PID output 0 No
AP-3340 0h181F 0: No X O O p.117
inverse 1 Yes
0.00–
PID controller
Maximum
AP-3440 0h1822 motion 0.00 X O O p.117
frequency
frequency
(Hz)
PID controller 0.0–100.0
AP-3540 0h1823 0.0 X O O p.117
motion level (%)
PID controller
AP-3640 0h1824 motion delay 0–9999 (s) 600 O O O p.117
time
PID sleep
0.0–999.9
AP-3740 0h1825 mode delay 60.0 O O O p.117
(s)
time
0.00–
PID sleep
Maximum
AP-3840 0h1826 mode 0.00 O O O p.117
frequency
frequency
(Hz)
PID wake-up
AP-3940 0h1827 0–100 (%) 35 O O O p.117
level
Below
0
Level
PID wake-up Above 0: Below
AP-4040 0h1828 1 O O O p.117
mode setting Level Level
Beyond
2
Level
0.00–300.00
AP-4340 0h182B PID unit gain 100.00 O O O p.117
(%)
0 x100
1 x10
PID unit
AP-4440 0h182C 2 x1 2: x 1 O O O p.117
scale
3 x 0.1
4 x 0.01
PID 2nd
proportional 0.0–1000.0
AP-4540 0h182D 100.0 X O O p.117
gain (%)
251
Table of Functions
8.10 Protection Function Group (PAR→Pr)

been selected.
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Pr-00 - Jump Code 1–99 40 O O O p.40
Load level 0 Normal Duty 1:
Pr-04 0h1B04 Heavy X O O p.169
setting 1 Heavy Duty Duty
bit 00–11
Input/output Output open
01
Pr-05 0h1B05 open-phase phase 0041 X O O p.175
protection Input open
10
phase
Input voltage
Pr-06 0h1B06 range during 1–100 (V) 15 X O O p.175
open-phase
Deceleration
Pr-07 0h1B07 time at fault 0.0–600.0 (s) 3.0 O O O -
trip
Selection of 0 No
Pr-08 0h1B08 startup on trip 0: No O O O p.142
1 Yes
reset
Number of
Pr-09 0h1B09 automatic 0–10 0 O O O p.142
restarts
Automatic
Pr-1042 0h1B0A restart 0.0–60.0 (s) 1.0 O O O p.142
delay time
0 None
Motion at 1 Free-Run
speed 2 Dec
Pr-12 0h1B0C 0: None O O O p.177
command 3 Hold Input
loss 4 Hold Output
5 Lost Preset
41
42
Displayed when Pr.09 is set higher than 0.
252
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Time to
determine
Pr-1343 0h1B0D speed 0.1–120 (s) 1.0 O O O p.177
command
loss
Operation
0, Start
frequency at
frequency–
Pr-1443 0h1B0E speed 0.00 O O O p.177
Maximum
command
frequency(Hz)
loss
Analog input 0 Half of x1 0: Half
Pr-1543 0h1B0F loss decision O O O p.177
1 Below x1 of x1
level
Overload 0 No
Pr-17 0h1B11 warning 0: No O O O p.169
selection 1 Yes
Overload
Pr-18 0h1B12 30–180 (%) 150 O O O p.169
warning level
Overload
Pr-19 0h1B13 0.0–30.0 (s) 10.0 O O O p.169
warning time
0 None
Motion at 1: Free-
Pr-20 0h1B14 1 Free-Run O O O p.169
overload fault Run
2 Dec
Overload
Pr-21 0h1B15 30–200 (%) 180 O O O p.169
fault level
Overload
Pr-22 0h1B16 0.0–60.0 (s) 60.0 O O O p.169
fault time
Under load 0 No
Pr-25 0h1B19 warning 0: No O O O p.181
selection 1 Yes
Under load
Pr-26 0h1B1 A 0.0–600.0 (s) 10.0 O O O p.181
warning time
0 None
Under load
Pr-27 0h1B1B 1 Free-Run 0: None O O O p.181
fault selection
2 Dec
Under load
Pr-28 0h1B1C 0.0–600.0 (s) 30.0 O O O p.181
fault time
Under load
Pr-29 0h1B1D lower limit 10–100 (%) 30 O O O p.181
level
43
Displayed when Pr.12 is not set to 0 (NONE).
253
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Under load
Pr-30 0h1B1E upper limit 10–100 (%) 30 O O O p.181
level
No motor 0 None
Pr-31 0h1B1F motion at 0: None O O O p.187
detection 1 Free-Run
No motor
Pr-32 0h1B20 detection 1–100 (%) 5 O O O p.187
current level
No motor
Pr-33 0h1B21 detection 0.1–10.0 (s) 3.0 O O O p.187
time
Electronic 0 None
Pr-40 0h1B28 thermal fault 1 Free-Run 0: None O O O p.167
selection 2 Dec
Motor cooling 0 Self-cool 0: Self-
Pr-41 0h1B29 O O O p.167
fan type 1 Forced-cool cool
Electronic
Pr-42 0h1B2A thermal 1 120–200 (%) 150 O O O p.167
minute rating
Electronic
thermal
Pr-43 0h1B2B 50–150 (%) 120 O O O p.167
continuous
rating
0 Free-Run
Pr-45 0h1B2D BX trip mode 0 X O O -
1 Dec
bit 0000–1111
Stall 0001 Accelerating
prevention At constant
Pr-50 0h1B32 0010 0000 X O X p.171
motion and speed
flux braking 0100 Decelerating
1000 FluxBraking
Start frequency–
Stall
Pr-51 0h1B33 Stall frequency2 60.00 O O X p.171
frequency 1
(Hz)
Pr-52 0h1B34 Stall level 1 30–250 (%) 180 X O X p.171
Start frequency1–
Stall
frequency 2
(Hz)
254
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Start frequency2–
Stall
frequency 3
(Hz)
Stall frequency3–
Stall
Pr-57 0h1B39 Maximum 60.00 O O X p.171
frequency 4
frequency(Hz)
Pr-58 0h1B3A Stall level 4 30–250 (%) 180 X O X p.171
Flux braking
Pr-59 0h1B3B 0–150 (%) 0 O O O -
Gain value
DB resistor
Pr-66 0h1B42 0–30 (%) 10 O O O p.179
warning level
Pre-overheat
Pr-77 0h1B4D warning 90–110 90 O O O p.188
temperature
Pre-overheat 0 NONE
warning 1 Warning
Pr-78 0h1B4E 0 O O O p.188
operation 2 Freerun
selection 3 Dec
Cooling fan 0 Trip 1:
Pr-79 0h1B4F O O O p.183
fault selection 1 Warning Warning
Motion 0 None
1: Free-
Pr-80 0h1B50 selection at 1 Free-Run O O O p.185
Run
option trip 2 Dec
Low voltage
Pr-81 0h1B51 fault decision 0.0–60.0 (s) 0.0 X O O p.183
delay time
LV2 0 No
Pr-82 0h1B52 0 X O O -
Selection 1 Yes
Accumulated
Pr-86 0h1B56 percent of fan 0.0–100.0[%] 0.0 - O O -
usage
Fan
Pr-87 0h1B57 exchange 0.0–100.0[%] 90.0 O O O -
warning level
Fan reset 0 No
Pr-88 0h1B58 0 X O O -
time 1 Yes
Bit 00–01
Pr-89 0h1B59 FAN Status 00 - 0 - O O -
FAN
01
Exchange
255
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Relay Open
Pr-90 0h1B5A - - X O O -
Trip selection
Fault history
Pr-91 0h1B5B - - - O O -
1
Pr-92 0h1B5C Fault history - - - O O -
2
Fault history
Pr-93 0h1B5D - - - O O -
3
Fault history
Pr-94 0h1B5E - - - O O -
4
Fault history
Pr-95 0h1B5F - - - O O -
5 0 No
Fault history
Pr-96 0h1B60 0: No O O O -
deletion 1 Yes
8.11 2nd Motor Function Group (PAR→M2)

The 2nd Motor function group will be displayed if any of In.65–69 is set to 26 (2nd
MOTOR).
been selected.
Comm. Initial
Address Value
M2-00 - Jump Code 1–99 14 O O O p.40
Acceleration
M2-04 0h1C04 0.0–600.0 (s) 20.0 O O O p.145
time
Deceleration
M2-05 0h1C05 0.0–600.0 (s) 30.0 O O O p.145
time
0 0.2 kW
1 0.4 kW
2 0.75 kW
3 1.1 kW
4 1.5 kW
5 2.2 kW
M2-06 0h1C06 Motor capacity - X O O p.145
6 3.0 kW
7 3.7 kW
8 4.0 kW
9 5.5 kW
10 7.5 kW
11 11.0 kW
30.00–400.00
M2-07 0h1C07 Base frequency 60.00 X O O p.145
(Hz)
256
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
0 V/F
Slip
M2-08 0h1C08 Control mode 2 0: V/F X O O p.145
Compen
4 IM Sensorless
Number of
M2-10 0h1C0A 2–48 X O O p.145
motor poles
Rated slip
M2-11 0h1C0B 0–3000 (Rpm) X O O p.145
speed
Motor rated
M2-12 0h1C0C 1.0–1000.0 (A) X O O p.145
current
Motor noload
M2-13 0h1C0D 0.5–1000.0 (A) X O O p.145
current
Motor rated
M2-14 0h1C0E 170–480 (V) Depende X O O p.145
voltage
nt on
M2-15 0h1C0F Motor efficiency 64–100 (%) motor X O O p.145
M2-16 0h1C10 Load inertia rate 0–8 setting X O O p.145
Stator
M2-17 - X O O p.145
resistance
Leakage Dependent on
M2-18 - X O O p.145
inductance motor setting
Stator
M2-19 - X O O p.145
inductance
Rotor time
M2-2044 - 25–5000 (ms) X O O p.145
constant
0 Linear
M2-25 0h1C19 V/F pattern 1 Square 0: Linear X O O p.145
2 User V/F
Forward Torque
M2-26 0h1C1 A 0.0–15.0 (%) X O O p.145
boost
2.0
Reverse torque
M2-27 0h1C1B 0.0–15.0 (%) X O O p.145
boost
Stall prevention
M2-28 0h1C1C 30–150 (%) 150 X O O p.145
level
Electronic
M2-29 0h1C1D thermal 1 100–200 (%) 150 X O O p.145
minute rating
Electronic
50–Electronic
thermal
M2-30 0h1C1E thermal 1 100 X O O p.145
continuous
minute rating
rating
44
Displayed when M2.08 is set to 4 (IM Sensorless).
257
Table of Functions
Comm. Initial
Address Value
Low-speed
Varies by
torque
M2-31 0h1C1F 50–300 (%) Motor X X O p 130
compensation
capacity
gain
Stator leakage Varies by
M2-32 0h1C20 inductance 50–300 (%) Motor X X O p 130
scale capacity
Stator Varies by
M2-33 0h1C21 inductance 50–300 (%) Motor X X O p 130
scale capacity
Varies by
Rotor time
M2-34 0h1C12 50–300 (%) Motor X X O p 130
constant scale
capacity
Rotation count
M2-40 0h1C28 0.1–6000.0[%] 100.0 O O O -
speed gain
0 x1
1 x 0.1
Rotation count
M2-41 0h1C29 2 x 0.01 0: x 1 O O O -
speed scale
3 x 0.001
4 x 0.0001
Rotation count 0 Rpm
M2-42 0h1C2A 0: rpm O O O -
speed unit 1 mpm
258
Troubleshooting
9 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to troubleshoot a problem when inverter protective
functions, fault trips, warning signals, or a fault occurs. If the inverter does not work
normally after following the suggested troubleshooting steps, please contact the LSIS
customer service center.
9.1 Trip and Warning

When the inverter detects a fault, it stops the operation (trips) or sends out a warning
signal. When a trip or warning occurs, trip information and warning information will be
briefly displayed on the keypad. Users can read the warning message at Pr.90. If two
or more trips occur, the trip information with a higher priority will be displayed first on
the keypad.
The fault conditions can be categorized as follows:

• Level: When the fault is corrected, the trip or warning signal disappears and the
fault is not saved in the fault history.
• Latch: When the fault is corrected and a reset input signal is provided, the trip or
warning signal disappears.
• Fatal: When the fault is corrected, the fault trip or warning signal disappears only
after the user turns off the inverter, waits until the charge indicator light goes off,
and turns the inverter on again. If the inverter is still in a fault condition after
powering it on again, please contact the supplier or the LSIS customer service
center.
9.1.1 Fault Trips

Protection Functions for Output Current and Input Voltage
Keypad
Name Type Description
Display
Displayed when the motor overload trip is activated
olt Over Load Latch and the actual load level exceeds the set level.
Operates when Pr.20 is set to a value other than 0.
Displayed when the motor underload trip is activated
ult Under Load Latch and the actual load level is less than the set level.
Operates when Pr.27 is set to a value other than 0.
Over Displayed when inverter output current exceeds 200%
oct Current1
Latch
of the rated current.
259
Troubleshooting
Keypad
Display
Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage exceeds the
ovt Over Voltage Latch
specified value.
Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage is less than
lvt Low Voltage Level
the specified value.
Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage is less than
lv2 Low Voltage2 Latch the specified value during inverter operation. Operates
when Pr.82 is set to 1.
Displayed when a ground fault trip occurs on the output
side of the inverter and causes the current to exceed
gft Ground Trip* Latch
the specified value. The specified value varies
depending on inverter capacity.
Displayed based on inverse time-limit thermal
eth E-Thermal Latch characteristics to prevent motor overheating. Operates
when Pr.40 is set to a value other than 0.
Displayed when a 3-phase inverter output has one or
Out Phase
pot Latch more phases in an open circuit condition. Operates
Open
when bit 1 of Pr.05 is set to 1.
Displayed when a 3-phase inverter input has one or
In Phase
ipo Latch more phases in an open circuit condition. Operates
Open
only when bit 2 of Pr.05 is set to 1.
Displayed when the inverter has been protected from
overload and resultant overheating, based on inverse
time-limit thermal characteristics. Allowable overload
iol Inverter OLT Latch
rates for the inverter are 150% for 1 min and 200% for
4 sec. Protection is based on inverter rated capacity,
and may vary depending on the device’s capacity.
Displayed when the motor is not connected during
nmt No Motor Trip Latch
inverter operation. Operates when Pr.31 is set to 1.
Occurs when the DC voltage relay is not operating
Relay Open when power is input. The Pr-90 code must be set to
rot Trip
Latch
1 to operate. Detected only in 1.5/2.2/4.0kW-4
capacities.
Over torque Occurs when the output current is higher than the level
otd1 trip1
Latch
set in Ou-68. Operates when OU-67 is set to 3, 4.
Over torque Occurs when the output current is higher than the level
otd2 trip2
Latch
set in OU-71. Operates when OU-70 is set to 3, 4.
Under torque Occurs when the output current is lower than the level
utd1 trip1
Latch
Under torque Occurs when the output current is lower than the level
utd2 trip2
Latch
260
Troubleshooting
* The Ground Trip (GFT) feature is not provided in products under 4.0 kW except for
4.0 kW 200 V and 2.2 kW 200 V. An over current trip (OCT) or over voltage trip
(OVT) may occur during low resistance grounding.
Protection Functions Using Abnormal Internal Circuit Conditions and External

Signals
Keypad
Display
Displayed when the temperature of the inverter
oht Over Heat Latch
heat sink exceeds the specified value.
Displayed when the DC circuit in the inverter
oc2 Over Current2 Latch detects a specified level of excessive, short circuit
current.
Displayed when an external fault signal is
provided by the multi-function terminal. Set one of
ext External Trip Latch
the multi-function input terminals at In.65–69 to 4
(External Trip) to enable external trip.
Displayed when the inverter output is blocked by
a signal provided from the multi-function terminal.
bx BX Level
Set one of the multi-function input terminals at
In.65–69 to 5 (BX) to enable input block function.
Displayed when an error is detected in the
memory (EEPRom), analog-digital converter
output (ADC Off Set), or CPU watchdog (Watch
Dog-1, Watch Dog-2).
hwt H/W-Diag Fatal • EEP Err: An error in reading/writing
parameters due to keypad or memory
(EEPRom) fault.
• ADC Off Set: An error in the current sensing
circuit (U/V/W terminal, current sensor, etc.).
ntc NTC Open Latch temperature sensor of the Insulated Gate Bipolar
Transistor (IGBT).
fan Fan Trip Latch cooling fan. Set Pr.79 to 0 to activate fan trip (for
models below 22 kW capacity).
Displayed when pre-PID is operating with
functions set at AP.34–AP.36. A fault trip occurs
when a controlled variable (PID feedback) is
pid Pre-PID Fail Latch
measured below the set value and the low
feedback continues, as it is treated as a load
fault.
Operates when the external brake signal is
xbr Ext-Brake Latch
provided by the multi-function terminal. Occurs
261
Troubleshooting
Keypad
Display
when the inverter output starting current remains
below the set value at Ad.41. Set either OU.31 or
OU.32 to 35 (BR Control).
When the user has set Pr-78 to 2: Free-Run or 3:
Overheat Pre Dec, pre-overheating warning trip of inverter
oh Alarm
Latch
occurs if the inverter temperature exceeds the
temperature set by the user in Pr-77.
Protection Functions for Communication Options
Keypad
Display
Displayed when a frequency or operation
command error is detected during inverter
Lost operation by controllers other than the keypad
lor Command
Level
(e.g., using a terminal block and a
communication mode). Operates when Pr.12 is
set to a value other than 0.
iot Displayed when the I/O board or external

communication card is not connected to the
hold inverter or there is a bad connection.
IO Board Trip Latch
Displayed when the HOLD error code
continues for more than 5 sec.
errc (‘Errc’ -> ’-rrc’ -> ‘E-rc’ -> ’Er-c’ -> ‘Err-‘ -> ’- -rc’ -
> ‘Er- -‘ -> ’- - - -‘ -> ’Errc’ -> …)
Displayed when a communication error is
detected between the inverter and the
opt Option Trip-1 Latch
communication board. Occurs when the
communication option card is installed.
262
Troubleshooting
9.1.2 Warning Messages

Keypad
Name Description
Display
Displayed when the motor is overloaded. Operates when
Pr.17 is set to 1. To operate, select 5. Set the digital output
olw Over Load
terminal or relay (OU.31 or OU.33) to 5 (Over Load) to
receive overload warning output signals.
Displayed when the motor is underloaded. Operates when
Pr.25 is set to 1. Set the digital output terminal or relay
ulw Under Load
(OU.31 or OU.33) to 7 (Under Load) to receive underload
warning output signals.
Displayed when the overload time equivalent to 60% of the
inverter overheat protection (inverter IOLT) level, is
iolw INV Over Load accumulated. Set the digital output terminal or relay
(OU.31 or OU.33) to 6 (IOL) to receive inverter overload
Lost command warning alarm occurs even with Pr.12 set
to 0. The warning alarm occurs based on the condition set
at Pr.13– 15. Set the digital output terminal or relay (OU.31
lcw Lost Command or OU.33) to 13 (Lost Command) to receive lost command
warning output signals. If the communication settings and
status are not suitable for P2P, a Lost Command alarm
occurs.
An alarm occurs when the value set at Pr-86 is less than
the value set at Pr-87. To receive fan exchange output
efan Fan Exchange
signals, set the digital output terminal or relay (OU.31 or
OU.33) to 37 (Fan Exchange).
Displayed when an error is detected from the cooling fan
while Pr.79 is set to 1. Set the digital output terminal or
fanw Fan Warning
relay (OU.31 or OU.33) to 8 (Fan Warning) to receive fan
Displayed when the DB resistor usage rate exceeds the
dbw DB Warn%ED
set value. Set the detection level at Pr.66.
Operates when dr.9 is set to 4. The warning alarm occurs
trer Retry Tr Tune when the motor’s rotor time constant (Tr) is either too low
or too high.
When the user has set Pr-78 to 1: Warning, pre-
Overheat Pre overheating warning of inverter occurs if the inverter
oh Alarm temperature exceeds the temperature set by the user in
Pr-77.
263
Troubleshooting
9.2 Troubleshooting Fault Trips

When a fault trip or warning occurs due to a protection function, refer to the following
table for possible causes and remedies.
Items Cause Remedy
Replace the motor and inverter with
The load is greater than the motor’s
models that have increased
rated capacity.
OLT capacity.
The set value for the overload trip Increase the set value for the
level (Pr.21) is too low. overload trip level.
There is a motor-load connection Replace the motor and inverter with
problem. models with lower capacity.
ULT The set value for underload level
Reduce the set value for the
(Pr.29, Pr.30) is less than the
underload level.
system’s minimum load.
Acc/Dec time is too short, compared
Increase Acc/Dec time.
to load inertia (GD2).
The inverter load is greater than the Replace the inverter with a model
rated capacity. that has increased capacity.
Operate the inverter after the motor
The inverter supplied an output while
has stopped or use the speed
OCT the motor was idling.
search function (Cn.60).
The mechanical brake of the motor is
Check the mechanical brake.
operating too fast.
A ground fault has occurred in the
Check the output wiring.
inverter output wiring.
The motor insulation is damaged. Replace the motor.
Deceleration time is too short for the
Increase the deceleration time.
load inertia (GD2).
A generative load occurs at the
Use the braking unit.
inverter output.
OVT Determine if the input voltage is
The input voltage is too high.
above the specified value.
Determine if the input voltage is
The input voltage is too low.
below the specified value.
A load greater than the power
capacity is connected to the system
Increase the power capacity.
LVT (e.g., a welder, direct motor
connection, etc.).
The magnetic contactor connected to
the power source has a faulty Replace the magnetic contactor.
connection.
264
Troubleshooting
Items Cause Remedy

The input voltage has decreased Determine if the input voltage is
during operation. below the specified value.
An input open-phase has occurred
Check the input wiring.
LV2 when input voltage is low.
The magnetic contactor connected to
the power source has a faulty Replace the magnetic contactor.
connection.
GFT
Reduce the load or operation
The motor has overheated.
frequency.
The inverter load is greater than the Replace the inverter with a model
rated capacity. that has increased capacity.
ETH The set value for electronic thermal Set an appropriate electronic
protection is too low. thermal prevention (ETH) level.
Replace the motor with a model that
The inverter has been operated at low
supplies extra power to the cooling
speed for an extended duration.
fan.
The magnetic contactor on the output Check the magnetic contactor on
side has a connection fault. the output side.
POT
The output wiring is faulty. Check the output wiring.
The magnetic contactor on the input Check the magnetic contactor on

side has a connection fault. the input side.
IPO The input wiring is faulty. Check the input wiring.

Replace the DC link capacitor.
The DC link capacitor needs to be
Contact the retailer or the LSIS
replaced.
customer service center.
The load is greater than the rated
models that have increased
IOLT motor capacity.
capacity.
The torque boost level is too high. Reduce the torque boost level.
Determine if a foreign object is
There is a problem with the cooling
obstructing the air inlet, outlet, or
system.
vent.
OHT The inverter cooling fan has been
Replace the cooling fan.
operated for an extended period.
Keep the ambient temperature
The ambient temperature is too high.
below 50℃.
265
Troubleshooting
Items Cause Remedy

Output wiring is short-circuited. Check the output wiring.
Do not operate the inverter. Contact
There is a fault with the electronic
the retailer or the LSIS customer
OC2 semiconductor (IGBT).
service center.
Keep the ambient temperature
The ambient temperature is too low.
above –10℃.
NTC
There is a fault with the internal Contact the retailer or the LSIS
temperature sensor. customer service center.
A foreign object is obstructing the Remove the foreign object from the
FAN fan’s air vent. air inlet or outlet.
The cooling fan needs to be replaced. Replace the cooling fan.
9.3 Other Faults

When a fault other than those identified as fault trips or warnings occurs, refer to the
following table for possible causes and remedies.
Items Cause Remedy

Stop the inverter to change to
The inverter is in operation (driving
program mode and set the
mode).
parameter.
Check the correct parameter
The parameter access is incorrect.
access level and set the parameter.
Parameters
Check the password, disable the
cannot be set.
The password is incorrect. parameter lock and set the
parameter.
Check the power input to resolve
Low voltage is detected. the low voltage and set the
parameter.
The frequency command source is Check the frequency command
set incorrectly. source setting.
The operation command source is Check the operation command
set incorrectly. source setting.
The motor Power is not supplied to the Check the terminal connections
does not terminal R/S/T. R/S/T and U/V/W.
rotate. The charge lamp is turned off. Turn on the inverter.
Turn on the operation command
The operation command is off.
(RUN).
Unlock the motor or lower the load
The motor is locked.
level.
266
Troubleshooting
Items Cause Remedy

The load is too high. Operate the motor independently.
An emergency stop signal is input. Reset the emergency stop signal.
The wiring for the control circuit Check the wiring for the control
terminal is incorrect. circuit terminal.
The input option for the frequency Check the input option for the
command is incorrect. frequency command.
The input voltage or current for the Check the input voltage or current
frequency command is incorrect. for the frequency command.
The PNP/NPN mode is selected
Check the PNP/NPN mode setting.
incorrectly.
Check the frequency command and
The frequency command value is
input a value above the minimum
too low.
frequency.
Check that the stoppage is normal,
The [STOP/RESET] key is pressed.
if so resume operation normally.
Change the operation modes (V/F,
IMSensorless). If the fault remains,
Motor torque is too low.
replace the inverter with a model
with increased capacity.
Determine if the cable on the output
The wiring for the motor output
side is wired correctly to the phase
cable is incorrect.
The motor (U/V/W) of the motor.
rotates in the The signal connection between the
opposite control circuit terminal
direction to the (forward/reverse rotation) of the Check the forward/reverse rotation
command. inverter and the forward/reverse wiring.
rotation signal on the control panel
side is incorrect.
Reverse rotation prevention is Remove the reverse rotation
The motor only selected. prevention.
rotates in one
The reverse rotation signal is not Check the input signal associated
direction.
provided, even when a 3-wire with the 3-wire operation and adjust
sequence is selected. as necessary.
Reduce the load. Increase Acc/Dec
time.
Check the motor parameters and
The load is too high. set the correct values.
The motor is
overheating. Replace the motor and the inverter
with models with appropriate
capacity for the load.
The ambient temperature of the Lower the ambient temperature of
motor is too high. the motor.
267
Troubleshooting
Items Cause Remedy

Use a motor that can withstand
phase-to-phase voltages surges
greater than the maximum surge
voltage.
The phase-to-phase voltage of the Only use motors suitable for
motor is insufficient. applications with inverters.
Connect the AC reactor to the

inverter output (set the carrier
frequency to 2 kHz).
The motor fan has stopped or the Check the motor fan and remove
fan is obstructed with debris. any foreign objects.
The motor Reduce the load.
stops during
acceleration or Replace the motor and the inverter
The load is too high.
when with models with appropriate
connected to capacity for the load.
load.
The frequency command value is
Set an appropriate value.
low.
Reduce the load. Increase the
The load is too high. acceleration time.
Check the mechanical brake status.
The motor The acceleration time is too long. Change the acceleration time.
does not
The combined values of the motor
accelerate. Change the motor related
properties and the inverter
/The parameters.
parameter are incorrect.
acceleration
time is too The stall prevention level during
Change the stall prevention level.
long. acceleration is low.
The stall prevention level during
Change the stall prevention level.
operation is low.
Change to vector control operation
mode. If the fault remains, replace
Starting torque is insufficient.
the inverter with a model with
increased capacity.
Motor speed There is a high variance in load. models that have increased
capacity.
varies during The input voltage varies. Reduce input voltage variation.
operation. Motor speed variations occur at a Adjust the output frequency to avoid
specific frequency. a resonance area.
The motor Set a V/F pattern that is suitable for
The V/F pattern is set incorrectly.
rotation is the motor specification.
268
Troubleshooting
Items Cause Remedy

different from
the setting.
The deceleration time is set too
The motor Change the setting accordingly.
long.
deceleration
time is too long If motor parameters are normal, it is
The motor torque is insufficient.
likely to be a motor capacity fault.
even with
Dynamic
Braking (DB) Replace the motor with a model Replace the inverter with a model
resistor with increased capacity. that has increased capacity.
connected.
Operation is The carrier frequency is too high. Reduce the carrier frequency.
difficult in
Over-excitation has occurred due to
underload Reduce the torque boost value to
an inaccurate V/F setting at low
applications. avoid over-excitation.
speed.
While the
Change the carrier frequency to the
inverter is in
minimum value.
operation, a Noise occurs due to switching
control unit inside the inverter.
malfunctions or Install a micro surge filter in the
inverter output.
noise occurs.
Connect the inverter to a ground
terminal.
Check that the ground resistance is
less than 100Ω for 200 V inverters
When the and less than 10Ω for 400 V
inverters.
inverter is
An earth leakage breaker will Check the capacity of the earth
operating, the
interrupt the supply if current flows leakage breaker and make the
earth leakage to ground during inverter operation. appropriate connection, based on
breaker is the rated current of the inverter.
activated.
Reduce the carrier frequency.
Make the cable length between the
inverter and the motor as short as
possible.
The motor Check the input voltage and
The voltage between phases is balance the voltage.
vibrates badly balanced.
severely and Check and test the motor’s
269
Troubleshooting
Items Cause Remedy

does not rotate insulation.
normally.
Resonance occurs between the
Slightly increase or decrease the
motor's natural frequency and the
operating frequency.
The motor carrier frequency.
makes Slightly increase or decrease the
humming, or Resonance occurs between the carrier frequency.
loud noises. motor's natural frequency and the Use the frequency jump function to
inverter’s output frequency. avoid the frequency band where
resonance occurs.
In situations of noise inflow on the
The frequency input command is an analog input side that results in
external, analog command. command interference, change the
The motor input filter time constant (In.07).
vibrates/hunts. Ensure that the total cable length
The wiring length between the between the inverter and the motor
inverter and the motor is too long. is less than 200 m (50 m for motors
rated 3.7 kW or lower).
The motor Adjust the DC braking parameter.
does not come Increase the set value for the DC
It is difficult to decelerate
to a complete braking current.
sufficiently, because DC braking is
stop when the not operating normally.
inverter output Increase the set value for the DC
braking stopping time.
stops.
The frequency reference is within Set the frequency reference higher
The output the jump frequency range. than the jump frequency range.
frequency does The frequency reference is Set the upper limit of the frequency
not increase to exceeding the upper limit of the command higher than the frequency
the frequency frequency command. reference.
reference. Because the load is too heavy, the Replace the inverter with a model
stall prevention function is working. that has increased capacity.
The cooling fan
The control parameter for the Check the control parameter setting
does not cooling fan is set incorrectly. for the cooling fan.
rotate.
The motor The product may be reset or a trip
Restart after checking the
stops in case (OCT, OC2, OVT) may occur due
peripheral devices of the inverter.
of lightning. to lightning.
270
Maintenance
10 Maintenance
This chapter explains how to replace the cooling fan, the regular inspections to
complete, and how to store and dispose of the product. An inverter is vulnerable to
environmental conditions and faults also occur due to component wear and tear. To
prevent breakdowns, please follow the maintenance recommendations in this section.
• Before you inspect the product, read all safety instructions contained in this
manual.
• Before you clean the product, ensure that the power is off.
• Clean the inverter with a dry cloth. Cleaning with wet cloths, water, solvents, or
detergents may result in electric shock or damage to the product.
10.1 Regular Inspection Lists
10.1.1 Daily Inspections

Inspection Inspection Inspection Inspection Judgment Inspection
Area Item Details Method Standard Equipment
There must be
Is the ambient
no danger of
temperature
freezing with
and humidity
ambient
within the Refer to 1.3 Thermomete
temperature of -
Environment design range, Installation r,
10–40˚C and
al factors and is there Consideratio hygrometer,
must be no
any dust or ns on page 4. recorder
condensation
All foreign
with ambient
objects
humidity of
present?
less than 50%.
Is there any
abnormal Visual
Inverter No abnormality
vibration or inspection
noise?
271
Maintenance

Area Item Details Method Standard Equipment
Measure
voltages
Refer to 11.1
Are the input between R/
input and Digital
Power and output S/ T-phases
Output multimeter
voltage voltages in. the
Specification tester
normal? inverter
on page 277.
terminal
block.
Is there any
leakage from
Input/Output Smoothing the inside? Visual
No abnormality -
circuit capacitor Is the inspection
capacitor
swollen?
Turn off the
Is there any system and
Cooling abnormal check Fan rotates
Cooling Fan -
system vibration or operation by smoothly
noise? rotating the
fan manually.
Check and
Check the Voltmeter,
Measuring Is the display manage
Display display value ammeter,
device value normal? specified
on the panel. etc.
values.
Is there any
abnormal Visual
vibration or inspection
Motor All noise? No abnormality -
Is there any Check for
abnormal overheating
smell? or damage.
272
Maintenance
10.1.2 Annual Inspections

Inspection Inspectio Inspection Inspection Judgment Inspection
Area n Item Details Method Standard Equipment
Disconnect
inverter and
short
R/S/T/U/V/W
Megger test terminals,
(between and then
Must be
input/output measure
above 5 MΩ
terminals and from each
earth terminal) terminal to
DC 500 V
All the ground
Megger
terminal
using a
Megger.
Is there anything
Tighten up all
loose in the
screws.
device? No
Is there any abnormality
Visual
evidence of parts
inspection
overheating?
Are there any
Connectio
corroded cables?
Input/Output n Is there any
Visual No
-
circuit conductor inspection abnormality
damage to cable
/cable insulation?
Terminal Is there any Visual No
-
block damage? inspection abnormality
Measure Measure with Rated
Smoothing Capacity
electrostatic capacity capacity over
capacitor meter
capacity. meter. 85%
Is there any
Visual
chattering noise
inspection
during operation? No
Relay -
Is there any abnormality
Visual
damage to the
inspection
contacts?
Is there any
Visual No
damage from
inspection abnormality
resistance?
Must be Digital
Braking
Disconnect within ±10% multimeter /
resistor
Check for one side and of the rated analog tester
disconnection measure with value of the
a tester. resistor.
273
Maintenance
Inspection Inspectio Inspection Inspection Judgment Inspection

Area n Item Details Method Standard Equipment
Balance the
Measure
voltage
Check for output voltage
between
voltage between the
phases: within
imbalance while inverter
4 V for 200 V
the inverter is in output
series and
operation. terminal
Control within 8 V for
U/V/W. Digital
circuit Operation 400 V series.
multimeter or
Protection check Test the
DC voltmeter
circuit inverter
Is there an error
output The circuit
in the display
protection in must work
circuit after the
both short according to
sequence
and open the sequence.
protection test?
circuit
conditions.
Check the
Cooling Cooling Are any of the connecting No
-
system Fan fan parts loose? part of the abnormality
connector.
Check the
Specified and
command
Display Is the display managed Voltmeter,
Display value on the
device value normal? values must ammeter, etc.
display
match.
device.
10.1.3 Bi-annual Inspections

area item details method standard equipment
Disconnect
Megger test the cables for
Insulation (between the terminals Must be DC 500 V
Motor
resistance input, output and U/V/ W and above 5 MΩ Megger
earth terminals). test the
wiring.
Do not run an insulation resistance test (Megger) on the control circuit as it may result in
damage to the product. This may cause damage to the inverter.
274
Maintenance
10.2 Storage and Disposal
10.2.1 Storage
If you are not using the product for an extended period, store it in the following way:
• Store the product in the same environmental conditions as specified for operation
(refer to 1.3 Installation Considerations on page 4).
• When storing the product for a period longer than 3 months, store it between -10
˚C and 30 ˚C, to prevent depletion of the electrolytic capacitor.
• Do not expose the inverter to snow, rain, fog, or dust.
• Package the inverter in a way that prevents contact with moisture. Keep the
moisture level below 70% in the package by including a desiccant, such as silica
gel.
• Do not leave the inverter in a humid or dusty environment (e.g. Used as a device or
control panel at a construction site). Disassemble the product and store in a place
that is suitable for operation.
275
Maintenance
10.2.2 Disposal
When disposing of the product, categorize it as general industrial waste. The product
contains materials that can be recycled. Please consider the environment, energy,
and resources and recycle unused products. The packing materials and all metal
parts can be recycled. Although plastic can also be recycled, it can be incinerated
under controlled conditions in some regions.
If the product is left in a prolonged state without a flow of current, the condenser will
deteriorate due to its characteristics. To prevent the deterioration of the electrolytic
capacitor, turn on the power of inverter at least once a year to apply a current for 30–60
seconds. Run the device under no-load conditions.
276
Technical Specification
11 Technical Specification
11.1 Input and Output Specification

3 Phase 200 V (0.4–7.5 kW)
Model Name
03P1 06P0 09P6 12P0 18P0 30P0 40P0
LTVF-N2□□□□BAA
Heavy HP 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10
Applied load kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5
motor Normal HP 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15
load kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11
Heavy
Rated 1.0 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.5 9.1 12.2
load
capacity
Normal
(kVA) 1.2 2.3 3.8 4.6 6.9 11.4 15.2
load
Rated Heavy
2.5 5.0 8.0 11.0 17.0 24.0 32.0
current (A) load
Rated [3-Phase Normal
3.1 6.0 9.6 12.0 18.0 30.0 40.0
output input] load
Rated Heavy
1.5 2.8 4.6 6.1 9.3 12.8 17.4
current (A) load
[1-Phase Normal
2.0 3.6 5.9 6.7 9.8 16.3 22.0
input] load
Output frequency 0–400 Hz(IM Sensorless: 0–120 Hz)
Output voltage (V) 3-phase 200–240 V
Working voltage (V) 3-phase 200–240 VAC (-15% to +10%)
Input frequency 50–60 Hz (5%)
Rated Heavy
input 2.2 4.9 8.4 11.8 18.5 25.8 34.9
Rated load
current (A) Normal
3.0 6.3 10.8 13.1 19.4 32.7 44.2
load
Weight (lb /kg) 1.04 1.06 1.36 1.4 1.89 3.08 3.21
• The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor.
• The standard used for 200 V inverters is based on a 220 V supply voltage, and for
400 V inverters is based on a 440 V supply voltage.
• The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at Cn.04.
• The output voltage becomes 20–40% lower during no-load operations to protect
277
the inverter from the impact of the motor closing and opening (0.4–4.0 kW models
only).
3 Phase 400 V (0.4–7.5 kW)
Model LTVF-N4□□□□BAA 02P0 03P1 05P1 06P9 10P0 16P0 23P0

HP 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10
Heavy load
Applied kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5
motor Normal HP 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15
load kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11
Heavy
Rated 1.0 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.5 9.1 12.2
load
capacity
Normal
(kVA) 1.5 2.4 3.9 5.3 7.6 12.2 17.5
load
Rated Heavy
1.3 2.5 4.0 5.5 9.0 12.0 16.0
current (A) load
[3-Phase Normal
2.0 3.1 5.1 6.9 10.0 16.0 23.0
Rated input] load
output Rated Heavy
current (A) 0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 4.9 6.4 8.7
load
[1-Phase
input, 415V Normal
phase to 1.3 1.9 2.8 3.6 5.4 8.7 12.6
load
phase]
Output frequency 0–400 Hz(IM Sensorless: 0–120 Hz)
Output voltage (V) 3-phase 380–480 V
Working voltage (V) 3-phase 380–480 VAC (-15% to +10%)
Input frequency 50–60 Hz (5%)
Rated Heavy
input 1.1 2.4 4.2 5.9 9.8 12.9 17.5
Rated load
current (A) Normal
2.0 3.3 5.5 7.5 10.8 17.5 25.4
load
Weight (lb /kg) 1.02 1.06 1.4 1.42 1.92 3.08 3.12
(Built-in EMC filter) (1.04) (1.08) (1.44) (1.46) (1.98) (3.24) (3.28)
• The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor.
• The standard used for 200 V inverters is based on a 220 V supply voltage, and for
400 V inverters is based on a 440 V supply voltage.
• The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at Cn.04.
• The output voltage becomes 20–40% lower during no-load operations to protect
the inverter from the impact of the motor closing and opening (0.4–4.0 kW models
only).
278
11.2 Product Specification Details

Items Description
Control method V/F control, slip compensation, sensorless vector
Frequency
Digital command: 0.01 Hz
settings power
Analog command: 0.06 Hz (60 Hz standard)
resolution
Frequency
Control 1% of maximum output frequency
accuracy
V/F pattern Linear, square reduction, user V/F
Overload Heavy load rated current: 150%, 1 minute,
capacity Light load rated current: 120%, 1minute
Torque boost Manual torque boost, automatic torque boost
Select key pad, terminal strip, or communication
Operation type
operation
Analog type: -10–10 V, 0–10 V, 4–20 mA
Frequency setting
Digital type: key pad
• PID Control
• 3-Wire Operation • DC braking
• Frequency limit • Frequency jump
• Second motor function • Slip compensation
Operation • Anti-forward and reverse • Automatic restart
function direction rotation • Auto tuning
• Commercial transition • Energy buffering
• Speed search • Flux braking
• Power braking • Fire Mode
• Up-down operation
Operation
Select PNP (Source) or NPN (Sink) mode.
Functions can be set according to In.65– In.69 codes
and parameter settings.
• Reverse run
• Forward direction
Multi- • External trip
operation
• Jog operation
function • Reset
• Multi step acc/dec-
Input terminal • Emergency stop
high/med/low
(5EA) • Multi step speed
P1–P5 • Second motor selection
frequency-high/med/low
• Frequency reduction
• DC braking during stop
• Fix analog command
• Frequency increase
frequency
• 3-wire
• Transition from PID to
• Select acc/dec/stop
general operation
279
Items Description
Multi-
Less than (N.O., N.C.) AC
function Fault output and inverter
250 V, 1 A,
relay operation status output
Output terminal Less than DC 30 V, 1 A
Analog 0–12 Vdc: Select frequency, output current, output

output voltage, DC terminal voltage and others
• Over current trip • Over voltage trip
• External signal trip • Temperature sensor trip
• ARM short current fault • Inverter over heat
trip • Option trip
• Over heat trip • Out phase open trip
• In phase open trip • Inverter overload trip
• Ground trip • Fan trip
• Motor over heat trip • Pre-PID operation failure
Trip
• I/O board link trip • External brake trip
• No motor trip • Low voltage trip during
• Parameter writing trip operation
• Emergency stop trip • Low voltage trip
• Command loss trip • Analog input error
Protection • External memory error • Motor overload trip
function • CPU watchdog trip • Over torque trip
• Motor light load trip • Under torque trip
Command loss trip warning, overload warning, light load
warning, inverter overload warning, fan operation
Alarm warning, braking resistance braking rate warning, rotor
time constant tuning error, inverter pre-overheat
warning, over torque warning, under torque warning
Heavy load less than 15 ms (normal load less than 8
ms):
Instantaneous (must be within the rated input voltage and rated output
blackout range)
Heavy load more than 15 ms (normal load more than 8
ms): auto restart operation
Cooling type Forced fan cooling structure
Protection
IP 20
structure
Structure/ Heavy load: -10–50℃, Normal load: -10–40℃
working Ambient No ice or frost should be present.
environment temperature Working under normal load at 50℃ (122°F), it is
recommended that less than 80% load is applied.
Relative humidity less than 95% RH (to avoid
Ambient humidity
condensation forming)
Storage -20℃–65℃
280
Items Description
temperature
Prevent contact with corrosive gases, inflammable
Environmental
gases, oil stains, dust, and other pollutants (Pollution
factors
Degree 2 Environment).
No higher than 3280 ft (1,000 m). Less than 9.8 m/sec2
(1G).
Operation
(Apply derating of 1% at a time on voltage/output current
altitude/oscillation
for every 100 m increase starting from 1,000 m, going up
to a maximum of 4,000m)
Air pressure 70–106 kPa
* You cannot use the Conduit option when using the Din-rail.
11.3 External Dimensions

0.4–0.8 kW
281
Items W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 H4 D1 A B Ø
LTVF-N203P1BAA
LTVF-N206P0BAA 86.2 76.2 154 154 164 5 131.5 5 4.5 4.5
LTVF-N402P0BAA (3.39) (3.00) (6.06) (6.06) (6.46) (0.20) (5.18) (0.20) (0.18) (0.18)
LTVF-N403P1BAA
Units: mm (inches)
1.5–2.2 kW
LTVF-N209P6BAA
LTVF-N212P0BAA 101 90 167 167 177 5 150.5 5.5 4.5 4.5
LTVF-N405P1BAA (3.98) (3.54) (6.57) (6.57) (6.97) (0.20) (5.93) (0.22) (0.18) (0.18)
LTVF-N406P9BAA
Units: mm (inches)
282
4.0 kW
LTVF-N218P0BAA 135 125 183 183 193 5 150.5 5.0 4.5 4.5
LTVF-N410P0BAA (5.31) (4.92) (7.20) (7.20) (7.60) (0.20) (5.93 (0.20) (0.18) (0.18)
Units: mm (inches)
283
5.5–7.5 kW
Up
Up side :
LTVF-N230P0BAA side : Φ-1 :
162(6.38)
LTVF-N240P0BAA 180 220 229.5 240 5.5 144 9(0.35) 4.5 4.5(0.18)
Down
LTVF-N416P0BAA (7.09) (8.66) (9.04) (9.45) (0.22) (5.67) Down (0.18) Φ-2 :
side :
LTVF-N423P0BAA side : 6 (0.24)
170(6.70)
5(0.20)
Units: mm (inches)
284
11.4 Peripheral Devices

Compatible Circuit Breaker and Magnetic Contactor Models
Specification of Breaker
Magnetic Contactor
Inverter (MPCB / MCCB)
Capacity Heavy Duty Normal Duty Heavy Duty Normal Duty
Type A Type A Type A Type A
MOG- MOG- 4.0-

0.4-4 1.6-2.5 MNX 9 MNX 9
S1/MOG-H1 S1/MOG-H1 6.3
MOG- MOG- 4.0-

0.75-4 2.5-4.0 9 MNX 9
S1/MOG-H1 S1/MOG-H1 6.3 MNX
MOG- MOG-
1.5-4 4.0-6.3 6.3-10 9 MNX 9
S1/MOG-H1 S1/MOG-H1 MNX
MOG-
2.2-4 6.3-10 MOG-H1 6.3-10 9 MNX 9
S1/MOG-H1
MNX
11.0-
4.0-4 MOG-H1 11.0-16 MOG-H1 MNX 9 MNX 18
16.0
5.5-4 MOG-H1 11.0-16 MOG-H1 14-20 MNX 18 MNX 18
7.5-4 MOG-H1 14-20 MOG-H1 24-32 MNX 18 MNX 25
285
11.5 Fuse and Reactor Specifications

AC Input Fuse AC Reactor
Capacity (kW) Voltage
Model Current (A) Inductance (mH) Current (A)
(V)
0.4
DFJ-101) 10 1.20 10
0.75
1.5 DFJ-15 15 0.88 14
3-phase
2.2 DFJ-20 20 0.56 20
200 V
4.0 DFJ-30 30 0.39 30
5.5 DFJ-50 50 0.30 34
7.5 DFJ-60 60 0.22 45
600
0.4
4.81 4.8
0.75 DFJ-10 10
1.5 3.23 7.5
3-phase
2.2 DFJ-15 15 2.34 10
400 V
4.0 DFJ-20 20 1.22 15
5.5 DFJ-30 30 1.12 19
7.5 DFJ-35 35 0.78 27
1
Note ) DFJ is Class J/600 V level model name of the Bussmann company.
Use Class CC, G, J, L, R or T UL Listed Input Fuse and UL Listed Breaker Only. See the
table above For the Voltage and Current rating of the fuse and the breaker.
286
11.6 Terminal Screw Specification

Input/output Terminal Screw Specification
Rated Screw Torque

Capacity (kW) Terminal Screw Size
(Kgfcm/Nm)
0.4
R/S/T, U/V/W: M3 R/S/T, U/V/W: 5.1 / 0.5
0.75
1.5
3-phase R/S/T, U/V/W: M4 R/S/T, U/V/W: 12.1 / 1.2
2.2
200 V
4 R/S/T, U/V/W: M4 R/S/T, U/V/W: 18.4 / 1.8
5.5 R/S/T : 14.0 / 1.4
R/S/T, U/V/W : M4
7.5 U/V/W : 15.0 / 1.5
0.4
0.75
R/S/T, U/V/W: M3.5 R/S/T, U/V/W: 10.3 / 1.0
1.5
3-phase
2.2
400 V
4 R/S/T, U/V/W: M4 R/S/T, U/V/W: 18.4 / 1.8
5.5 R/S/T : 14.0 / 1.4
R/S/T, U/V/W : M4
7.5 U/V/W : 18.4 / 1.8
Control Circuit Terminal Screw Specification
Terminals Terminal Screw Size Screw Torque (Kgfcm/Nm)

P1-
M2 2.2–2.5/0.22–0.25
P5/CM/VR/V1/I2/AO/24/S+/S-
A1/B1/C1, A2/C2 M2.6 4.0/0.4
287
Apply rated torques to the terminal screws. Loose screws may cause short circuits and
malfunctions. Tightening the screw too much may damage the terminals and cause short
circuits and malfunctions. Use copper wires only with 600 V, 75℃ rating for the power
terminal wiring, and 300 V, 75℃ rating for the control terminal wiring.
11.7 Braking Resistor Specification

Capacity (kW) Resistance (Ω) Rated Capacity (W)
0.4 300 100
0.75 150 150
1.5 60 300
3-phase 2.2 50 400
200 V 3.7 33 600
4.0 33 600
5.5 20 800
7.5 15 1,200
0.4 1,200 100
0.75 600 150
1.5 300 300
3-phase 2.2 200 400
400 V 3.7 130 600
4.0 130 600
5.5 85 1,000
7.5 60 1,200
• The standard for braking torque is 150% and the working rate (%ED) is 5%. If the
working rate is 10%, the rated capacity for braking resistance must be calculated at
twice the standard.
288
11.8 Continuous Rated Current Derating

Carrier Frequency
The continuous rated current of the inverter is limited based on the carrier frequency.
Refer to the following graph.
Carrier Continuous Rated Current (Heavy Duty)

frequency 0.4~2.2kW 4.0kW 5.5kW 7.5kW
(kHz) 200V 400V 200V 400V 200V 400V 200V 400V
1~4 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
6 100% 100% 93% 100% 93% 93% 91% 89%
9 91% 91% 83% 85% 83% 83% 79% 72%
12 81% 81% 73% 70% 73% 73% 69% 59%
15 72% 72% 62% 58% 62% 62% 58% 48%
Continuous Rated Current for Normal Duty Continuous Rated Current (Normal Duty)
200 V 400 V
Capacity Capacity
DR (%) DR (%)
(kW) (kW)
0.4 88 0.4 74
0.75 88 0.75 86
1.5 88 1.5 84
2.2 94 2.2 85
4.0 96 4.0 93
5.5 85 5.5 81
7.5 85 7.5 77
289
Input Voltage
The continuous rated current of the inverter is limited based on the input voltage.
Refer to the following graph.
Altitude
Apply derating of 1% at a time on voltage/output current for every 100 m increase

starting from 1,000 m, going up to a maximum of 4,000m
290
Ambient Temperature/Installation Method
The constant-rated current of the inverter is limited based on the ambient temperature
and installation type. Refer to the following graph.
11.9 Heat Emission

The following graph shows the Nx2000+ inverters’ heat emission characteristics (by
product capacity).
Heat emission has been measured based on the room temperature when the carrier
frequency of inverter is set as default. For more information on carrier frequency, refer to
5.15 Operational Noise Settings (Change of Carrier Frequency Settings) on page
143.
291
11.10 Remote Keypad Option

It is comprised of a remote keypad and cables (1 m, 2 m, 3 m, and 5 m).
Remote Keypad LTOP-DOP-52

Units: mm
292
Installation
1 Remove the RJ45 terminal cover on the inverter I/O cover. Connect the remote
keypad cable to the I/O RJ45 connector.
2 Connect the other end of the connector of the remote keypad cable to the remote
keypad.
Enable
1 Once connected to the remote keypad, the key of the inverter keypad and the
button input of the jog controller are ignored. The input is replaced by the key and
volume input from the remote keypad.
• Within 2 seconds of detaching the remote keypad, the input for the key and
volume is reset to the inverter keypad. (If the frequency setting is set to volume
input, the command frequency will instantly switch between the inverter keypad
volume and the remote keypad volume when attaching and detaching. Take
care so that the motor does not switch to the wrong frequency.)
• If communication is not linked between the inverter and the remote keypad,
"E.vEr" is displayed on the 7-Seg of the remote keypad.
2 Set the dr 91 parameter to 4 in a state of connecting the remote keypad to copy
the parameter settings saved in the inverter to the remote keypad.
• “r-UL” is displayed on the inverter I/O 7-Seg keypad while upload is in progress.
“d” is displayed on the 7-Seg keypad of the remote keypad. After saving, the
message disappears and the default screen is displayed.
• If there is an error, such as poor communication while the upload is in progress,
a warning message saying "Fail" is displayed for 3 seconds, and the action of
saving the parameters into the remote keypad fails.
3 After connecting the remote keypad where the parameter settings are copied to
the inverter product of same model, set the dr 91 parameter to 5, and copy the
parameter settings saved in the remote keypad to the inverter.
• While saving, a message saying “W-dL” is displayed on the inverter I/O 7-Seg.
"U" is displayed on the 7-Seg of the remote keypad. After saving, the message
disappears and the default screen is displayed. If parameter data is not saved
in the remote keypad, you cannot set the dr 91 parameter to 5.
• If there is an error such, as poor communication with the remote keypad, a
warning message saying "Fail" is displayed for 3 seconds, and the action of
saving the parameters into the inverter fails.
• If the parameter code version or the inverter model is different (copying
parameters between 200V ⇄ 400V products), the WErr warning is displayed for
5 seconds, and the action of saving parameters into the inverter fails.
293
UL mark
The UL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada. This mark
indicates that UL has tested and evaluated the products and determined that the
products satisfy the UL standards for product safety. If a product received UL
certification, this means that all components inside the product had been certified for
UL standards as well.
Suitable for Installation in a compartment Handing Conditioned Air
CE mark
The CE mark indicates that the products carrying this mark comply with European
safety and environmental regulations. European standards include the Machinery
Directive for machine manufacturers, the Low Voltage Directive for electronics
manufacturers and the EMC guidelines for safe noise control.
Low Voltage Directive

We have confirmed that our products comply with the Low Voltage Directive (EN
61800-5-1).
EMC Directive
The Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical
equipment used within the European Union. The EMC product standard (EN 61800-3)
covers requirements stated for drives.
294
Index
operation frequency.......................... 75
０
Ad (Advanced function group) .......... 38, 227
0 – +10 V voltage input .............................. 58 Advanced feature group ............. Refer to AP
(Advanced function group)
１ Advanced function group............ Refer to Ad
(Advanced function group)
-10 – +10 V voltage input ........................... 62 analog frequency hold ................................66
Analog Hold ...................................... 66
２ Analog Hold.Refer to analog frequency hold
Analog input .......................................... 23, 38
24 terminal .............................................24, 27 I2 current input.................................. 64
2nd Motor Function group. Refer to M2 (2nd V1 voltage input ................................ 58
Motor function group) Analog output ............................... 24, 38, 157
2nd Motor Operation ................................ 145 AO terminal....................................... 24
2nd Operation mode................................... 96 voltage and current output ............. 157
2nd command source .......................96 AO terminal .................................. 24, 72, 157
Shared command (Main Source) .....96 AP (Advanced function group) .......... 38, 249
ARM short current fault trip..... Refer to Over
３ Current2
assembly diagram .........................................2
3 Phase 200V (0.4-4 kW) ........................ 277 Asymmetric ground power .........................29
3 Phase 400V (0.4-4 kW) ........................ 278 EMC filter .......................................... 29
3-Wire Operation....................................... 110 asynchronous communications system 193
auto restart settings .................................. 142
７ Auto torque boost
Auto tuning ..................................... 124
7-segment display....................................... 36 Auto tuning ........................................124, 224
All (Rotation type) ...................125, 126
Ａ All (static) ........................................ 126
Tr (Static type) ................................ 126
A terminal (Normal Open) .......................... 97
Automatic restart after reset of a fault trip
A1/C1/B1 terminal....................................... 24
condition ...................................................73
AC power input terminal.........Refer to R/S/T
Auto-Tuning
terminal
Default Settings .............................. 125
Acc/Dec pattern.....................................55, 79
auxiliary frequency.................................... 102
linear pattern.....................................79
auxiliary frequency reference
S-curve pattern .................................79
configuration ............................... 102
Acc/Dec reference frequency ..............74, 75
auxiliary reference .......................... 102
Delta Freq .........................................74
auxiliary reference gain .................. 103
Max Freq...........................................74
Configuration .................................. 102
Acc/Dec stop ............................................... 81
final command frequency calculation
Acc/Dec time ............................................... 74
.................................................... 104
Acc/Dec time switch frequency ........78
main reference................................ 102
configuration via multi-function
terminal .........................................76
Maximum frequency .........................74
295
Ｂ Communication......................................... 193
Comm. Address .............................. 202
B terminal (Normal Close) ......................... 97 command loss protective operation199
bA (Basic function group) ...................38, 223 communication line connection ...... 195
Basic configuration diagram ...................... 11 communication parameters ............ 196
Basic group........ Refer to bA (Basic function Communication speed.................... 197
group) communication standards .............. 193
Basic operations ......................................... 35 communication system diagram..... 195
Bipolar ....................................................24, 62 Memory Map................................... 200
Bit .................................................................. 97 PLC ................................................. 193
Bit Off Status ....................................98 protocol ........................................... 202
Bit On Status ....................................98 saving parameters defined by
bit setting ..........................................98 communication............................ 200
multi-function input setting................97 setting virtual multi-function input ... 199
multi-function output setting ...........164 Communication function group .Refer to CM
speed search Setting ......................140 (Communication function group)
stall prevention ...............................172 compatible common area parameter ..... 206
brake control .............................................. 153 Control group . Refer to Cn (Control function
BR Control ......................................153 group)
brake engage sequence .................154 Control terminal board wiring .....................22
brake release sequence .................153 Cooling Fan ............................................... 147
Brake unit .............................................11, 155 cooling fan malfunction................... 183
braking resistance....................................... 20 Fan control...................................... 147
braking resistor circuit ....................179 Crimp terminal connector ...................... 9, 25
Braking Resistor Specification........288 customer service center........................... 259
braking torque.................................288
DB Warn %ED ................................179 Ｄ
built-in communication........ Refer to RS-485
BX ............................................................... 261 DC braking after start ..................................88
DC braking after stop ..................................90
Ｃ DC braking frequency ...............................90
DC link voltage ..................................100, 133
Cable .............................................................. 9 Delta wiring...................................................29
Copper cable ......................................9 derating ..............................................144, 289
Ground Cable Specifications ..............9 Digital Output ............................................ 159
Power I/O Cable Specifications ..........9 Disposal .............................................271, 276
Shielded twisted pair ........................32 Dr (Drive group) .................................. 38, 219
Signal (Control) Cable Specifications.9 draw operation .......................................... 100
cable tie ........................................................ 26 Drive Group ............Refer to dr (Drive group)
Carrier frequency ................................20, 143 Dwell Operation .........................................113
derating ...........................................289 Acc/Dec dwell frequency ................ 113
Factory default output .....................144 acceleration Dwell .......................... 113
Charge indicator......................... 15, 259, 266 deceleration Dwell .......................... 113
Cleaning ..................................................... 271
CM (Communication function group)38, 245 Ｅ
CM terminal .................................... 23, 27, 46
Cn (Control function group) ...............38, 233 electronic thermal motor overheating
commercial power source transition ....... 146 prevention (ETH) .................................. 167
296
ETH trip...........................................167 Filter time constant ............................... 59, 97
EMC filter ..................................................... 29 Flux braking............................................... 171
Asymmetric power ............................ 29 Free-run stop................................................91
Disable ..............................................29 Frequency jump ...........................................95
Enable...............................................30 Frequency limit.............................................93
Emergency stop trip.................... Refer to BX Frequency jump ................................ 95
Energy buffering ........................................ 133 Frequency upper and lower limit value
Energy saving operation .......................... 136 ...................................................... 94
automatic energy saving operation 137 Maximum/start frequency ................. 93
manual energy saving operation ....136 Frequency setting ........................................57
ENT key ....................................................... 37 I2 current input.................................. 64
ETH .......... Refer to electronic thermal motor Keypad .......................................57, 58
overheating prevention (ETH) RS-485 ............................................. 66
Excitation Current ..................................... 129 V1 voltage input ................................ 58
External 24V power source ........ Refer to 24 Frequency setting (voltage) terminalRefer to
terminal V1 terminal
External dimensions
0.8–1.5kW(Single Phase), 1.5– Ｇ
2.2kW(3 Phase) ..........................282
2.2kW(Single Phase), 3.7-4.0kW(3 G100 expansion common area parameter
Phase).........................................283 ................................................................ 209
5.5-22kW(3–Phase)........................284 control area parameter (Read/ Write)
External trip..................Refer to External Trip .................................................... 214
External Trip...................................... 176, 261 memory control area parameter (Read
external trip signal ..................................... 176 and Write) ................................... 216
Monitoring Area Parameter (Read
Ｆ Only) ........................................... 209
Ground ..........................................................17
Factory default output...........................46, 47 Class 3 ground ................................. 17
Fan trip ................................ Refer to Fan Trip Ground Cable Specifications .............. 9
Fan Trip ............................................. 183, 261 Ground Terminal .............................. 17
Fan Warning ..............183, 263, Refer to Fan Special class 3 ground ..................... 17
Warning Ground trip ................... Refer to Ground Trip
fatal ............................................................. 259 Ground Trip ............................................... 260
fault ............................................................. 191 ground fault trip ................................ 260
fatal .................................................259
fault/warning list ..............................191 Ｈ
latch ................................................259
Level type .......................................259 half duplex system.................................... 193
major fault .......................................191 Heavy load ............................................ 4, 144
minor fault .......................................192
trip ...................................................259 Ｉ
warning .................................. 192, 263
Fault signal output terminal...............Refer to I2 terminal .............................................. 24, 64
A1/C1/B1 terminal Voltage/current input for frequency
Ferrite ........................................................... 26 reference input .............................. 24
Fieldbus.................. 57, 69, Refer to Fieldbus IN (Input terminal function group) ..... 38, 236
Communication option ......................96 In Phase Open .......................................... 260
297
Input open-phase protection...........175 Display .............................................. 35
In phase open trip .. Refer to In Phase Open Operation key ................................... 35
Initial excitation time.................................. 130 Keypad display ............................................36
input and output specification .................. 277 Keypad key ..................................................37
input power frequency .............................. 148 [ENT] key .......................................... 37
Input power voltage .................................. 148 [MODE/SHIFT] key ........................... 37
Input terminal ............................................... 23 [RUN] key ......................................... 37
CM terminal ......................................23 [STOP/RESET] key .......................... 37
I2 terminal .........................................24
P1–P5 terminal .................................23 Ｌ
V1 terminal .......................................24
VR terminal .......................................23 latch ............................................................ 259
Input terminal function group .......Refer to IN Leakage Breaker ...................................... 269
(Input terminal function group) Level..............................................................12
Input/output open-phase protection ........ 175 Level type .................................................. 259
Inrush current .............................................. 11 Lifetime diagnosis of components .......... 183
Inspections lifetime diagnosis for fans ............... 183
annual Inspections..........................273 lift-type load ...................................79, 85, 113
bi-annual Inspections .....................274 linear pattern ................................................79
Daily inspections.............................271 Linear V/F pattern operation ......................81
Installation .................................................... 10 Base frequency................................. 82
Basic configuration diagram .............11 Start frequency ................................. 82
Installation Flowchart ........................10 Lost Command .................................262, 263
Mounting the Inverter .......................12 command loss fault trip warning..... 192
Selecting location ............................... 5 Command loss trip ......................... 191
Wiring................................................15 Low Voltage.......................................184, 260
Installation Environment............................... 4 Low voltage trip ......................184, 191
Air Pressure ........................................4 low voltage trip 2 ...............................187, 188
Ambient humidity ................................ 4
Ambient temperature ..........................4 Ｍ
Environmental factors .........................4
Operation altitude/oscillation ..............4 M2 (2nd Motor function group) ......... 38, 256
Instantaneous blackout ...........133, 140, 141 Magnetic contactor ............................. 21, 285
inverse time-limit thermal characteristics Maintenance ............................................. 271
................................................................ 260 manual torque boost ...................................85
Inverter Overload Protection.................... 177 Master ........................................................ 195
IP 20 ........................................................... 280 megger test .......................................273, 274
Micro surge filter ..........................................20
Modbus-RTU Protocol ............. 202, Refer to
Ｊ Modbus-RTU Protocol
Jog operation............................................. 107 monitor ..........................................................51
Jog Frequency ................................107 Motor output voltage adjustment ...............87
Jump Code .................................................. 40 motor protection ........................................ 167
jump frequency............................................ 95 Motor rotational direction ............................33
mounting bolts..............................................12
Ｋ Mounting bracket .........................................13
multi-drop Link System ............................ 193
Keypad ......................................................... 35 Multi-function (open collector) output
298
terminal Operation Group ................................. 38, 218
multi-function output terminal and Operation noise ................................143, 291
relay settings...............................159 Carrier frequency ............................ 143
multi-function output terminal delay Frequency jump ................................ 95
time settings ................................165 Option trip ....................Refer to Option Trip-x
Multi-function relay 1 item(Relay 1) 242 Option Trip-x
Multi-function relay 2 item(Relay 2) 242 Option trip ...............................186, 191
multi-function relay on/off control ...154 OU (output terminal function group) . 38, 240
trip output by multi-function output Out Phase Open....................................... 260
terminal and relay .......................164 Out phase open trip....... Refer to Out Phase
Multi-function input terminal ....................... 23 Open
Control ..............................................97 output block by multi-function terminal... 184
Factory default output .......................23 Output terminal ........ Refer to R/S/T terminal
In.65–69 ..........................................238 Output terminal function group.. Refer to OU
Multi-function input terminal Off filter 97 (output terminal function group)
Multi-function input terminal On filter 97 Output/communication terminal .................24
Px terminal setting options .............238 24 terminal ........................................ 24
Multi-function key ........................................ 36 A1/C1/B1 terminal ............................ 24
multi-function output AO terminal....................................... 24
multi-function output terminal delay S+/S- terminal ................................... 25
time settings ................................165 Over current trip ....... Refer to Over Current1
trip output by multi-function output Over Current1 ........................................... 259
terminal and relay .......................164 Over Current2 ........................................... 261
Multi-step speed frequency ....................... 67 Over Heat .................................................. 261
Configuration ....................................67 Over heat trip .................. Refer to Over Heat
Speed-L/Speed-M/Speed-H .............68 Over Load.................................................. 259
overload trip ............................169, 192
Ｎ overload warning ........... 169, 192, 263
Over Voltage ............................................. 260
No motor trip ................Refer to no motor trip Over voltage trip ........ Refer to Over Voltage
No Motor Trip.................................... 187, 260 overload rate ............................................. 144
No. of time constant filter............................ 59 overload trip.....................Refer to Over Load
Noise ......................................................29, 60 overload warning ............Refer to Over Load
Low-pass filter ..................................59
Normal load ...........................................4, 144 Ｐ
NPN mode (Sink) ........................................ 28
P/I gain ....................................................... 141
Ｏ P1–P5 .............................. Multi-function Input
parameter
Operation command................................... 69 Changed parameter display ........... 152
Configuration ....................................69 initialization ..................................... 149
fwd/rev command terminal ...............69 parameter lock ................................ 151
Keypad..............................................69 password ........................................ 151
RS-485..............................................71 Table of Functions .......................... 218
run command/rotational direction part names .....................................................2
configuration .................................70 password ...........................................151, 217
Operation frequency ....... Refer to frequency peripheral devices .................................... 285
setting phase-to-phase voltage ........................... 268
299
PID Control ................................................ 117 braking resistance rated capacity... 288
Basic PID operation ........................117 derating ........................................... 289
Configuration ..................................117 Motor rated current ......................... 115
differential time ...............................120 Motor rated voltage ........................ 124
integral time (PID I-Time) ...............120 Rated input ..................................... 277
oscillation ........................................120 Rated output ................................... 277
P-gain .............................................119 rated slip frequency ........................ 116
PID feedback ..................................261 Rated slip speed ............................. 115
PID Operation Sleep mode ............122 rated torque current .................................. 158
PID output .......................................119 rating plate ......................................................1
PID reference .................................119 Reactor ................................................ 11, 286
PID Switching .................................123 Regenerated energy ................. 92, 133, 171
Pre-PID Fail ....................................122 Reset Restart ..Refer to restarting after a trip
Pre-PID Operation ..........................122 resonance frequencies ...............................95
PLC............................................................. 193 Carrier frequency ............................ 143
PNP mode (Source) ................................... 27 Ripple ............................................................61
PNP/NPN mode selection switch (SW1) . 22 RS-232....................................................... 195
NPN mode (Sink).............................. 28 Communication............................... 195
PNP mode (Source) .........................27 converter......................................... 195
Post-installation checklist ........................... 31 RS-485....................................................... 193
Potentiometer ................................. 24, 47, 58 built-in communication...................... 66
Power resolution ......................................... 60 Communication............................... 195
Power terminal board wiring ...................... 18 converter......................................... 195
Power Terminal Wiring See power terminals Signal terminal ............................ 25, 66
Power terminals .......................................... 20 RS-485 signal input terminal . Refer to S+/S-
R/S/T terminals .................................20 terminal
U/V/W terminal .................................20 run prevention
Power-on Run ..... Refer to start at power-on Fwd ................................................... 72
Pr (Protection function group)............38, 252 Rev ................................................... 72
press regeneration prevention ................ 155
P gain/I gain....................................156 Ｓ
Protection feature group...............Refer to Pr
(Protection function group) S+/S- terminal ..............................................25
protocol....................................................... 202 Safe Operation mode................................112
Modbus-RTU Protocol ....................202 Safety Information ......................................... ii
PWM........................................................... 143 screw specification ................................... 287
PWM control circuit terminal screw ..... 287
frequency modulation ...................................143 input/output terminal screw
specification ................................ 287
screw size ....................................... 287
Ｑ screw torque ................................... 287
Quantizing................ 60, Refer to Quantizing S-curve pattern ............................................79
Noise.................................................60 Calculation method for actual acc/dec
time ............................................... 80
Selecting the installation site ........................5
Ｒ Side by side ........................................ 7
R/S/T terminals............................. 20, 21, 266 sensorless vector control ......................... 127
Rated .......................................................... 277 Configuration .................................. 128
300
Hold Time .......................................130 Ｔ
IM Sensorless .................................128
Initial excitation time .......................130 Target frequency ................................... 57, 87
sensorless vector control operation Technical Specification............................. 277
guide ...........................................132 specification details ........................ 279
Sequence common terminal .... Refer to CM terminal .........................................................97
terminal A terminal ........................ 97, 165, 176
SET indicator ............................................... 36 B terminal ........................ 97, 165, 176
setting virtual multi-function input ............ 199 Terminal for frequency reference setting
Side by side ............ 7, 291, See side by side ....................................Refer to VR terminal
Slave........................................................... 195 Test run .........................................................33
Slip .............................................................. 115 Time scale setting........................................74
slip compensation operation.................... 115 0.01sec ............................................. 75
speed command loss ............................... 177 0.1sec ............................................... 75
speed search operation ........................... 137 1sec .................................................. 75
Flying Start-1 ..................................139 Timer ..................................................152, 163
Flying Start-2 ..................................139 Torque .................................................... 15, 20
options ............................................140 Torque boost ................................................85
P/I gain............................................141 manual torque boost......................... 85
Square reduction......................................... 55 Over-excitation ................................. 85
Square reduction load ......................82 trip............................................................... 259
V/F pattern operation ........................82 fault trips ......................................... 259
stall.............................................................. 171 fault/warning list .............................. 191
stall bit on/off ..................................172 trip condition monitor ........................ 52
stall prevention ...............................171 trip status reset ............................... 185
standard 4-pole motor ..................... 277, 278 Troubleshooting Fault Trips ........... 264
start at power-on ......................................... 72 troubleshooting ......................................... 259
Start Mode ................................................... 87 other faults ...................................... 266
Accelerating start .............................. 87 Troubleshooting Fault Trips ........... 264
DC braking after start .......................88
Station ID ................................................... 202 Ｕ
Stop Mode ................................................... 89
DC braking after stop .......................90 U/V/W terminal............................. 20, 21, 266
Deceleration stop.............................. 89 Under Load
Free-run stop ....................................91 under load trip ............. 181, 192, 259
Power braking...................................92 under load warning ..... 181, 192, 263
storage ....................................................... 275 under load trip .............. Refer to Under Load
Storage temperature .................................... 4 Unipolar ........................................................24
Surge killer .............................................21, 31 Up-Down Operation ................................. 109
SW1.......Refer to PNP/NPN mode selection User V/F pattern Operation ........................83
switch (SW1), Refer to PNP/NPN mode Using the keypad.........................................38
selection switch (SW1) groups/codes .................................... 39
SW2.. Refer to analog input selection switch Jump Code ....................................... 40
(SW2)
Switch ........................................................... 22 Ｖ
PNP/NPN mode selection switch
(SW1) ............................................22 V/F control ....................................................81
Linear V/F pattern operation ............ 81
301
square reduction V/F pattern operation fault/warning list .............................. 191
......................................................82 warning messages ......................... 263
User V/F pattern Operation ..............83 Wiring ............................................................15
V1 terminal................................................... 24 3 core cables .................................... 20
Variable torque load ............................83, 136 Control terminal board wiring ........... 22
voltage drop ................................................. 20 Copper cable .................................... 15
Voltage Drop.................................................. 9 Cover disassembly ........................... 16
Voltage/current output terminal . Refer to AO Ferrite ............................................... 26
terminal Ground .............................................. 17
VR terminal ............................................23, 58 Power terminal board wiring ............. 18
Pre-insulated Crimp Terminal .......... 25
Ｗ Re-assembling the covers ................ 30
Wiring length............................... 20, 26
warning....................................................... 259
302
Electrical Standard Products (ESP) Ofﬁces:
HEAD OFFICE L&T Electrical & Automation L&T Electrical & Automation
L&T Electrical & Automation Khairasol, Degaul Avenue Unnati Building, 2nd Floor
L&T Business Park, Durgapur 713 212 Automation Campus
Tower 'B' / 3rd Floor Tel: 0343-2540448 / 2540449 / 2540443 A-600, TTC Industrial area
Saki Vihar Road, Powai Fax: 0343-2540442 Shil-Mahape road, Mahape
Mumbai 400 072 e-mail: esp-dgp@LNTEBG.com Navi Mumbai - 400710
Tel: 022-67053229
Fax: 022-67051112 L&T Electrical & Automation L&T Electrical & Automation
e-mail: cic@LNTEBG.com 5, Milanpur Road, Bamuni Maidan 12, Shivaji Nagar
Guwahati 781 021 North Ambajhari Road
BRANCH OFFICES Tel: +91 8876554417 Nagpur 440 010
e-mail: esp-ghy@LNTEBG.com Tel: 0712-2260012 / 6606421
L&T Electrical & Automation Fax: 2260030 / 6606434
501, Sakar Complex I L&T Electrical & Automation e-mail: esp-nag@LNTEBG.com
Opp. Gandhigram Rly. Station II Floor, Vasantha Chambers
Ashram Road 5-10-173, Fateh Maidan Road L&T Electrical & Automation
Ahmedabad 380 009 Hyderabad 500 004 32, Shivaji Marg
Tel: 079-66304006-11 Tel: 040-67015052 P. O. Box 6223
Fax: 079-66304025 Fax: 040-23296468 New Delhi 110 015
e-mail: esp-ahm@LNTEBG.com e-mail: esp-hyd@LNTEBG.com Tel: 011-41419514 / 5 / 6
Fax: 011-41419600
L&T Electrical & Automation L&T Electrical & Automation e-mail: esp-del@LNTEBG.com
M/s Larsen & Toubro Ltd Monarch Building, 1st Floor
No 38, Cubbon Road D-236 & 237, Amrapali Marg L&T Electrical & Automation
Bengaluru 560 001 VaiShali Nagar Grand Chandra, 2nd Floor
Tel: 080-46136103 / 100 Jaipur 302 021 Fraser Road
e-mail: esp-bIr@LNTEBG.com Tel: 0141-4385914 to 18 Opposite Doordarshan Kendra
Fax: 0141-4385925 Patna 800001
L&T Electrical & Automation e-mail: esp-jai@LNTEBG.com Tel: 8102440613
131/1, Zone II, Maharana Pratap Nagar e-mail: esp-patna@LNTEBG.com
Bhopal 462 011 L&T Electrical & Automation
Tel: 0755-3080511 / 05 / 08 / 13 / 17 / 19 Akashdeep Plaza, 2nd Floor L&T Electrical & Automation
Fax: 0755-3080502 P. O. Golmuri L&T House
e-mail: esp-bho@LNTEBG.com Jamshedpur 831 003 P. O. Box 119
Jharkhand 191/1, Dhole Patil Road
L&T Electrical & Automation Tel: 0657-2312205 / 38 Pune 411 001
Fax: 0657-2341250 Tel: 020-48544395 / 48544279
Plot No. 559, Annapurna Complex
e-mail: esp-jam@LNTEBG.com e-mail: esp.pnq@LNTEBG.com
Lewis Road
Bhubaneswar 751 014 L&T Electrical & Automation
Tel: 0674-6451342 / 2436690 / 2436696 L&T Electrical & Automation
Skybright Bldg; M. G. Road Crystal Tower,
Fax: 0674-2537309 Ravipuram Junction, Ernakulam
e-mail: esp-bsr@LNTEBG.com 4th Floor, G. E. Road
Kochi 682 016 Telibandha
Tel: 0484-4409420 / 4 / 5 / 7 Raipur - 492 006
L&T Electrical & Automation Fax: 0484-4409426
Aspire Towers, 4th Floor Tel: 0771-4283214
e-mail: esp-cok@LNTEBG.com
Plot No. 55, Phase-I e-mail: esp-raipur@LNTEBG.com
Industrial & Business Park L&T Electrical & Automation
Chandigarh-160 002 L&T Electrical & Automation
3-B, Shakespeare Sarani
Tel: 0172-4646840 / 41 / 42 / 46 / 53 3rd Floor
Kolkata 700 071
Fax: 0172-4646802 Vishwakarma Chambers
Tel: 033-42005982
Email: esp-chd@LNTEBG.com Fax: 033-22821025 / 7587 Majura Gate, Ring Road
e-mail: esp-ccu@LNTEBG.com Surat 395 002
L&T Electrical & Automation Tel: 0261-2473726
L&T Construction Campus L&T Electrical & Automation Fax: 0261-2477078
TC-1 Building, II Floor A28, Indira Nagar, Faizabad Road e-mail: esp-sur@LNTEBG.com
Mount-Poonamallee Road Lucknow 226 016
Tel: 0522-4929905 / 04 L&T Electrical & Automation
Manapakkam
Fax: 0522-2311671 Radhadaya Complex
Chennai 600 089
e-mail: esp-Lko@LNTEBG.com Old Padra Road
Tel: 044-2270 6800
Near Charotar Society
Fax: 044-2270 6940 Vadodara 390 007
e-mail: esp-maa1@LNTEBG.com L&T Electrical & Automation
No: 73, Karpaga Nagar, 8th Street Tel: 0265-6613610 / 1 / 2
K. Pudur Fax: 0265-2336184
L&T Electrical & Automation e-mail: esp-bar@LNTEBG.com
67, Appuswamy Road, Post Bag 7156 Madurai 625007
Opp. Nirmala College Tel: 0452-2567405 / 2561068 / 2561657
Fax: 0452-2567552 L&T Electrical & Automation
Coimbatore 641 045 Door No. 49-38-14/3/2, 1st ﬂoor,
Tel: 0422-4588120 / 1 / 5 e-mail: esp-mdu@LNTEBG.com
NGGO’s Colony, Akkayyapalem,
Fax: 0422-2588148 Visakhapatnam - 530 016
e-mail: esp-cbe@LNTEBG.com L&T Electrical & Automation
L&T Business Park, Tower ’B' / 3rd Floor Tel: 0891-2791126 / 2711125
Saki Vihar Road, Powai Fax: 0891-2791100
L&T Electrical & Automation e-mail: esp-viz@LNTEBG.com
Mumbai 400 072
1&2, Vijay Park, Main Chakrata road Tel: 022-67052874 / 2737 / 1156
Opp: Anandam, Ballupur Chowk Fax: 022-67051112
Dehradun 248001 e-mail: esp-bom@LNTEBG.com
Tel: 9582252411
L&T Electrical & Automation, Electrical Standard Prodcts

L&T Business Park, TC-2, Tower B, 3rd Floor, Gate No. 5, Saki Vihar Road, Powai,
Mumbai - 400 072, INDIA www.Lntebg.com
Customer Interaction Center (CIC)

BSNL / MTNL (toll-free): 1800 233 5858 Reliance (toll-free): 1800 200 5858
Tel: 022 6774 5858 Email: cic@Lntebg.com Web: www.Lntebg.com

Nx2000 Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nx2000 Technical Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

Variable Frequency Drive

0.4kW HD – 11kW ND (230V, 415V)

Safety Symbols in This Manual

Working Voltage DN□-□□□C DN□-□□□S

Quick Reference Table

I want to set up sensorless vector control. p.127

What are the recommended wiring lengths? p.26

The motor is too noisy. p.143

I want to apply PID control on my system. p.117

I want to check recent trips and fault histories. p 256

I want to install a frequency meter on the analog terminal. p.24

I want to check the motor's current using an ammeter. p.51

I want to operate the inverter using a multi-step speed configuration. p.67

The motor is too hot. p.167

The inverter is too hot. p.177

The cooling fan does not work. p.147

2 Installing the Inverter ......................................................................................... 10

3 Learning to Perform Basic Operations ............................................................. 35

3.4 Monitoring the Operation .......................................................................... 51

4 Learning Basic Features.................................................................................... 54

4.11.3 User V/F Pattern Operation .......................................................... 83

5 Learning Advanced Features .......................................................................... 100

5.8.2 Pre-PID Operation ...................................................................... 122

5.29.3 Multi-Function Relay Terminal Delay Time Settings ................... 165

6 Learning Protection Features.......................................................................... 167

7 RS-485 Communication Features ................................................................... 193

7.3 Communication Protocol ......................................................................... 202

8 Table of Functions ........................................................................................... 218

9 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 259

10 Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 271

10.2 Storage and Disposal ............................................................................. 275

11 Technical Specification ................................................................................... 277

Index ...................................................................................................................... 295

1 Preparing the Installation

1.1 Product Identification

Power Source Specification ND/HD Amps

Part Number Description:

1.2 Part Names

1.3 Installation Considerations

1.4 Selecting the Installation Site

• If you are installing multiple inverters, of different ratings, provide sufficient

1.5 Cable Selection

Ground Cable and Power Cable Specification

Signal (Control) Cable Specifications

2 Installing the Inverter

Product Identification (p.1 Ref.)

Select the Installation Location (p.4 Ref.)

Mounting the Inverter (p.12 Ref.)

Wiring the Ground Connection (p.17 Ref.)

Power and Signal Wiring (p.18 Ref.)

Post-Installation Checks (p.31 Ref.)

Turning on the Inverter

Parameter Configuration (p.41 Ref.)

Testing (p.33 Ref.)

2.1 Mount on the Wall or within the Panel

• Install the inverter before carrying out wiring connections.

Step 1: Remove the front cover

Step 2: Ground Connection

Step3 Power Terminal Wiring

Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Terminal Labels Name Description

Step 4 Control Terminal Wiring

Control Board Switches